Xerox Workcentre M24 User Manual

User Guide  
WorkCentre M24  
Printer/Copier  
USER GUIDE (COPIER) 1-1  
User Guide (Copier) 1-1  
Control Panel 1-4  
Touch Screen 1-7  
Power Switch 1-8  
Audio Tones 1-8  
Duplex Automatic Document Feeder (DADF) 1-8  
Document Glass 1-8  
Paper Trays 1-9  
Output Trays 1-9  
Power Saver Mode 1-10  
Exiting the Power Saver Mode 1-10  
Making Copies Using the Duplex Automatic Document Feeder 1-11  
Making Copies from the Document Glass 1-12  
Making Copies Using Features 1-13  
Tray 1 1-17  
Tandem Tray Module 1-17  
3-Tray Module 1-17  
Tray 5 (Bypass) 1-17  
Auto Size Detect for Tray 5 (Bypass) 1-18  
Auto Tray Switching 1-18  
Loading Stock 1-19  
Paper 1-19  
Transparencies 1-21  
Loading Paper into Trays 1, 2, 3, and 4 1-22  
Loading Stock into Tray 5 (Bypass) 1-22  
Loading 12 x 18 inch Paper 1-23  
Loading SRA3 Paper into Tray 5 (Bypass) 1-24  
Copier Features 1-25  
iii  
USER GUIDE (COPIER) 1-1  
Basic Copying Tab 1-25  
Output Color 1-26  
2 Sided 1-28  
Reduce/Enlarge 1-31  
Paper Supply 1-35  
Added Features Tab 1-38  
2 Sided 1-39  
Output 1-42  
Margin Shift 1-45  
Border Erase 1-48  
Image Quality Tab 1-50  
Original Type 1-51  
Auto Exposure 1-53  
Lighter/Darker/Contrast 1-54  
Sharpness/Saturation 1-55  
Color Shift 1-56  
Color Balance 1-57  
Image Quality Presets 1-58  
Output Format Tab 1-59  
Multiple Up 1-60  
Transparency Separators 1-63  
Covers 1-66  
Repeat Image 1-68  
Poster 1-70  
Mirror Image/ Negative Image 1-72  
Scan Options Tab 1-73  
Original Size 1-74  
Mixed Size Originals 1-76  
Bound Originals 1-77  
Image Rotation 1-79  
Original Orientation 1-80  
Book Duplex 1-81  
Job Assembly Tab 1-83  
Stored Jobs 1-84  
Build Job 1-86  
Booklet Creation 1-88  
Duplex Automatic Document Feeder (DADF) (Optional  
iv  
Component Names and Functions 1-89  
Document Specifications 1-90  
Documents Not Recommended 1-91  
Loading the Documents 1-91  
Placing Documents on the Document Glass 1-91  
Loading Documents in the DADF 1-92  
Using the Finisher 1-93  
Stapling Options 1-94  
Checking Current Jobs 1-96  
Changing the Print Priority 1-97  
Checking Completed Jobs 1-98  
Outputting/Deleting Secure Prints 1-99  
Outputting Sample Prints 1-101  
Delayed Print 1-103  
Deleting Stored Documents 1-105  
Machine Information 1-109  
Cleaning the DADF and Document Glass 1-110  
Changing Toner Cartridges 1-111  
Speed by Media 1-114  
Dimensions and Weight 1-115  
v
USER GUIDE (PRINT) 2-1  
User Guide (Print) 2-1  
Overview 2-1  
As a Local Printer 2-2  
As a Network Printer 2-3  
Windows Network (SMB) 2-3  
TCP/IP (LPD) 2-3  
Installing the Print Drivers 2-5  
vi  
Overview 2-5  
Installing PostScript or PCL Print Driver 2-6  
Configuring the PostScript Print Driver on Windows 95/98/Me 2-8  
Configuration Tab Settings 2-9  
Options Tab Settings 2-12  
Output Settings Tab Settings 2-13  
Color Settings Tab Settings 2-15  
Configuring the PCL Print Driver on Windows 95/98/Me 2-16  
Print Driver Properties 2-16  
Configuration Tab Settings 2-17  
Document Default Properties 2-20  
Installing PostScript or PCL Print Driver 2-23  
Configuring PostScript Print Driver on Windows NT 4.0 2-26  
Print Driver Properties 2-26  
Installable Options Settings 2-27  
Configuration Tab Settings 2-28  
Print Driver Document Defaults 2-29  
Advanced Tab Settings 2-30  
Output Settings Tab Settings 2-34  
Configuring the PCL Print Driver on Windows NT 4.0 2-36  
Print Driver Properties 2-36  
Configuration Tab Settings 2-37  
Printer Tab Settings 2-39  
Document Defaults 2-40  
Installing PostScript or PCL Print Driver 2-43  
Configuring the PostScript Print Driver on Windows 2000/XP 2-45  
Print Driver Properties 2-45  
Installable Options Settings 2-46  
Configuration Tab Settings 2-47  
Printing Preferences 2-48  
Advanced Options Dialog Box Settings 2-49  
Output Setting Tab Settings 2-53  
Configuring the PCL Print Driver on Windows 2000/XP 2-55  
vii  
USER GUIDE (PRINT) 2-1  
Print Driver Properties 2-55  
Configuration Tab Settings 2-56  
Printer Tab Settings 2-58  
Printing Defaults 2-59  
Installing PostScript Print Driver 2-62  
Setting the Print Driver Properties on Macintosh 2-64  
Configure Settings 2-64  
Printer Specific Options Settings 2-65  
Basic Printing 2-69  
Differences From Copying 2-69  
Prior to Printing 2-70  
Printing Procedure 2-70  
Setting Printing Features 2-72  
Switching Printer Off-line 2-73  
Cancel Print from the Workstation 2-74  
Canceling a Print Job Using Internet Services 2-74  
Canceling a Print Job From the Printer 2-74  
Canceling a Print Job in Process 2-75  
Canceling a Print Job During Print 2-75  
Canceling Jobs Stored in the Printer 2-76  
Special Printing 2-77  
viii  
Printing with Black 2-77  
Print Mode 2-78  
Image Adjustment Mode 2-78  
Black & High Speed 2-79  
Black & Standard 2-80  
Black & High Quality 2-81  
Printing with Auto 2-82  
Print Mode 2-83  
Image Adjustment Mode 2-84  
Image Auto Correction 2-86  
Auto & High Speed 2-87  
Auto & Standard 2-88  
Auto & High Quality 2-89  
Printing with Auto 2-90  
Adjusting Image Settings (Brightness/Chroma/Contrast) 2-92  
Adjusting Color Balance 2-94  
Adjusting Profile Settings 2-95  
Adjusting Detailed Settings 2-98  
Options for the Text Group 2-98  
Options for the Graphic Group 2-99  
Options for the Photo Group 2-100  
Options for the Whole Document 2-101  
Setting Secure Print Jobs 2-103  
Printing Secure Print Jobs 2-104  
At the Workstation 2-104  
At the Printer 2-105  
Setting Delayed Print Jobs 2-106  
Printing Delayed Print Jobs 2-107  
At the Workstation 2-107  
At the Printer 2-107  
Sample Print 2-108  
ix  
USER GUIDE (PRINT) 2-1  
Setting Sample Print Jobs 2-108  
Printing Sample Print Jobs 2-109  
At the Workstation 2-109  
Internet Services 2-110  
Introduction 2-110  
Screen Structure 2-111  
System Structure 2-112  
Netscape Communicator 2-113  
Internet Explorer 2-114  
Proxy Server Setting 2-115  
Port Number Setting 2-115  
Accessing Internet Services from the Workstation 2-116  
Internet Services Features 2-117  
Printing Documents 2-119  
Viewing the Active Jobs List 2-120  
Deleting Jobs 2-121  
x
USER GUIDE (SCAN) 3-1  
User Guide (Scan) 3-1  
Scanning Using Mailboxes 3-2  
Scanning Using Templates 3-2  
How to Scan Using Mailboxes 3-3  
Output Color 3-6  
Scanning Resolution 3-8  
2 Sided Originals 3-9  
2 Sided Originals 3-12  
Reduce/Enlarge 3-13  
Using Presets 3-13  
Using Variable% 3-14  
Using Auto % 3-15  
Scan Size 3-16  
Bound Originals 3-17  
Mixed Size Originals 3-19  
Border Erase 3-20  
Original Type 3-23  
Image Compression 3-24  
Lighter/Darker/Contrast 3-25  
File Format 3-26  
Auto Exposure 3-27  
How to Pause or Cancel a Scanning Job 3-28  
xi  
USER GUIDE (SCAN) 3-1  
How to Cancel Scanning Jobs from the Workstation 3-28  
Checking a Scan Job 3-29  
Deleting a Scan Job 3-30  
Scanning in Batches 3-31  
Retrieving/Deleting Scanned Documents 3-32  
Retrieving a Scanned Document 3-32  
Deleting a Scanned Document 3-32  
Configuring the Client for Scanning 3-33  
Required Environment 3-33  
Installation 3-34  
Uninstallation 3-34  
Changing Network Scanner Utility Settings 3-35  
Importing to an Application 3-35  
Requirements 3-36  
Scan and Mail 3-37  
Fax 3-40  
xii  
USER GUIDE (MACHINE ADMINISTRATOR) 4-1  
User Guide (Machine Administrator) 4-1  
Overview 4-1  
System Settings 4-2  
Setting and Changing the Administrator Password 4-3  
Entering the System Settings Mode 4-5  
Exiting System Settings Mode 4-6  
Changing Settings in System Settings Mode 4-6  
Machine Clock/Timers Setting 4-8  
Audio Tone Settings 4-10  
Setting Screen Defaults 4-12  
Paper Tray Attributes 4-13  
Setting Printing Priority Defaults 4-17  
Image Quality Adjustment 4-18  
Image Quality Setting 4-18  
Auto Gradation Adjustment 4-21  
Reports Settings 4-23  
Other Machine Settings 4-24  
Basic Copying Presets 4-25  
Copy Defaults 4-26  
Copy Control 4-39  
Original Size Defaults 4-40  
Setting Reduce/Enlarge Presets 4-41  
xiii  
USER GUIDE (MACHINE ADMINISTRATOR) 4-1  
Setting Custom Colors 4-42  
Network Settings 4-42  
Allocate Memory 4-44  
Others (Print Mode Settings) 4-47  
Basic Scanning Presets 4-48  
Setting Scan Defaults 4-49  
Setting the Scan Size Defaults 4-53  
Setting the Output Size Defaults 4-54  
Setting Reduce/Enlarge Presets 4-55  
Other Settings (Scanner) 4-56  
Setting/Deleting Mailboxes 4-58  
Create/Check Accounts 4-60  
Deleting/Resetting Data by Account 4-61  
Enabling Auditron Mode 4-62  
System Administrator Data 4-63  
Delete/Reset All Account Data 4-64  
Printing Meter Reports 4-65  
Internet Services 4-66  
Fax 4-67  
xiv  
USER GUIDE (TROUBLESHOOTING) 5-1  
User Guide (Troubleshooting) 5-1  
Paper Jams at the Top Left Cover 5-3  
Paper Jams at the Left Center Cover 5-4  
Paper Jams at the Bottom Left Cover 5-4  
Paper Jams in Trays 1 to 4 5-5  
Paper Jams in Tray 5 (Bypass) 5-5  
Paper Jams in the Duplex Unit 5-6  
Paper Jams in the Finisher 5-6  
Paper Jams on the Finisher Top Cover 5-6  
Paper Jams on the Finisher Interface 5-7  
Paper Jams on the Center Tray Exit 5-7  
Document Jams on the Left Cover (Top) 5-8  
Jams on Original Input Area and Document Glass 5-9  
Stapler Faults 5-10  
Toner Cartridge 5-11  
Resolving Programming Problems 5-12  
Resolving Processor Problems 5-13  
Resolving Output Quality Problems Using Basic Copying,  
xv  
USER GUIDE (TROUBLESHOOTING) 5-1  
Added Features, and Image Quality Tabs 5-16  
Calling for Service 5-20  
Fault Codes 5-21  
xvi  
Safety Notes/Regulatory  
Information  
WorkCentre M24  
Printer/Copier  
Safety Notes/Regulatory Information  
The Xerox WorkCentre 24 and the recommended supplies have  
been designed and tested to meet strict safety requirements.  
Attention to the following notes will ensure the continued safe  
operation of your printer/copier.  
Electrical Safety  
Use only the power cord supplied with this equipment.  
Plug the power cord directly into a correctly grounded  
electrical outlet. Do not use an extension cord. If you do not  
know whether or not an outlet is grounded, consult a qualified  
electrician.  
Do not use a ground adapter plug to connect this equipment to  
an electrical outlet that lacks a ground connection terminal.  
WARNING: You may get a severe electrical shock if the outlet  
is not correctly grounded.  
Do not place the printer/copier where people may step on or  
trip on the power cord. Do not place objects on the power cord.  
Do not override or disable electrical or mechanical interlocks.  
Do not obstruct the ventilation openings. These openings are  
provided to prevent overheating of the machine.  
WARNING: Never push objects of any kind into slots or  
openings on this equipment. Making a contact with a voltage  
point or shorting out a part could result in fire or electrical  
shock.  
iii  
iii  
     
SAFETY NOTES/REGULATORY INFORMATION  
If any of the following conditions occur, immediately switch off  
the power to the machine and disconnect the power cord from  
the electrical outlet. Call an authorized Xerox service  
representative to correct the problem.  
The machine emits unusual noises or odors.  
The power cord is damaged or frayed.  
A wall panel circuit breaker, fuse, or other safety device  
has been tripped.  
Liquid is spilled into the press.  
The machine is exposed to water.  
Any part of the machine is damaged.  
Disconnect Device  
The power cable is the disconnect device for this equipment. It is  
attached to the back of the machine as a plug-in device. To  
remove all electrical power from the machine, disconnect the  
power cable from the electrical outlet.  
Laser Safety  
Use of controls, adjustments, or procedures other than those  
specified in this documentation may result in a hazardous  
exposure to laser radiation. This equipment complies with  
international safety standards. With specific regard to laser  
safety, the equipment complies with performance standards for  
laser products set by government, national, and international  
agencies as a Class 1 laser product. It does not emit hazardous  
light, as the beam is totally enclosed during all phases of customer  
operation and maintenance.  
iv  
     
SAFETY NOTES/REGULATORY INFORMATION  
Maintenance Safety  
Do not attempt any maintenance procedure that is not  
specifically described in the documentation that is supplied  
with your press.  
Do not use aerosol cleaners. The use of supplies that are not  
approved may cause poor performance of the press, and  
could create a dangerous condition.  
Use the supplies and cleaning materials only as directed in  
this manual. Keep all of these materials out of the reach of  
children.  
Do not remove the covers or guards that are fastened with  
screws. There are no parts behind these covers that you can  
maintain or service.  
Do not perform any maintenance procedures unless you have  
been trained to do them by a Xerox representative, or unless a  
procedure is specifically described in one of the manuals included  
with your press.  
Operational Safety  
Your Xerox equipment and supplies were designed and tested to  
meet strict safety requirements. These include safety agency  
examination, approval, and compliance with established  
environmental standards.  
Your attention to the following safety guidelines will help ensure  
the continued safe operation of your digital press:  
Use the materials and supplies specifically designed for your  
digital press. The use of unsuitable materials may result in  
poor performance of the machine and possibly a hazardous  
situation.  
Follow all warnings and instructions that are marked on or  
supplied with the machine.  
Place the machine in a room that provides adequate space for  
ventilation and servicing.  
Place the machine on a level, solid surface (not on a thick pile  
carpet) that has adequate strength to support the weight of the  
machine.  
v
       
SAFETY NOTES/REGULATORY INFORMATION  
Do not attempt to move the machine. A leveling device that  
was lowered when your machine was installed may damage  
the carpet or floor.  
Do not set up the machine near a heat source.  
Do not set up the machine in direct sunlight.  
Do not set up the machine in line with the cold air flow from an  
air conditioning system.  
Do not place containers of coffee or other liquid on the  
machine.  
Do not block or cover the slots and openings on the machine.  
Without adequate ventilation, the machine may overheat.  
Do not attempt to override any electrical or mechanical  
interlock devices.  
WARNING: Be careful when working in areas identified with  
this warning symbol. These areas may be very hot and could  
cause personal injury.  
If you need any additional safety information concerning the  
machine or materials, contact your Xerox representative.  
Ozone Safety  
This product produces ozone during normal operation. The ozone  
is heavier than air, and the quantity is dependent on print volume.  
Providing the correct environmental parameters, as specified in  
the Xerox installation procedures, ensures that concentration  
levels meet safe limits.  
If you need additional information about ozone, request the Xerox  
publication, OZONE, 600P83222, by calling 1-800-828-6571 in  
the USA. For a French language version, call 1-800-828-6571 in  
the USA, then press 2.  
vi  
   
SAFETY NOTES/REGULATORY INFORMATION  
Notices  
Radio Frequency Emissions  
FCC  
The following applies to the product when equipped with the  
Token Ring or Banyan Vines connectivity options:  
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the  
limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the  
Federal Communications Commission Rules. These limits are  
designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful  
interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial  
environment. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate  
radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in  
accordance with the instruction manual, may cause harmful  
interference to radio communications. Operation of this equipment  
in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which  
case the user will be required to correct the interference at his/her  
own expense.  
Changes or modifications to this equipment not specifically  
approved by the Xerox Corporation may void the user’s authority  
to operate this equipment.  
Shielded cables must be used with this equipment to maintain  
compliance with FCC regulations.  
In Canada  
This digital apparatus does not exceed the Class A limits for radio  
noise emissions from digital apparatus as defined in the Radio  
interference regulations of Industry Canada.  
vii  
       
SAFETY NOTES/REGULATORY INFORMATION  
Safety Extra Low Voltage Approval  
The Xerox WorkCentre 24 is in compliance with various  
governmental agencies and national safety regulations. All system  
ports meet the Safety Extra Low Voltage (SELV) circuits for  
connection to customer-owned devices and networks. Additions of  
customer-owned or third-party accessories that are attached to  
the press must meet or exceed the requirements previously listed.  
All modules that require external connection must be installed per  
the installation procedure.  
Certifications in Europe  
The CE marking that is applied to this product symbolizes Xerox  
Europe’s Declaration of Conformity with the following applicable  
Directives of the European Union as of the dates indicated:  
January 1, 1995: - Council Directive 73/23/EEC amended by  
Council Directive 93/68/EEC, approximation of the laws of the  
member states related to low voltage equipment.  
January 1, 1996: - Council Directive 89/336/EEC, approximation  
of the laws of the member states related to electromagnetic  
compatibility.  
Changes or modifications to this equipment not specifically  
approved by Xerox Europe may void the user’s authority to  
operate the equipment.  
Shielded cables must be used with this equipment to maintain  
compliance with the EMC Directive 89/336/EEC.  
This equipment is not primarily intended for use in a domestic  
environment.  
A full declaration defining the relevant Directives and referenced  
standards can be obtained from your Xerox Europe  
representative.  
WARNING: In order to allow this equipment to operate in  
proximity to Industrial, Scientific and Medical (ISM)  
equipment, the external radiation from ISM equipment may  
have to be limited or special mitigation measures taken.  
WARNING: This is a Class A product. In a domestic  
environment, this product may cause radio interference, in  
which case the user may be required to take adequate  
measures.  
viii  
   
SAFETY NOTES/REGULATORY INFORMATION  
Regulatory Information  
US Regulatory Information  
Fax Send Header Requirements: The Telephone Consumer  
Protection Act of 1991 makes it unlawful for any person to use a  
computer or other electronic device, including a Fax machine, to  
send any message unless such message clearly contains in a  
margin at the top or bottom of each transmitted page or on the first  
page of the transmission, the date and time it is sent and an  
identification of the business or other entity, or other individual  
sending the message and the telephone number of the sending  
machine or such business, other entity or individual. (The  
telephone number provided may not be a 900 number or any other  
number for which charges exceed local or long distance  
transmission charges.)  
To enter the telephone number identifying the machine, and the  
header text information (business name), please refer to the  
"WorkCentre M24 SA Guide, under Fax, located on the  
WorkCentre M24 User Documentation CD. To enter the date and  
time, please refer to the "Changing Settings in System Settings  
Mode", "Setting the Common Settings in the WorkCentre 24  
Machine Administrator User Guide located on the WorkCentre  
M24 User Documentation CD. Data Coupler Information: This  
equipment complies with Part 68 of the FCC rules and the  
requirements adopted by the Administrative Council for the  
Terminal Attachments (ATCA) A label is fixed to the rear cover of  
the product that contains, among other information, a product  
identifier in the format US:AAAEQ##TXXXX. If requested, this  
number must be provided to the Telephone Company.  
ix  
SAFETY NOTES/REGULATORY INFORMATION  
A plug and jack used to connect this equipment to the premises  
wiring and telephone network must comply with the applicable  
FCC Part 68 rules and requirements adopted by the ACTA. A FCC  
compliant telephone cord and modular plug is provided with this  
equipment.  
You may safely connect the machine to the following standard  
modular jack: USOC RJ-11C using the compliant telephone cord  
(with modular plugs) provided with the installation kit. See  
installation instructions for details.  
To order the correct service from the Telephone Company please  
quote the codes listed in the table: Facility Interface Code (FIC),  
Service Order Code (SOC), USOC Jack Code and Ringer  
Equivalence Number (REN)  
FIC  
SOC  
USOC Jack  
REN  
02LS2  
9.0F  
RJ-11C  
0.2  
WARNING: Ask your local telephone company for the  
modular jack type installed on your line. Connecting this  
machine to an unauthorized jack can damage telephone  
company equipment. You not Xerox, assume all  
responsibility and/or liability for any damage caused by the  
connection of this machine to an unauthorized jack.  
The REN is used to determine the number of devices that may be  
connected to a telephone line. Excessive RENs on a telephone  
line may result in the devices not ringing in response to an  
incoming call. In most but not all areas, the sum of the RENs  
should not exceed five (5.0). To be certain of the number of  
devices that may be connected to a line, as determined by the  
total RENs, contact the local Telephone Company. The REN for  
this product is part of the product identifier that has the format  
US:AAAEQ##TXXXX. The digits represented by ## are the REN  
without a decimal point (e.g., 02 is a REN of 0.2)  
x
SAFETY NOTES/REGULATORY INFORMATION  
If this Xerox equipment causes harm to the telephone network, the  
Telephone Company will notify you in advance that this temporary  
discontinuance of service may be required. But if advanced notice  
isn't practical, the Telephone Company will notify the customer as  
soon as possible. Also, you will be advised of your right to file a  
complaint with the FCC if you believe it is necessary.  
The Telephone Company may make changes in it facilities,  
equipment, operations, or procedures that could affect the  
operation of the equipment. If this happens, the Telephone  
Company will provide advance notice in order for you to make  
necessary modifications to maintain uninterrupted service.  
If trouble is experienced with this Xerox equipment, for repairs or  
warranty information, please contact the Xerox Welcome Center  
telephone number 800-821-2797. If the equipment is causing  
harm to the telephone network, the Telephone Company may  
request that you disconnect the equipment until the problem is  
resolved.  
Repairs to the machine should be made only by a Xerox  
representative or an authorized Xerox Service agency. This  
applies at any time during or after the service warranty period. If  
an unauthorized repair is performed, the remainder of the  
warranty period is null and void.  
This equipment must not be used on party lines. connection to  
party line service is subject to state tariffs. Contact the state public  
utility commission, public service commission, or corporation  
commission for information.  
If your office has specially wired alarm equipment connected to  
the telephone line, ensure the installation of this Xerox equipment  
does not disable your alarm equipment. If you have questions  
about what will disable alarm equipment, consult your telephone  
company or a qualified installer.  
xi  
SAFETY NOTES/REGULATORY INFORMATION  
Canadian Regulatory Information  
This product meets the applicable Industry Canada technical  
specifications. The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) is an  
indication of the maximum number of devices allowed to be  
connected to a telephone interface. The termination on an  
interface may consist of any combination of devices subject only  
to the requirement that the sum of the RENs of all the devices  
does not exceed 5.  
The Canadian REN value of this equipment is 0.2  
Repairs to certified equipment should be made by an authorized  
Canadian maintenance facility designated by the supplier. Any  
repairs or alterations made by the user to this equipment, or  
equipment malfunctions may give the telecommunications  
company cause to request the user to disconnect the equipment.  
Users should ensure for their own protection the electrical ground  
connections of the power utility, telephone lines and internal  
metallic water pipe system, if present, are connected together.  
This precaution may be particularly important in rural areas.  
CAUTION: Users should not attempt to make such connections  
themselves, but should contact the appropriate electrical  
inspection authority or electrician, as appropriate.  
xii  
SAFETY NOTES/REGULATORY INFORMATION  
European Regulatory Information  
Radio Equipment & Telecommunications Terminal Equipment  
Directive  
This Xerox product has been self-certified by Xerox for pan-  
European single terminal connection to the analogue public  
switched telephone network (PSTN) in accordance with Directive  
1999/5/EC.  
The product has been designed to work with the national PSTNs  
and compatible PBXs of the following countries:  
UK  
Ireland  
France  
Germany  
Italy  
Spain  
In the event of problems you should contact your local Xerox  
representative in the first instance.  
This product has been tested to and is compliant with TBR21, a  
specification for terminal equipment for use on analogue-switched  
telephone networks in the European Economic Area.  
The product may be configured to be compatible with other  
country networks. Please contact your Xerox representative if it  
needs to be reconnected to another country's network. There are  
no user-adjustable settings in the product.  
NOTE: Modification of this product, connection to external control  
software or to external control apparatus not authorized by Xerox,  
will invalidate its certification.  
xiii  
SAFETY NOTES/REGULATORY INFORMATION  
It’s Illegal in the USA  
Congress, by statute, has forbidden the reproduction of the  
following subjects under certain circumstances. Penalties of fine  
or imprisonment may be imposed on those guilty of making such  
reproductions.  
1. Obligations or Securities of the United States Government,  
such as:  
Certificates of Indebtedness  
Coupons from Bonds  
Silver Certificates  
National Bank Currency  
Federal Reserve Bank Notes  
Gold Certificates  
United States Bonds  
Federal Reserve Notes  
Certificates of Deposit  
Treasury Notes  
Fractional Notes  
Paper Money  
Bonds and Obligations of certain agencies of the government,  
such as FHA, etc.  
Bonds. (U.S. Savings Bonds may be photographed only for  
publicity purposes in connection with the campaign for the sale  
of such bonds.)  
Internal Revenue Stamps. (If it is necessary to reproduce a  
legal document on which there is a canceled revenue stamp,  
this may be done provided the reproduction of the document is  
performed for lawful purposes.)  
Postage Stamps, canceled or uncanceled. (For philatelic  
purposes, Postage Stamps may be photographed, provided  
the reproduction is in black and white and is less than 75% or  
more than 150% of the linear dimensions of the original.)  
Postal Money Orders.  
Bills, Checks, or Drafts of money drawn by or upon authorized  
officers of the United States.  
Stamps and other representatives of value, of whatever  
denomination, which have been or may be issued under any  
Act of Congress.  
2. Adjusted Compensation Certificates for Veterans of the World  
Wars.  
3. Obligations or Securities of any Foreign Government, Bank, or  
Corporation.  
xiv  
 
SAFETY NOTES/REGULATORY INFORMATION  
4. Copyrighted material, unless permission of the copyright  
owner has been obtained or the reproduction falls within the  
“fair use” or library reproduction rights provisions of the  
copyright law. Further information of these provisions may be  
obtained from the Copyright Office, Library of Congress,  
Washington, D.C. 20559. Ask for Circular R21.  
5. Certificates of Citizenship or Naturalization. (Foreign  
Naturalization Certificates may be photographed.)  
6. Passports. (Foreign Passports may be photographed.)  
7. Immigration Papers.  
8. Draft Registration Cards.  
9. Selective Service Induction Papers that bear any of the  
following Registrant’s information:  
Earnings or Income  
Court Record  
Dependency Status  
Previous military service  
Physical or mental condition  
Exception: U. S. Army and Navy discharge certificates may be  
photographed.  
10. Badges, Identification Cards, Passes, or Insignia carried by  
military personnel, or by members of the various Federal  
Departments, such as FBI, Treasury, etc. (unless photograph  
is ordered by the head of such department or bureau.)  
Reproducing the following is also prohibited in certain states:  
Automobile Licenses - Drivers’ Licenses - Automobile  
Certificates of Title.  
The above list is not all inclusive, and no liability is assumed for its  
completeness or accuracy. In case of doubt, consult your attorney.  
xv  
SAFETY NOTES/REGULATORY INFORMATION  
It’s Illegal in Canada  
Parliament, by statute, has forbidden the reproduction of the  
following subjects under certain circumstances. Penalties of fines  
or imprisonment may be imposed on those guilty of making such  
copies.  
1. Current bank notes or current paper money.  
2. Obligations or securities of a government or bank.  
3. Exchequer bill paper or revenue paper.  
4. The public seal of Canada or of a province, or the seal of a  
public body or authority in Canada, or of a court of law.  
5. Proclamations, orders, regulations or appointments, or notices  
thereof (with intent to falsely cause same to purport to have  
been printed by the Queen’s Printer for Canada, or the  
equivalent printer for a province).  
6. Marks, brands, seals, wrappers or designs used by or on  
behalf of the Government of Canada or of a province, the  
government of a state other than Canada or a department,  
board, Commission or agency established by the Government  
of Canada or of a province or of a government of a state other  
than Canada.  
7. Impressed or adhesive stamps used for the purpose of  
revenue by the Government of Canada or of a province or by  
the government of a state other than Canada.  
8. Documents, registers or records kept by public officials  
charged with the duty of making or issuing certified copies  
thereof, where the reproduction falsely purports to be a  
certified copy thereof.  
9. Copyrighted material or trademarks of any manner or kind  
without the consent of the copyright or trademark owner.  
The above list is provided for your convenience and assistance,  
but it is not all inclusive, and no liability is assumed for its  
completeness or accuracy. In case of doubt, consult your solicitor.  
xvi  
 
SAFETY NOTES/REGULATORY INFORMATION  
Environmental Notices for the USA  
As an ENERGY STAR® partner, Xerox Corporation has  
determined that this printer/copier model meets the ENERGY  
STAR guidelines for energy efficiency.  
ENERGY STAR is a registered United States trademark.  
The ENERGY STAR Program is a team effort between the  
Environment Protection Agency and the office equipment industry  
to promote energy-efficient copiers, printers, fax, multifunction  
machines, personal computers, and monitors. Reducing product  
energy consumption helps combat smog, acid rain and long-term  
changes to the climate by decreasing the emissions that result  
from generating electricity.  
Environmental Notices for Canada  
Terra Choice Environmental Services, Inc. of Canada has verified  
that this Xerox product conforms to all applicable Environmental  
Choice EcoLogo requirements for minimized impact to the  
environment.  
Environment Canada established the Environmental Choice  
program in 1988 to help consumers identify environmentally  
responsible products and services. Copier, printer, digital press,  
and fax products must meet energy efficiency and emissions  
criteria, and exhibit compatibility with recycled supplies. Currently,  
Environmental Choice has more than 1600 approved products  
and 140 licensees. Xerox has been a leader in offering EcoLogo  
approved products. In 1996, Xerox became the first company  
licensed to use the Environmental Choice EcoLogo for its copiers,  
printers, and fax machines.  
xvii  
   
SAFETY NOTES/REGULATORY INFORMATION  
Product Recycling and Disposal  
Xerox operates a worldwide equipment takeback and reuse/  
recycle program. Contact your Xerox sales representative (1-800-  
ASK-XEROX) to determine whether this Xerox product is part of  
the program. For more information about Xerox environmental  
programs, visit www.xerox.com/environment.html.  
If your product is not part of the Xerox program and you are  
managing its disposal, please note that the product may contain  
lead, mercury and other materials whose disposal may be  
regulated due to environmental considerations. For recycling and  
disposal information, contact your local authorities. In the United  
States, you may also refer to the Electronic Industries Alliance  
web site at www.eiae.org.  
xviii  
 
SAFETY NOTES/REGULATORY INFORMATION  
Conventions  
Standardized conventions have been used in this manual to assist  
you in visually locating and identifying information quickly.  
Symbols  
CAUTION: This symbol alerts you to an action that may cause  
damage to hardware, software, or result in the loss of data.  
WARNING: Warnings alert you to an action that may cause  
bodily injury.  
The 1 2 3... symbol indicates the beginning of a task or work  
process you should use to complete a procedure and is followed  
by the first step of a numbered procedure, task, or work process.  
1
2
3
NOTE: This calls your attention to information that is helpful, but  
not essential to complete a procedure or task.  
xix  
   
SAFETY NOTES/REGULATORY INFORMATION  
xx  
Copying User Guide  
WorkCentre M24  
Printer/Copier  
TABLE OF CONTENTS  
Table of Contents  
Control Panel 4  
Touch Screen 7  
Power Switch 8  
Audio Tones 8  
Duplex Automatic Document Feeder (DADF) 8  
Document Glass 8  
Paper Trays 9  
Output Trays 9  
Power Saver Mode 10  
Exiting the Power Saver Mode 10  
Making Copies Using the Duplex Automatic Document Feeder 11  
Making Copies from the Document Glass 12  
Making Copies Using Features 13  
Tray 1 17  
Tandem Tray Module 17  
3-Tray Module 17  
Tray 5 (Bypass) 17  
Auto Size Detect for Tray 5 (Bypass) 18  
Auto Tray Switching 18  
Loading Stock 19  
Paper 19  
Transparencies 21  
Loading Paper into Trays 1, 2, 3, and 4 22  
Loading Stock into Tray 5 (Bypass) 22  
Loading 12 x 18 inch Paper 23  
Loading SRA3 Paper into Tray 5 (Bypass) 24  
Copier Features 25  
iii  
TABLE OF CONTENTS  
Basic Copying Tab 25  
Output Color 26  
2 Sided 28  
Reduce/Enlarge 31  
Paper Supply 35  
Added Features Tab 38  
2 Sided 39  
Output 42  
Margin Shift 45  
Border Erase 48  
Image Quality Tab 50  
Original Type 51  
Auto Exposure 53  
Lighter/Darker/Contrast 54  
Sharpness/Saturation 55  
Color Shift 56  
Color Balance 57  
Image Quality Presets 58  
Output Format Tab 59  
Multiple Up 60  
Transparency Separators 63  
Covers 66  
Repeat Image 68  
Poster 70  
Mirror Image/ Negative Image 72  
Scan Options Tab 73  
Original Size 74  
Mixed Size Originals 76  
Bound Originals 77  
Image Rotation 79  
Original Orientation 80  
Book Duplex 81  
Job Assembly Tab 83  
Stored Jobs 84  
Build Job 86  
Booklet Creation 88  
Duplex Automatic Document Feeder (DADF) (Optional  
iv  
Component Names and Functions 89  
Document Specifications 90  
Documents Not Recommended 91  
Loading the Documents 91  
Placing Documents on the Document Glass 91  
Loading Documents in the DADF 92  
Using the Finisher 93  
Stapling Options 94  
Checking Current Jobs 96  
Changing the Print Priority 97  
Checking Completed Jobs 98  
Outputting/Deleting Secure Prints 99  
Outputting Sample Prints 101  
Delayed Print 103  
Deleting Stored Documents 105  
Machine Information 109  
Cleaning the DADF and Document Glass 110  
Changing Toner Cartridges 111  
Speed by Media 114  
Dimensions and Weight 115  
v
TABLE OF CONTENTS  
vi  
1. User Guide (Copier)  
Getting to Know Your Copier  
Your new Xerox WorkCentre M24 works as a digital copier. This  
section will provide an introduction to the WorkCentre M24 which  
is also referred to as the WorkCentre 24.  
For more information about copy features, refer to the section  
entitled Copier Features in this chapter.  
1
1–1  
     
USER GUIDE (COPIER)  
2
1
3
4
5
6
7
10  
8
9
11  
12  
17  
13  
14  
15  
16  
1–2  
USER GUIDE (COPIER)  
Number  
Name  
Function  
Duplex Automatic  
Document Feeder  
(DADF)  
Automatically feeds up to 50 documents. Also works as a  
Document Glass cover when making copies from the platen  
glass.  
1
(Optional Accessory)  
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Original Input Area  
Original Catch Tray  
Control Panel  
Location where originals are fed onto platen glass for copying.  
Original return area.  
Used to program the copier for individual jobs.  
Output delivered here face down.  
Center Output Tray  
Power Switch  
Powers machine On/Off.  
Front Door Panel  
Trays 1  
Access for consumables replacement.  
Adjustable paper tray: 5.5x8.5 in. through 11x17 in. (A5 through  
A3) holding up to 520 sheets based on paper weight.  
9
Trays 2, 3 & 4 (Tandem  
Tray Module)  
(Optional Accessory)  
Tray 2 - Adjustable paper tray: 5.5x8.5 in. through 11x17 in. (A5  
through A3) holding up to 520 sheets based on paper weight.  
Trays 3 & 4 - High capacity paper trays holding a total of 2000  
sheets of 8.5 x 11 in. (A4 and B5) based on paper weight.  
10  
Tray 5 (Bypass)  
For specialty papers (i.e. Transparencies, Heavyweight, and  
non-standard sizes) which cannot be loaded in Trays 1 - 4.  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
Casters  
Lockable casters for mobility and safety.  
Push the release lever up to access the paper path.  
Open this cover to access paper path.  
Access to paper path.  
Left Upper Cover  
Duplex Cover  
Left Side Middle Cover  
Left Side Lower Cover  
Access to paper path.  
Trays 2, 3 & 4 (3- Tray  
Module)  
(Optional Accessory)  
Tray 2, 3 & 4 - Adjustable paper tray: 5.5x8.5 in. through 11x17  
in. (A5 through A3) holding up to 520 sheets based on paper  
weight.  
17  
18  
19  
Finisher  
(Optional Accessory)  
Finisher (Optional Accessory) that accommodates up to 1000  
sheets of output and offers stapling options.  
Stand (Not Shown)  
(Optional Accessory)  
Used to place the machine at the desired operator level.  
Convenience Shelf (Not  
Shown)  
Workspace for copies, prints, or originals.  
1–3  
USER GUIDE (COPIER)  
Control Panel  
Contrast Dial  
Touch Screen  
Numeric Keypad  
The Control Panel is used to program individual jobs.  
The Numeric Keypad is used to enter copy quantity or other  
numeric information.  
The Contrast Dial adjusts the brightness of the touch screen.  
The Touch Screen is where you make selections for the jobs  
you are programming.  
Access  
Use this feature to change machine default settings, and to create  
or modify user access numbers.  
Power Saver  
Lights up green and is initiated automatically if the machine is left  
idle for a specific amount of time. Press the Power Saver button  
to bring the machine back to full power after the warm-up period.  
1–4  
   
USER GUIDE (COPIER)  
Interrupt  
Stops the printer/copier during the current job. This allows  
another job to be run. There are two indications that the job has  
been interrupted:  
The printer/copier displays a message indicating that Job  
Interrupt has been selected, and it is ready to copy.  
The indicator light flashes to acknowledge that the Interrupt  
button has been selected. The light will continue to flash until  
the printer/copier has completed the activity in process. The  
light will remain constant to identify interrupt has occurred and  
a new job can be programmed.  
After Interrupted jobs are complete, press the Interrupt button  
again to return the machine to the first job.  
Clear All  
Returns the machine to the original Default State. When the Clear  
All button is selected in Interrupt mode, default settings are  
applied only to the interrupting job.  
Stop  
Pressing Stop will halt the copy job in process at the completion of  
the current activity. A message asking if you want to press Start  
to continue the job or Clear All to cancel the job is displayed on  
the Touch Screen.  
Start  
Initiates a job or continues the copying process.  
Clears an incorrect numeric entry.  
Clear  
1–5  
USER GUIDE (COPIER)  
Job Memory  
Indicator lights when data is stored in the machine's memory.  
Indicator lights when data is being received from a client.  
Online  
Features  
Allows you to alternate between scanning and copying feature  
screens.  
Job Status  
Allows you to check or cancel jobs currently executing, or to  
check or print saved documents.  
Machine Status  
Allows you to check the machine status, meters, the state of  
consumables, and output reports.  
1–6  
USER GUIDE (COPIER)  
Touch Screen  
Unused  
Memory  
Tab  
Message  
Area  
Quantity  
Selection  
Buttons  
Press the buttons and tabs displayed in the Touch Screen to  
select features or respond to on screen instructions. The selected  
buttons are highlighted to indicate activation. Buttons that do not  
have three-dimensional shadows are not active, and cannot be  
selected.  
Message Area  
Unused Memory  
Quantity  
Messages such as machine status and operation instructions are  
displayed here  
The amount of memory remaining to store a scanned original is  
displayed prior to output.  
The copy quantity is entered using the keypad, and appears in the  
upper right corner of the message area. Select between 1 - 999.  
Tab  
Feature Tabs displayed on the Touch Screen contain the  
programmable selections available for each feature.  
Selection Buttons  
Allow for the selection of feature / functions required for the  
desired output. Buttons identified, as More… have additional  
features, which will be displayed when this button is selected.  
1–7  
   
USER GUIDE (COPIER)  
Power Switch  
The power switch is located on the right top corner of the machine.  
Press the switch to the ( | ) position to turn the power on.  
Ground Fault Protector  
Audio Tones  
Located at the rear of the machine where the power cord attaches.  
The Ground Fault Protector removes all power from the machine if  
a fault is detected in the power to the printer/copier. To reset the  
GFI, press the switch in.  
Tone volume may be adjusted or turned off in System Settings  
mode. Three types of Audio Tones are available to assist the  
operator in selecting features and functions.  
Single Tone  
Double Tone  
Triple Tone  
Acknowledges when a feature is selected, or a job has been  
completed.  
Acknowledges an alert, such as a paper jam or consumable  
replacement.  
Acknowledges an improper selection or an error in button  
selection has occurred.  
Duplex Automatic Document Feeder (DADF)  
Automatically feeds up to 50 documents onto the glass for  
copying. Documents must be placed face up into the Document  
Handler.  
Document Glass  
When using the Document Glass the original document must be  
placed face down and in the upper left-hand corner of the  
Document Glass.  
NOTE: The DADF must be closed for the Auto Color option to  
function  
1–8  
               
USER GUIDE (COPIER)  
Paper Trays  
Trays 1,2,3 and 4 are located at the lower front of the printer/  
copier. Tray 5 (Bypass) is located on the left side of the printer/  
copier.  
Tandem Tray Module  
Trays 1and 2 are adjustable from 5.5x8.5 in. through 11x17 in. (A5  
through A3) and can accommodate up to 520 sheets based on  
paper weight. Trays 3 and 4 are high capacity paper trays and  
can accommodate a total of 2000 sheets, 8.5x11 in. (A4 and B5)  
based on paper weight.  
3-Tray Module  
Tray 5 (Bypass)  
Trays 1 through 4 are adjustable from 5.5x8.5 in. through 11x17 in.  
(A5 through A3) and can accommodate up to 520 sheets based  
on paper weight  
Feeds specialty papers i.e. Transparencies, Extra Heavyweight  
and non-standard sizes and 12x18 in.  
Trays 1 - 4 can feed paper weights 64 to 105 gsm. The machine  
automatically detects the size and orientation of loaded paper.  
The paper type however must be set on the control panel. Bond  
paper is the default setting. Plain or Recycled paper in trays must  
be identified on the control panel for maximum efficiency and  
image quality. This is set in System Settings mode.  
Output Trays  
The Center Output Tray delivers output face down, and holds up  
to 400 sheets. The Center Output Tray holds up to 200 sheets  
when the Finisher (optional accessory) is installed.  
The Finisher Tray (optional accessory) holds up to 1000 sheets,  
and can staple dual and single staples.  
NOTE: The WorkCentre 24 printer/copier should not be moved  
after it has been installed. Moving may damage the equipment,  
carpet or floor. If equipment must be moved, please contact your  
Xerox representative for assistance.  
1–9  
       
USER GUIDE (COPIER)  
Power Saver Mode  
Power Saver Mode automatically cuts off the electricity to the  
machine if it is left unused for a certain duration. The Power Saver  
feature has two modes, a Low Power mode and Sleep mode. The  
machine enters the Low Power mode after the preset time has  
elapsed if the machine is left unused for a fixed period of time.  
The machine then enters the Sleep mode if a further preset time  
elapses.  
Low Power mode  
In this mode, the power to the control panel and fuser unit is  
lowered to save power. The display goes out, and the Power  
Saver button on the control panel lights. To use the machine,  
press the Power Saver button. Power Saver goes out to  
indicate that the Power Saver feature is canceled. The default  
is 15 minutes.  
Sleep mode  
In this mode, the power is lowered more than in the Low  
Power mode. The display goes out, and the Power Saver  
button on the control panel lights. To use the machine, press  
the Power Saver button. Power Saver goes out to indicate that  
the Power Saver feature is canceled. The Sleep mode default  
is 45 minutes after Low Power mode is engaged.  
For more information on setting Power Saver mode timers, refer to  
the User Guide (Machine Administrator).  
Exiting the Power Saver Mode  
The Power Saver mode can be exited in two ways:  
By pressing the Power Saver button  
By receiving a print job  
1–10  
     
USER GUIDE (COPIER)  
Quick Start Guide to Copying  
This section will lead you quickly through a number of features  
and steps used in making copies.  
For more information about copy features, refer to the section  
entitled Copier Features, in this chapter.  
Making Copies Using the Duplex Automatic Document Feeder  
1
2
3
Place original in the Original Input Area face up. A stack of up to  
50 originals may be place in the tray.  
Slide the documents forward until the green indicator lights,  
indicating the document is inserted correctly.  
Adjust the side guide to the size of the paper. The guide should  
just touch the side of the document.  
4
5
Press the Start button.  
Remove the copies from the output tray. Remove the originals  
from the Original Catch Tray of the DADF.  
1–11  
       
USER GUIDE (COPIER)  
Making Copies from the Document Glass  
1
2
Open the Document Cover.  
Place the original face down on the Document Glass, aligning the  
left rear corner with the registration guide.  
3
4
5
Close the cover before making a copy.  
Press the Start button.  
Remove the copies from the output tray. Remove the original  
document from the Document Glass.  
1–12  
   
USER GUIDE (COPIER)  
Making Copies Using Features  
The feature tabs on the Touch Screen enable you to configure the  
printer/copier to suit your copying needs.  
The procedure below leads you quickly through a number of  
features you may want to use in making copies. It assumes that  
the feature tabs are in the default configuration.  
For more information about copy features, refer to the section  
entitled Copier Features, in this chapter.  
1
Press Clear All to clear any previous programming  
Use any of the following steps that apply to your job and desired  
outcome.  
2
3
Use the Numeric Keypad to enter the desired quantity. If you make  
a mistake, press the Clear button on the numeric keypad to clear  
an incorrect quantity  
Select the option in Output Color if a setting other than the default,  
Auto Color, is desired.  
Perform one of the following:  
Press the desired Output Color option on the Basic Copying  
tab.  
Press More… to see additional options  
Press the desired option and press the Save button to return to  
the Basic Copying screen.  
1–13  
   
USER GUIDE (COPIER)  
4
Select an option under 2 Sided if a setting other than the default, 1  
to 1 Sided, is desired.  
If another option is desired, perform one of the following:  
1 to 1 Sided for default one-sided copies.  
1 to 2 Sided for two-sided copies from one-sided input.  
Press Head to Head for two-sided, head-to-head output,  
as for books.  
Press Head to Toe for two-sided, head to toe output, as for  
calendars.  
2 to 2 Sided for two-sided copies from two-sided input.  
You must specify the original orientation and the copy  
orientation.  
Press Head to Head for two-sided head-to-head output,  
as for books.  
Press Head to Toe for two-sided, head-to-toe output, as  
for calendars.  
2 to 1 Sided for one-sided copies from two-sided originals.  
Press Head to Head if your original documents are two-  
sided, head-to-head.  
Press Head to Toe if your original documents are two-  
sided head-to-toe.  
Select the icon that most closely resembles the Original  
Orientation for the loaded document(s). Press Close.  
5
Select an option in Reduce/Enlarge if a setting other than the  
default, 100%, is desired.  
If another option is desired, perform one of the following:  
Press the desired Reduce/Enlarge option on the Basic  
Copying screen.  
Press More… to see additional options.  
Press the desired option and touch the Save button to return to  
the Basic Copying screen.  
1–14  
USER GUIDE (COPIER)  
6
7
Select an option in Paper Supply if a tray other than the default,  
Auto Paper, is desired.  
If another option is desired, perform one of the following:  
Press the desired Paper Supply option on the Basic Copying  
screen.  
Press More… to see additional options.  
Press the desired option and touch the Save button to return to  
the Basic Copying screen.  
On the Added Features tab, select Output to program the desired  
copy output option.  
Press Collated for collated output. Collated will automatically  
be selected when the DADF is used.  
Press Collated / Stapled to direct output to the Finisher  
(optional Accessory). Press Finisher Tray to set the Output  
Destination. Press Stapling on the Output screen to select  
the Original Orientation and Staple Position on the output.  
Press the desired option and touch the Save button to return to  
the Basic Copying screen.  
8
On the Image Quality tab, select Original Type to display the  
Original Type screen.  
Press an option for Original Type if a setting other than the  
default is desired.  
Press the Save button to return to the Image Quality screen.  
1–15  
USER GUIDE (COPIER)  
9
If other features are desired, select the appropriate feature tab  
and feature button on the Touch Screen.  
10 Perform one of the following:  
If you use the Duplex Automatic Document Feeder, place the  
document face up into the Original Input Area. The Document  
Feeder Lamp lights when the document is in the correct  
position. Ensure that the paper guide is against the original  
document.  
Raise the Document Cover and place the document face  
down on the Document Glass.  
Ensure that the document lies against the registration area  
at the left rear corner of the glass.  
Lower the Duplex Automatic Document Feeder (DADF).  
11 Press the Start button.  
12 When copying is completed, perform the following:  
Remove the copies from the Center Output Tray or Finisher  
Tray on the right side of the printer/copier.  
Remove the original document(s) from the Document Glass or  
Original Catch Tray.  
1–16  
USER GUIDE (COPIER)  
Loading Paper  
This section contains basic information about loading paper and  
transparencies, and about using paper trays. It also includes some  
paper usage guidelines for the WorkCentre 24.  
For more information about the materials you can use, refer to the  
Recommended Materials for the WorkCentre 24.  
Tray 1  
Tray 1 can accommodate an assortment of standard paper sizes,  
from 5.5x8.5 through 11x17 inch, and A3 through B5. Tray 1 has  
width and length adjustment guides that can be adjusted if the  
paper size in the tray needs to be changed.  
Tandem Tray Module  
Trays 1,2,3 and 4 hold the paper supply for the WorkCentre 24  
printer/copier.  
Trays 1 and 2 can accommodate an assortment of standard paper  
sizes, from 5.5x8.5 through 11x17 inch, and A3 through B5. Trays  
1 and 2 have width and length adjustment guides that can be  
adjusted if the paper size in the tray needs to be changed. Trays 3  
and 4 can accommodate 8.5x11 inch, A4 or B5 paper.  
3-Tray Module  
Trays 1 through 4 can accommodate an assortment of standard  
paper sizes, from 5.5x8.5 through 11x17 inch, and A3 through B5.  
Trays 1 through 4 have width and length adjustment guides that  
can be adjusted if the paper size in the tray needs to be changed.  
Tray 5 (Bypass)  
Tray 5 (Bypass) is located on the left side of the printer/copier.  
Tray 5 (Bypass) can accommodate transparencies and other  
specified paper stocks, and various paper sizes up to 12x18 in.  
Tray 5 (Bypass) has the capacity to hold up to 100 sheets.  
1–17  
                 
USER GUIDE (COPIER)  
Auto Size Detect for Tray 5 (Bypass)  
Certain standard paper sizes can be automatically detected in  
Tray 5 (Bypass) by selecting Auto Size Detect on the Tray 5  
programming screen. The following paper sizes can be used with  
the Auto Size Detect feature:  
US/Canada - 5.5x8.5 in. LEF/SEF, 8x10 in. LEF, 8.5x11 in.  
LEF/SEF, 8.5x13 in. SEF, 8.5x14 in. SEF, 11x17 in. SEF.  
Europe - A5 LEF/SEF, A4 LEF/SEF, A3 SEF, B5 LEF/SEF, B4,  
Postcard (100 x 148mm).  
All other paper sizes must be specified using the selections under  
Standard Size, or by inputting the size under Non-standard size.  
For example, you must specify 12x18 inch when using that paper  
size.  
NOTE: A paper size mismatch message will be displayed if you try  
a job with Auto Size Detect selected and a paper size that is not  
included in the list above.  
Auto Tray Switching  
The Auto Tray Switching feature enables the printer/copier to  
automatically switch to another tray when a tray runs out of paper.  
The trays must be loaded with the same size paper in the same  
orientation (long edge feed or short edge feed).  
Auto Tray Switching must be enabled in System Settings mode,  
with the same paper type assigned to two or more trays.  
Auto Tray Switching may be enabled only for Trays 1, 2, 3, and 4.  
Tray 5 (Bypass) cannot be enabled for Auto Tray Switching.  
The default for Auto Tray Switching is On with Trays 1, 2, 3, and 4  
enabled. To use Auto Tray Switching with the default settings, load  
the trays you want to use with the same size paper in the same  
orientation. Select the paper tray button for the tray with the lowest  
number on the Control Panel. For example, if you load Trays 1  
and 2 with the same size paper and the same orientation, select  
the Tray 1 Paper Supply button on the Basic Copying tab of the  
Touch Screen. The printer/copier draws from Tray 1 until it is  
empty, then switches automatically to Tray 2.  
1–18  
       
USER GUIDE (COPIER)  
Loading Stock  
Paper  
Load the paper into Trays 1, 2, 3, and 4 with the preferred printing  
side up.  
Load the paper into Tray 5 (Bypass) with the preferred printing  
side down.  
The capacity of the tray varies with the paper weight that is loaded  
in the tray.  
NOTE: For the best results, use only the recommended paper  
sizes, paper weights, or paper types. If you do not use  
recommended papers, you may experience copy quality  
problems, paper jams, or possible component failures.  
If you are loading pre-drilled paper load it into Tray 5 (Bypass) with  
the undrilled long edge as the leading edge (holes to the left) for 1  
sided output, the undrilled long edge as the trailing edge (holes to  
the right) for 2 sided output.  
1–19  
         
USER GUIDE (COPIER)  
NOTE: Do not load paper above the fill line of the paper tray edge  
guides.  
NOTE: Fan the desired paper before loading it into the Tray.  
Straighten the paper stack each time the paper tray is opened.  
Close the paper tray slowly to avoid shifting the paper stack. This  
ensures that the paper is in the correct position when the paper  
tray is in the operating position.  
If paper feeding or copy curl problems occur, flip the paper over in  
the tray and make the copies again. If the performance improves,  
continue to load the paper in this manner. Testing has shown that  
paper handling and copy performance vary with room  
temperature, humidity, paper quality, image area on copies, etc.  
All of these variables interact and, in some cases, you must  
decide which paper loading method works best.  
NOTE: Coated papers are very susceptible to humidity. Multifeeds  
are much more likely with humidity greater than 40%.  
Environmental conditions may require that coated paper be fed  
one sheet at a time from Tray 5 (Bypass).  
1–20  
USER GUIDE (COPIER)  
Transparencies  
Transparencies can only be fed from Tray 5 (Bypass). Stripeless  
transparencies are recommended. Striped transparencies must be  
loaded with the stripe face up, on the left side of the tray.  
NOTE: Use only the transparencies recommended in the  
Recommended Materials for the WorkCentre 24.  
After loading the transparencies you can program the copier  
printer to insert a blank separator page between transparencies by  
using the Transparency Separators feature.  
For more information about the Tranparency Separators feature,  
refer to the section entitled Transparency Separators, in this  
chapter.  
Follow these guidelines to prevent static build up when using  
transparencies:  
Place no more than twenty 8.5x11 inch or A4 transparencies in  
Tray 5 (Bypass) at one time.  
Place only one 11x17 in. or A3 transparency in Tray 5  
(Bypass) at a time.  
Remove the transparencies from the Center Output Tray  
before running additional sets.  
NOTE: Transparencies cannot be delivered to the Finisher Tray.  
For more specific information about materials that have been  
tested and approved for use in the WorkCentre 24, refer to the  
Recommended Materials for the WorkCentre 24. Information is  
also available off the main Xerox web site (www.xerox.com) and  
will be updated periodically.  
1–21  
     
USER GUIDE (COPIER)  
Loading Paper into Trays 1, 2, 3, and 4  
1
2
To load a paper tray, pull the tray out.  
Fan the paper and load the desired paper into the tray by aligning  
the edge of the paper against the left edge of the tray. The side to  
be copied should be facing up.  
Do not fill the paper tray above the fill line.  
3
4
Adjust the paper guides if necessary, until they lightly touch the  
paper.  
Push the tray in gently until it comes to a stop.  
Loading Stock into Tray 5 (Bypass)  
The number of sheets that can be loaded in Tray 5 (Bypass)  
varies with the weight of the stock.  
NOTE: Paper stocks which exhibit difficulties when fed from Trays  
1,2,3 and 4 may be fed more reliably from Tray 5 (Bypass).  
Do not add paper during a copying job. Do not interleave  
transparencies with paper in Tray 5 (Bypass).  
NOTE: Make sure to select the appropriate paper type (i.e.  
transparencies, heavyweight paper). This will ensure that the  
images are fused properly in the printing/copying process.  
1
2
Open Tray 5 (Bypass) by grasping the tray and gently pushing it  
away and down from the printer/copier.  
Check the position of the front edge paper guide for Tray 5  
(Bypass).  
NOTE: The guide should only be set to the 12 inch position for  
papers wider than A3 (297 mm), such as 12x18 inches.  
1–22  
       
USER GUIDE (COPIER)  
3
4
Fan the paper and load paper with the side to be copied or printed  
on facing down. Insert the paper lightly along the paper guide on  
the front side of the machine until it comes to a stop.  
Adjust the back edge paper guide until it lightly touches the paper.  
NOTE: Do not load mixed size paper into the tray. Do not load  
materials above the fill line located on the paper guide  
5
6
Select the appropriate size and type for the paper you have  
loaded.  
Remove all stock from Tray 5 (Bypass) after the job is complete.  
Dust and moisture can cause copy quality defects.  
Loading 12 x 18 inch Paper  
Use Tray 5 (Bypass) for 12x18 inch (305 x 457 mm) paper.  
1
2
3
Open Tray 5 (Bypass) by grasping the tray and gently pushing it  
away and down from the printer/copier.  
Adjust the front edge paper guide for Tray 5 (Bypass) to the 12x18  
position.  
Load up to 100 sheets of 12x18 inch (305 x 457 mm) 20 lb. paper  
into Tray 5 (Bypass). Load paper with the side to be copied or  
printed on facing down.  
4
5
Adjust the back edge guide until it lightly touches the paper.  
Select 12x18 in. under Standard Size, and select the appropriate  
type for the paper you have loaded.  
6
When the job is complete, return the paper guides for Tray 5  
(Bypass) to their normal position.  
1–23  
   
USER GUIDE (COPIER)  
Loading SRA3 Paper into Tray 5 (Bypass)  
1
2
3
4
Open Tray 5 (Bypass) by grasping the tray and gently pushing it  
away and down from the printer/copier.  
Adjust the front edge paper guide to the closest position forward  
beyond the 12x18 in. position.  
Load the SRA3 paper into Tray 5 (Bypass). Load the paper with  
the side to be printed on facing down.  
Adjust the back edge guide until it lightly touches the paper.  
NOTE: SRA3 paper is not recommended for copy jobs.  
Performance using this paper size may vary. The maximum image  
area is 303 x 476.6mm with a guaranteed area of 297 x 476.6mm.  
CAUTION: Do not place any objects or materials other than the  
appropriate stock on Tray 5 (Bypass). Printer/copier damage may  
occur.  
1–24  
   
USER GUIDE (COPIER)  
Copier Features  
Basic Copying Tab  
Below is a brief description of each feature available on the Basic  
Copying tab. Each feature is explained in detail on the following  
pages.  
Output Color  
2 Sided  
Allows you to select the colors to be used for copying.  
Allows you to select one or two-sided originals, with options for  
one or two-sided output.  
Reduce/Enlarge  
Paper Supply  
Allows you to select the size of the output image from automatic  
reduction/enlargement, preset values, or variable independent  
ratios for the image length and width.  
Allows you to select the tray that contains the correct output paper  
size and type.  
1–25  
         
USER GUIDE (COPIER)  
Output Color  
The Output Color feature allows you to select the desired output  
color.  
The following options are available:  
Auto  
The Auto Color option enables the copier to determine if the  
document is black and white or color. If the document is black and  
white, the Black option is selected automatically. If the document  
is colored, the Full Color option is selected.  
The DADF must be closed for the Auto Color option to function. In  
order for the scanner to accurately sense color on a document, the  
color area must be greater than 50 mm2 (approximately 2  
inches2). If the color area is less, select the Full Color option.  
Also some very dark colors may be sensed as black. In this case,  
select the Full Color option as well.  
NOTE: With Auto selected, the printer/copier runs at the speed for  
color copying, even if the originals are B/W.  
NOTE: The sensitivity of Auto for detecting color vs. B/W can be  
adjusted in System Settings mode under Output Color  
Recognition.  
Full Color  
Black  
Enables the copier to make copies using all four toner colors:  
Yellow, Magenta, Cyan and Black.  
The Black option should be selected when the desired output is a  
black and white copy. Black and white copies can be made from  
any original. With Black selected only Black toner is used.  
Dual Color  
The Dual Color option enables the copier to make copies in two  
preset colors. The color of colored areas and black areas of the  
document can be specified.  
Single Color  
The color setting Red, Green, Blue, Yellow, Magenta, or Cyan can  
be selected.  
NOTE: Custom colors can be programmed in System Settings  
mode under Setting Custom Colors.  
1–26  
     
USER GUIDE (COPIER)  
You can select several Output Color options from the Basic  
Copying tab or select the More… button to get a complete set of  
options.  
1
2
On the Basic Copying tab select More… under Output Color to  
display the Output Color screen.  
Select the desired option:  
Auto  
Full Color  
Black  
Dual Color  
Single Color  
3
Select Start to make copies or Save to select additional features.  
NOTE: Dual Color cannot be used with Negative Image.  
NOTE: When Single Color or Dual Color is selected, Original Type  
cannot be selected.  
1–27  
USER GUIDE (COPIER)  
2 Sided  
Use the 2-Sided feature to select one or two-sided originals, with  
options for one or two-sided output.  
The following options are available:  
1 to 1 Sided  
Makes one-sided copies from one-sided input. This is the default  
setting.  
1 to 2 Sided  
2 to 2 Sided  
2 to 1 Sided  
Makes two-sided copies from one-sided input.  
Makes two-sided copies from two-sided input.  
Makes one-sided copies from two-sided input.  
NOTE: Some options are not available without a DADF.  
1–28  
     
USER GUIDE (COPIER)  
You can select several 2 Sided options from the Basic Copying tab  
or use the Added Features tab.  
1
2
On the Basic Copying tab select More… under 2 Sided.  
Select the desired option:  
1 to 1 Sided  
1 to 2 Sided  
Select Head to Head for two-sided, head-to-head output,  
as for books.  
Select Head to Toe for two-sided, head-to-toe output, as  
for calendars.  
1–29  
USER GUIDE (COPIER)  
2 to 2 Sided  
Select the option for your Originals  
Head to Head if your originals are two-sided, head-to-  
head.  
Head to Toe if your originals are two-sided, head-to-toe.  
Select the option for your Copies  
Head to Head for two-sided, head-to-head output, as for  
books.  
Head to Toe for two-sided, head-to-toe output, as for  
calendars.  
2 to 1 Sided  
Select Head to Head if your originals are two-sided, head-  
to-head.  
Select Head to Toe if your originals are two-sided, head-  
to-toe.  
3
4
Select the icon that most closely resembles the Original  
Orientation for the loaded document(s).  
Select Start to make copies or Close to select additional features.  
NOTE:1 to 2 Sided or 2 to 2 Sided cannot be selected when using  
Auto Size Detect for Tray 5 (Bypass), Repeat Image, Book  
Duplex, Transparency Separators, Poster, or Booklet Creation.  
1–30  
USER GUIDE (COPIER)  
Reduce/Enlarge  
The Reduce/Enlarge feature allows you to copy the image at  
different magnifications. Copies may be reduced to 25% or  
enlarged to 400%, in 1% increments.  
The following options are available:  
100%  
Copies are the same size as the original. This is the default  
setting.  
Auto%  
This option automatically reduces or enlarges the copy, based on  
the size and orientation of the document and the paper supply  
selected. This option is applied only to standard size documents.  
The copy image will be reduced or enlarged in the same  
proportions for X (horizontal) and Y (vertical) directions.  
Auto Paper selection is not available when Auto% is selected.  
Presets%  
There are 7 preset percentages to choose from. The selected  
percentage displays in the value box on the Reduce/Enlarge  
screen. These presets can be changed in System Settings mode.  
1–31  
     
USER GUIDE (COPIER)  
Variable%  
Select the Variable% option to enter the desired percentage for  
Reduce/Enlarge. Use either the up and down arrows or the  
number buttons that display on the Touch Screen.  
Independent X-Y%  
Select the Independent X-Y% option to copy the image at  
different, independent magnifications from 25% to 400% for the X  
and Y directions.  
For example, you can enlarge the image to 129% in the X  
direction and reduce it to 64% in the Y direction by using the  
Touch Screen arrows.  
Independent X-Y% Auto  
The Auto option automatically calculates the reduction and  
enlargement based on the original document size and on the  
output paper size when using Independent X-Y%. The copy image  
will be reduced or enlarged in the different proportions for X and Y  
directions.  
You can select several Reduce/Enlarge options from the Basic  
Copying tab or select the More… button to get a complete set of  
options.  
Using Presets%  
1
2
3
4
On the Basic Copying tab select More… under Reduce/Enlarge.  
On the Reduce/Enlarge screen, select the Presets% option.  
Select 100%, Auto%, or the desired preset percentage.  
Select Start to make copies or Save to select additional features.  
1–32  
 
USER GUIDE (COPIER)  
Using Variable%  
1
2
Under Reduce/Enlarge on the Basic Copying tab select More…  
On the Reduce/Enlarge screen, select the Variable% option.  
3
4
Perform one of the following:  
Press the arrow buttons to increase or decrease the  
percentage value in increments of 1.  
Use the Numeric Keypad on the Touch Screen to enter a  
specific percentage from 25 through 400. Press the Clear (C)  
button to clear the value entered.  
Select Start to make copies or Save to select additional features.  
1–33  
 
USER GUIDE (COPIER)  
Using Independent X-Y%  
1
2
Under Reduce/Enlarge on the Basic Copying tab select More…  
On the Reduce/Enlarge screen, select the Independent X-Y%  
option.  
3
4
Perform one of the following:  
Press the up arrow to increase the percentage value for X,  
X&Y, or Y in increments of 1.  
Press the down arrow to decrease the percentage value for X,  
X&Y or Y in decrements of 1.  
Press Auto.  
Select Start to make copies or Save to select additional features.  
1–34  
 
USER GUIDE (COPIER)  
Paper Supply  
The Paper Supply option enables you to select output paper size  
and type.  
The Basic Copying tab displays the Auto Paper selection feature.  
This option enables the copier to automatically detect the original  
document size and select the same standard size paper from  
Trays 1,2, 3, or 4.  
The Basic Copying tab also displays the contents of three other  
trays enabling you to specify your selection for output size. The  
Paper Supply More… button enables you to access the Paper  
Supply screen.  
The paper size displayed for Trays 1, 2, 3, and 4 is set when you  
adjust the paper guides as part of the process of loading paper.  
The paper type for the trays can be set in System Settings mode.  
You may select both the paper size and paper type on the detail  
screen when loading paper into Tray 5 (Bypass).  
1
On the Basic Copying tab under Paper Supply, select one of the  
following:  
Select Auto to enable the copier to automatically select the  
appropriate paper.  
Select More… to display the Paper Supply screen.  
2
3
If More... is selected, select the tray that displays the desired  
paper.  
Select Start to make copies or Save to select additional features.  
1–35  
     
USER GUIDE (COPIER)  
Programming the Paper Supply for Tray 5 (Bypass)  
You must select the paper size and paper type when loading  
paper into Tray 5 (Bypass). Auto Size Detect can be used with  
standard size paper.  
1
2
3
On the Basic Copying tab select More… under Paper Supply.  
Select Tray 5 (Bypass) to display the Tray 5 (Bypass) screen.  
Perform one of the following to select Paper Size:  
Select Auto Size Detect.  
Select Standard Size.  
Select the paper size from the list. Use the up and down  
arrows to see more selections.  
Select Non-standard Size and enter in the X (width) and Y  
(length) dimensions by using the arrows.  
Press the left or right arrows to decrease or increase the X  
dimension (140-483mm).  
Press the up or down arrows to increase or decrease the Y  
dimension (100-305mm).  
1–36  
 
USER GUIDE (COPIER)  
4
Select the appropriate Paper Type using the up and down arrow  
buttons. You can select Plain, Bond, Recycled, Transparency, and  
Lightweight - Extra Heavyweight paper.  
5
6
Select Save to return to the Paper Supply screen.  
Select Start to make copies or Save to select additional features.  
NOTE:Paper Tray 5 cannot be used with the following features:  
Auto Size Detect with 1 to 2-Sided and 2 to 2-Sided, Auto  
Reduction/Enlargement, Auto Center, Corner Shift, Negative  
Image, Mirror Image, Book Duplex, Booklet Creation, Multiple Up,  
Repeat Image, Bound Originals and Poster.  
1–37  
USER GUIDE (COPIER)  
Added Features Tab  
Below is a brief description of each feature available on the Added  
Features tab. Each feature is explained in detail on the following  
pages.  
2 Sided  
Allows you to select one or two-sided originals, with options for  
one or two-sided output.  
Output  
Margin Shift  
Border Erase  
Enables you to select the desired output order and destination of  
the output.  
Enables you to center a document image, shift the image to one  
edge or move the image to a specified edge of the output copy.  
Allows you to erase any undesired images around the border or  
center of a document.  
1–38  
     
USER GUIDE (COPIER)  
2 Sided  
Use the 2 Sided feature to select one or two-sided originals, with  
options for one or two-sided output.  
The following options are available:  
1 to 1 Sided  
Makes one-sided copies from one-sided input. This is the default  
setting.  
1 to 2 Sided  
2 to 2 Sided  
2 to 1 Sided  
Makes two-sided copies from one-sided input.  
Makes two-sided copies from two-sided input.  
Makes one-sided copies from two-sided input.  
NOTE: Some options are not available without a DADF.  
1–39  
     
USER GUIDE (COPIER)  
You can select several 2 Sided options from the Basic Copying tab  
or the Added Features tab.  
1
2
On the Added Features tab select 2 Sided.  
Select the desired option:  
1 to 1 Sided  
1 to 2 Sided  
Select Head to Head for two-sided, head-to-head output,  
as for books.  
Select Head to Toe for two-sided, head-to-toe output, as  
for calendars.  
1–40  
USER GUIDE (COPIER)  
2 to 2 Sided  
Select the option for your Originals  
Head to Head if your originals are two-sided, head-to-  
head.  
Head to Toe if your originals are two-sided, head-to-toe.  
Select the option for your Copies  
Head to Head for two-sided, head-to-head output, as for  
books.  
Head to Toe for two-sided, head-to-toe output, as for  
calendars.  
2 to 1 Sided  
Select Head to Head if your originals are two-sided, head-  
to-head.  
Select Head to Toe if your originals are two-sided, head-  
to-toe.  
3
4
Select the icon that most closely resembles the Original  
Orientation for the loaded document(s).  
Select Start to make copies or Close to select additional features.  
NOTE:1 to 2-Sided or 2 to 2-Sided cannot be selected when using  
Auto Size Detect for Tray 5 (Bypass), Repeat Image,  
Transparency Separators, Poster, or Booklet Creation.  
1–41  
USER GUIDE (COPIER)  
Output  
The Output feature enables you to select the destination of the  
output and determine whether it will be collated or uncollated.  
The following options are available:  
Auto  
The copier automatically determines which output mode (collated  
or uncollated) for the job and delivers the copies to the output tray.  
Collated  
Collated sets are delivered to the output tray.  
Uncollated sets are delivered to the output tray.  
Uncollated  
Collated refers to copies that are delivered as sets. Each copy set  
is in the order in which the originals were place in the DADF. For  
example, if the originals are placed in the DADF in 1, 2, 3 order  
and you want to make 3 copies, the copy sets will output in 1, 2, 3  
order.  
Uncollated refers to copies that are delivered in the order in which  
they were copied. For example, if the originals are placed in the  
DADF in 1, 2, 3 order and you want to make 3 copies, the copy  
sets will output in 1, 1, 1, 2, 2, 2, 3, 3, 3 order.  
1–42  
     
USER GUIDE (COPIER)  
1
2
On the Added Features tab select Output.  
Select the desired option:  
Auto  
Collated  
Uncollated  
3
4
If you have a Finisher (optional accessory), select the desired  
Output Destination:  
Center Output Tray  
Finisher Tray  
Select Start to make copies or Save to select additional features.  
1–43  
USER GUIDE (COPIER)  
Stapling  
This section describes the procedure for programming the Output  
feature to staple output. You must have a Finisher (optional  
accessory) to staple output.  
1
On the Added Features tab select Output.  
2
3
Select Collated/Stapling.  
Select Stapling. The Stapling screen is displayed.  
4
5
Select the desired stapling position.  
The Finisher Tray is automatically selected as the Output  
Destination.  
Select the desired Original Orientation:  
Head to Top  
Head to Left  
Select Save.  
6
Select Start to make copies or Save to select additional features.  
1–44  
 
USER GUIDE (COPIER)  
Margin Shift  
The Margin Shift feature allows you to shift the position of the  
image on the copy. The image can be centered on the copy or  
moved to the top, bottom, left or right. When copying both sides,  
different settings can be set for Side 1 and Side 2.  
The following types of Margin Shift are available:  
No Shift  
Copies are made without shifting the original. This is the default  
setting.  
Auto Center  
Select this to center an image on the copy when the original and  
copy paper are a different size. It may also be used to center a  
reduced or enlarged image on the output paper.  
Corner Shift  
Variable Shift  
Select this to move your image to a specified corner.  
Select this to move your image up, down, left or right by entering  
in a value. The range is from 0 to 50mm in 1mm increments.  
1–45  
     
USER GUIDE (COPIER)  
Using the Auto Center Feature  
1
2
On the Added Features tab select Margin Shift.  
Select Auto Center.  
3
Select Start to make copies or Save to select additional features.  
1–46  
 
USER GUIDE (COPIER)  
Using the Margin Shift/Variable Shift Feature  
1
2
3
On the Added Features tab select Margin Shift.  
Select Margin Shift/Variable Shift.  
Select the desired option:  
Side 1  
Side 2  
4
Select the desired shift option:  
No Shift  
Auto Center  
Corner Shift  
Press the arrow icon that illustrates the desired location of  
the image on the output copy.  
Variable Shift  
Press the left arrow to shift the image toward the left edge.  
Press the right arrow to shift the image toward the right  
edge.  
Press the up arrow to shift the image toward the top edge.  
Press the down arrow to shift the image toward the bottom  
edge.  
5
6
Select the icon that most closely resembles the Original  
Orientation for the original.  
Select Start to make copies or Save to select additional features.  
1–47  
 
USER GUIDE (COPIER)  
Border Erase  
The Border Erase feature enables you to eliminate unwanted  
marks near the edges of the original from the output copy. The  
range for Border Erase is 0 through 50mm in 1mm increments.  
Border Erase options can be used individually or combined  
together:  
Top & Bottom  
For Normal the default is 2mm. For Variable Erase the default is  
5mm.  
Left & Right  
Center  
For Normal the default is 2mm. For Variable Erase the default is  
5mm.  
The default is 0mm.  
The selected settings are applied to both sides of 2-sided copies.  
When the image is reduced or enlarged, the selected percentage  
will be applied to the Border Erase. For example, if Variable Erase  
is set to 30mm, a 50% reduction will result in 15mm of border  
erase on the output.  
When making copies the copier adds a margin of 2mm to all sides.  
This cannot be eliminated.  
1–48  
     
USER GUIDE (COPIER)  
1
2
3
On the Added Features tab select Border Erase.  
Select Variable Erase.  
Press the up or down arrows to increase or decrease the Border  
Erase amount(s) for Top & Bottom, Left & Right, and Center.  
4
5
Select the icon that most closely resembles the Original  
Orientation for the loaded document(s).  
Select Start to make copies or Save to select additional features.  
1–49  
USER GUIDE (COPIER)  
Image Quality Tab  
Below is a brief description of each feature available on the Image  
Quality tab. Each feature is explained in detail on the following  
pages.  
Original Type  
Auto Exposure  
Enables you to select the type of original document you wish to  
copy to ensure optimum copy quality.  
Prevents the background color of an original from appearing on  
the output copies.  
Lighter/Darker/Contrast  
Allows you to adjust the lightness, darkness and contrast of the  
output copy.  
Sharpness/Color  
Saturation  
Allows you to adjust the amount of edge definition and the overall  
richness of the color of the output copy  
Color Shift  
Allows you to shift all of the copy colors toward the adjacent hue.  
Color Balance  
Enables you to set the balance of Yellow, Magenta, Cyan and  
Black by varying degrees of density for each color.  
Image Quality Presets  
Automatically adjusts the image quality settings to produce output  
with various predetermined effects.  
1–50  
     
USER GUIDE (COPIER)  
Original Type  
The Original Type feature enables you to define the kind of original  
document you wish to copy. The copier automatically makes  
adjustments to optimize the copy based on the original type.  
The following types are available:  
Text & Photo  
Use for original documents that contain pictures and printed text,  
as you often see in magazines or professional journals.  
NOTE:This is the default setting. Originals do not have to contain  
photographs and text. Simply use this setting to apply the best  
sharpness and density levels automatically for optimum color  
quality on all your color copies.  
Text  
Use for text documents composed of fine line characters or other  
high contrast documents with bright, dense colors. Selecting this  
option suppresses background color.  
Photo  
Use for photographs or lithographs.  
Other Color Originals  
Use for original documents containing colored background such  
as maps, originals marked by highlighter pens, and documents  
printed on inkjet printers.  
1–51  
     
USER GUIDE (COPIER)  
1
2
On the Image Quality tab select Original Type.  
Select the type of Original:  
Text & Photo  
Select the Photo Type that best describes the photo in the  
original document  
Halftone: Use this option when copying from newspapers  
or magazines  
Photograph: Use this option when copying photos  
Color Copies: Use this option when copying Xerographic  
reproductions  
Text  
Photo  
Select the Photo Type that best describes the photo in the  
original document  
Halftone: Use this option when copying from newspapers  
or magazines  
Photograph: Use this option when copying photos  
Color Copies: Use this option when copying Xerographic  
reproductions  
Other Color Originals  
Select the option that best describes the original document  
Map: Use this option when copying from originals with  
colored backgrounds such as maps  
Highlighted Originals: Use this option when copying from  
originals marked with highlighter pen  
Inkjet Originals: Use this option when copying from  
originals made on Inkjet printers  
3
Select Start to make copies or Save to select additional features.  
1–52  
USER GUIDE (COPIER)  
Auto Exposure  
This feature prevents the background color of an original from  
appearing on the output copy. A newspaper or colored paper are  
examples of this type of original.  
1
2
3
On the Image Quality tab select Auto Exposure.  
Select On.  
Select Start to make copies or Save to select additional features.  
1–53  
     
USER GUIDE (COPIER)  
Lighter/Darker/Contrast  
The Lighter/Darker feature enables you to adjust the overall  
lightness or darkness of the output copy. Contrast allows you to  
adjust the clearness of the image. If you increase the Contrast,  
the copy appears sharp & vivid and is composed of mainly high  
and low density elements. If you decrease the Contrast, the copy  
is softer and renders more uniformly using mid-tones.  
There are seven levels of adjustment for Lighter/Darker and five  
levels of adjustment for Contrast.  
1
2
3
4
On the Image Quality tab select Lighter/Darker/Contrast.  
Press the up and down arrows to Lighten or Darken the original.  
Press the up and down arrows to adjust the Contrast the original.  
Select Start to make copies or Save to select additional features.  
1–54  
     
USER GUIDE (COPIER)  
Sharpness/Saturation  
The Sharpness feature allows you to adjust the amount of edge  
definition on the copies. The Color Saturation feature allows you  
to adjust the overall richness of color on the copy. There are five  
levels of adjustment for each feature.  
1
2
On the Image Quality tab select Sharpness/Saturation.  
Press the up and down arrows to increase or decrease the  
Sharpness of the original.  
3
4
Press the up and down arrows to adjust the Color Saturation of  
the original.  
Select Start to make copies or Save to select additional features.  
NOTE:Color Saturation cannot be adjusted when the Black is  
selected for Output Color.  
1–55  
     
USER GUIDE (COPIER)  
Color Shift  
The Color Shift feature allows you to shift all of the copy colors  
toward the adjacent hue.  
If you select one of the Warm buttons, the red colors shift toward  
the yellow hue, the green colors shift toward the cyan hue, and the  
blue colors shift toward the magenta hue. All colors between these  
original colors also shift in the same direction.  
If you select one of the Cool buttons, the red colors shift toward  
the magenta hue, the blue colors shift toward the cyan hue, and  
the green colors shift toward the yellow hue. Again, all colors  
between these original colors also shift in the same direction.  
1
2
On the Image Quality tab select Color Shift.  
Press the button for the desired Color Shift ranging from Coolest  
to Warmest.  
3
Select Start to make copies or Save to select additional features.  
NOTE:Color Shift cannot be adjusted when Black is selected for  
Output Color.  
1–56  
     
USER GUIDE (COPIER)  
Color Balance  
The Color Balance feature allows you to adjust the balance  
between colors and the overall amount of color on the output  
copies. You can adjust the levels of all four process colors  
(Yellow, Magenta, Cyan, and Black) for their low, medium and high  
density ranges.  
1
2
3
On the Image Quality tab select Color Balance.  
Select the button for the color you want to adjust.  
Select the desired density (Low, Medium, High) and perform one  
of the following:  
Press the up arrow to increase the amount of color to be  
added.  
Press the down arrow to decrease the amount of color to be  
added.  
4
Select Start to make copies or Save to select additional features.  
1–57  
     
USER GUIDE (COPIER)  
Image Quality Presets  
The Image Quality Presets feature automatically changes Image  
Quality settings to produce various predetermined effects.  
The following options are available:  
Normal  
Makes no changes to the image quality and produces copies with  
the same quality and density of the original. This is the default  
setting.  
Lively  
Uses the highest color saturation to produce rich, vivid output  
colors.  
Bright  
Warm  
Produces a sharp, clear image on the copy.  
Produces a soft image on the copy by transforming low density  
colors into light and reddish colors. Use this setting to apply a light  
pink tone to skin colors and to give a soft tone to dark, warm  
colors.  
Cool  
Produces a strong, clear blue tone on the copy. This setting can  
be used to make the blue color of water stronger and to make  
dark, cold colors clearer.  
Background Suppression  
Auto Contrast  
Prevents undesired marks or images that are printed on the back  
of an original from appearing on the output copies.  
Adjusts brightness and saturation to produce clearer looking  
images.  
1
2
3
On the Image Quality tab select Image Quality Presets.  
Press the button for the desired option.  
Select Start to make copies or Save to select additional features.  
1–58  
     
USER GUIDE (COPIER)  
Output Format Tab  
Below is a brief description of each feature available on the Output  
Format tab. Each feature is explained in detail on the following  
pages.  
Multiple Up  
Allows you to copy 2 or 4 images from multiple originals onto a  
single page.  
Transparency Separators  
Allows you to insert blank paper separators between  
transparencies. Also copy sets can be made in conjunction with  
the transparencies.  
Covers  
Allows you to add covers to your copied sets using paper drawn  
from a different tray than your copies.  
Repeat Image  
Poster  
Allows you to copy a single image multiple times onto one page.  
Allows you to create a poster size reproduction of the original  
document by creating multiple images that can be trimmed and  
joined together after.  
Mirror Image/Negative  
Image  
Enables you to create negative, mirror or negative mirror images  
on your output copy.  
1–59  
     
USER GUIDE (COPIER)  
Multiple Up  
The Multiple Up feature enables you to copy 2 or 4 images from  
multiple originals onto a single page.  
NOTE:When using this feature place the originals in the DADF.  
NOTE:Depending on the size of the original, some image loss  
might occur along the edge of the image.  
The following options are available:  
1 Up  
2 Up  
4 Up  
Copies one image on each output copy.  
Copies two images on each output copy.  
Copies four images on each output copy.  
NOTE: This feature is not available with a platen only  
configuration.  
1–60  
     
USER GUIDE (COPIER)  
1
2
On the Output Format tab select Multiple Up.  
Select the desired option:  
1 Up  
2 Up  
Select the desired Image Order:  
Left to Right  
Right to Left  
Top to Bottom  
1–61  
USER GUIDE (COPIER)  
4 Up  
Select the desired Image Order:  
Horizontally from the upper left corner  
Horizontally from the upper right corner  
Vertically from the upper left corner  
Vertically from the upper right corner  
3
4
Select the icon that most closely resembles the Original  
Orientation for the loaded documents.  
Select Start to make copies or Save to select additional features.  
NOTE:Multiple Up cannot be used with the following features:  
Auto Paper Tray Selection, Bound Originals, Book Duplex, Poster,  
Repeat Image, Booklet Creation, and Mixed Size Originals.  
NOTE:When Border Erase or Margin Shift is used with Multiple  
Up, the erase or shift amount is reflected on each original  
document.  
1–62  
USER GUIDE (COPIER)  
Transparency Separators  
When the Transparency Separators feature is used, the copier  
automatically inserts a blank sheet of paper between the  
transparency copies. In addition to the transparency set, you may  
also select copy sets.  
The following options are available:  
Off  
Copies are made without transparency separators.  
Blank Separators  
A blank sheet of paper is inserted between every transparency.  
Only one set can be made.  
Separators + N Sets  
A blank sheet of paper is inserted between every transparency. In  
addition the quantity selected determines how many copy sets (N  
sets) will also be made as part of the job.  
No Separators + N Sets  
A transparency set is made without blank separators. In addition  
the quantity selected determines how many copy sets (N sets) will  
also be made as part of the job.  
NOTE:When using this feature, load transparencies into Paper  
Tray 5. Make sure that there is paper of the same size and  
orientation in another tray for the separators and/or copy sets.  
NOTE:Separators are blank sheets of paper and are not added to  
the Meter count.  
1–63  
     
USER GUIDE (COPIER)  
Selecting Blank Separators  
1
2
On the Output Format tab select Transparency Separators.  
Select Blank Separators.  
3
4
Select Paper Tray Settings.  
Select the size/orientation of the transparencies loaded in Tray 5  
(Bypass).  
5
6
Select the paper tray to use for the Blank Separators.  
Select Start to make copies or Save to select additional features.  
1–64  
 
USER GUIDE (COPIER)  
Selecting Separators + N Sets  
1
2
On the Output Format tab select Transparency Separators.  
Select Separators + N Sets.  
3
4
Select Paper Tray Settings.  
Select the size/orientation of the transparencies loaded in Paper  
Tray 5.  
5
6
7
Select the paper tray to use for the Separators and N sets.  
Select Save.  
Select Start to make copies or Save to select additional features.  
NOTE:Transparency Separators cannot be used with the following  
features: Uncollated, Reduce/Enlarge, Covers, Booklet Creation,  
Book Duplex, and 2-Sided output.  
1–65  
 
USER GUIDE (COPIER)  
Covers  
This feature allows you to add covers to your copied sets, using  
paper drawn from a different tray than your copies. You can have  
blank or printed covers.  
The following options are available:  
No Covers  
No Covers are added to the copy set. This is the default setting.  
A Front Cover is added to the copy set with or without an image.  
Front Covers  
Front & Back Covers  
A Front & Back Cover is added to the copy set with or without an  
image.  
To copy an image on only one side of the cover when making 2-  
Sided copies, insert a blank sheet in the original set of documents  
in the appropriate position before making copies.  
1–66  
     
USER GUIDE (COPIER)  
1
2
On the Output Format tab select Covers.  
Select the desired option:  
No Covers  
Front Covers  
Front & Back Covers  
3
4
If you selected Front Covers or Front & Back Covers, select the  
desired Printed Covers option.  
Select Paper Tray Settings.  
5
6
7
Select the correct paper tray for the Body Pages and Covers.  
Select Save.  
Select Start to make copies or Save to select additional features.  
NOTE:Covers cannot be used with the following features:  
Uncollated, Repeat Image, Poster, Transparency Separators,  
Booklet Creation, and Auto Paper selection.  
1–67  
USER GUIDE (COPIER)  
Repeat Image  
The Repeat Image feature enables you to copy a single image  
multiple times onto one page.  
The following options are available:  
Off  
This is the default setting, which produces only one image per  
output page.  
Auto Repeat  
This option enables the copier to automatically determine the  
number of output images that will fit on a single page.  
Variable Repeat  
With this option you can specify the number of images that will  
print on a single sheet by selecting the number of rows and  
columns.  
1–68  
     
USER GUIDE (COPIER)  
1
2
On the Output Format tab select Repeat Image.  
Select the desired option:  
Off  
Auto Repeat  
Variable Repeat  
Press the up arrow to increase the number of images to  
print in a column, or press the down arrow to decrease the  
number. The range is from 1 through 33.  
Press the up arrow to increase the number of images to  
print in a row, or press the down arrow to decrease the  
number. The range is from 1 through 23.  
3
4
For Auto Repeat and Variable Repeat select the Image Layout for  
the output copy.  
Even: Centers all the images on the output copy.  
Bias: Places the images one after the other on the output  
copy.  
Select Start to make copies or Save to select additional features.  
NOTE:Repeat Image cannot be used with the following features:  
Auto Paper selection, Multiple Up, Bound Originals, Poster, Book  
Duplex, Covers, and Booklet Creation.  
1–69  
USER GUIDE (COPIER)  
Poster  
This feature allows you to create a poster size reproduction of the  
original document by creating multiple images that can be trimmed  
and joined together after. There will be a 10mm image overlap on  
the copies to allow for the trimming and joining required to  
assemble the copies into a poster.  
When using this feature place the original on the Document Glass  
in the same orientation as the orientation of the paper loaded in  
the selected paper tray. The DADF cannot be used.  
The following options are available:  
2 x 2  
The document is copied and divided onto a total of four sheets,  
two in the X direction and two in the Y direction.  
3 x 3  
4 x 4  
The document is copied and divided onto a total of nine sheets,  
three in the X direction and three in the Y direction.  
The document is copied and divided onto a total of sixteen sheets,  
four in the X direction and four in the Y direction.  
1–70  
     
USER GUIDE (COPIER)  
1
2
On the Output Format tab select Poster.  
Select the desired option:  
2 x 2  
3 x 3  
4 x 4  
3
4
Select the desired Paper Tray.  
Select Start to make copies or Save to select additional features.  
NOTE:Poster cannot be used with the following features: Tray 5  
(Bypass), Auto Paper Tray selection, 1 to 2 Sided, 2 to 2 Sided,  
Multiple Up, Collated, Repeat Image, Bound Originals, Covers,  
Book Duplex, Transparency Separators, Booklet Creation, and  
Build Job.  
1–71  
USER GUIDE (COPIER)  
Mirror Image/ Negative Image  
When the Mirror Image feature is selected, the output copy  
appears as a mirror image reflection of the original document.  
The Negative Image feature reverses the colors of the whole  
document image.  
NOTE:Negative Image cannot be used with Dual Color.  
NOTE:When Negative Image is used with Border Erase, the  
Border Erase area becomes white.  
1
2
On the Output Format tab select Mirror Image/ Negative Image.  
Select the desired options:  
Select On or Off for Mirror Image.  
Select On or Off for Negative Image.  
3
Select Start to make copies or Save to select additional features.  
1–72  
     
USER GUIDE (COPIER)  
Scan Options Tab  
Below is a brief description of each feature available on the Scan  
Options tab. Each feature is explained in detail on the following  
pages.  
Original Size  
Mixed Size Originals  
Bound Originals  
Image Rotation  
Enables you to specify the size of the original document to be  
copied.  
Allows you to place documents of mixed sizes into the DADF for  
copying.  
Automatically scans two adjoining pages of a bound document  
and copies them onto two separate sheets of paper.  
Automatically rotates the image to match the copy output paper  
when the original orientation and the copy paper are different.  
Original Orientation  
Book Duplex  
Allows you to indicate the top of the original so that your output will  
be oriented as desired.  
Allows you to make two-sided copies from a bound original.  
1–73  
     
USER GUIDE (COPIER)  
Original Size  
Use the Original Size feature to specify the original document  
size.  
The following options are available:  
Auto Detect  
The copier automatically recognizes the size of standard  
documents in the DADF or on the Document Glass. This is the  
default setting.  
Standard Sizes  
Select the document size from one of the 11 preset sizes. These  
presets can be changed in System Settings mode. You must  
place the original on the Document Glass.  
Non-standard Sizes  
Allows you to manually enter the size of the document placed on  
the Document Glass.  
1–74  
     
USER GUIDE (COPIER)  
1
2
On the Scan Options tab select Original Size.  
Perform one of the following:  
Select Auto Size Detect to have the copier identify the size of  
the original document.  
Select the appropriate size of the document from one of the  
preset size buttons.  
Enter the width (X) and length (Y) dimensions of the original  
document.  
Press the arrow buttons to decrease or increase the X and  
Y dimensions. X dimensions range from 15 to 432mm in 1  
mm increments. Y dimensions range from 15 to 297mm in  
1 mm increments.  
3
Select Start to make copies or Save to select additional features.  
1–75  
USER GUIDE (COPIER)  
Mixed Size Originals  
This option allows you to place documents of standard mixed  
sizes into the DADF for copying. When the Mixed Size Originals  
feature and Auto Paper selection are selected, the copier  
automatically identifies each document size and selects the  
appropriate paper tray. You can also specify a paper tray so that  
all copies are made on the same size paper.  
1
2
On the Scan Options tab select Mixed Size Originals.  
Select the desired option:  
Off: when documents are all the same size.  
On: when documents are different sizes.  
3
4
5
Load the mixed size originals with one edge of every sheet aligned  
evenly against the top left corner of the DADF to avoid misfeeds.  
Select the icon that most closely resembles the Original  
Orientation for the loaded documents.  
Select Start to make copies or Save to select additional features.  
NOTE:Mixed Size Originals cannot be used with the following  
features: Covers, Transparency Separators, Multiple Up, Auto  
Repeat Image, and Booklet Creation.  
NOTE: This feature is not available with a platen only  
configuration.  
1–76  
     
USER GUIDE (COPIER)  
Bound Originals  
The Bound Originals feature enables you to copy a bound  
document such as books, magazines, notebooks, or stapled sets.  
When this feature is selected, each page is copied onto a  
separate sheet of paper.  
You must place your bound document face down in the upper left  
corner of the Document Glass. The DADF cannot be used.  
The following options are available:  
Off  
Left Page then Right  
Right Page then Left  
This is the default.  
Copies are made starting from the left page of a bound document.  
Copies are made starting from the right page of a bound  
document.  
Top Page then Bottom  
Copies are made starting from the top page of a bound document.  
Along with the Bound Originals feature, Center Erase is offered.  
This option allows you to remove the shadow caused by the  
center binding of bound documents when they are copied. This  
corresponds to the Center Erase feature under Margin Shift.  
1–77  
     
USER GUIDE (COPIER)  
1
2
On the Scan Options tab select Bound Originals.  
Select the desired format:  
Left Page then Right  
Right Page then Left  
Top Page then Bottom  
3
Select which pages are to be copied:  
Both Pages  
Left Page Only  
Right Page Only  
4
5
Press the left and right arrows to decrease or increase the Center  
Erase amount from 0 to 50mm.  
Select Start to make copies or Save to select additional features.  
NOTE:Bound Originals cannot be used with the following  
features: Auto Size Detect for Tray 5, Multiple Up, Repeat Image,  
Book Duplex, and Poster.  
1–78  
USER GUIDE (COPIER)  
Image Rotation  
This feature allows the machine to automatically rotate the image  
so that the orientation of the document matches the output paper.  
The following options are available:  
Off  
Always On  
The copier will not rotate the image even if the orientation differs  
from the output paper.  
The copier will automatically rotate the image if the orientation  
differs from the output paper.  
On during Auto  
The copier will automatically rotate the image if the orientation  
differs from the output paper only when Auto Paper selection is  
selected, or Auto % is selected in Reduce/Enlarge. If a specific  
paper tray is selected without Auto %, image rotation will not  
occur.  
1
2
On the Scan Options tab select Image Rotation.  
Select the desired option:  
Off  
Always On  
On during Auto  
3
If using Mixed Size Originals, select Rotation Direction. Select  
the desired option:  
Portrait Original - Left Edge  
Portrait Original - Right Edge  
1–79  
     
USER GUIDE (COPIER)  
4
Select Start to make copies or Save to select additional features.  
NOTE:Image Rotation cannot be used with the following features:  
Auto Size Detect for Paper Tray 5, Repeat Image and Poster.  
NOTE:When Booklet Creation is selected, Image Rotation occurs  
automatically regardless of the Image Rotation setting.  
Original Orientation  
The document orientation must be set to indicate the top of the  
original when using the following features: 2-Sided, Margin Shift,  
Border Erase, Multiple Up, Repeat Image, Mixed Size Originals,  
and Independent X-Y%.  
Original Orientation is designed as follows:  
Head to Top  
Head to Left  
Select this when placing the top of the document at the top of the  
DADF or Document Glass.  
Select this when placing the top of the document towards the left  
of the DADF or Document Glass.  
1–80  
     
USER GUIDE (COPIER)  
Book Duplex  
The Book Duplex feature enables you to make 2 Sided copies of a  
bound document such as books, magazines, notebooks, or  
stapled sets.  
You must place your bound document face down in the upper left  
corner of the Document Glass. The DADF cannot be used.  
The following options are available:  
Left Page then Right  
Right Page then Left  
Copies are made starting from the left page of a bound document.  
Copies are made starting from the right page of a bound  
document.  
Top Page then Bottom  
Copies are made starting from the top page of a bound document.  
Along with the Book Duplex feature, Center Erase is offered. This  
option allows you to remove the shadow caused by the center  
binding of bound documents when they are copied. This  
corresponds to the Center Erase feature under Margin Shift.  
1–81  
     
USER GUIDE (COPIER)  
1
2
On the Scan Options tab select Book Duplex.  
Select the desired option:  
Left Page then Right  
Right Page then Left  
Top Page then Bottom  
3
4
5
Select Start Page & End Page and select the desired options.  
Press Save to return to the Book Duplex screen.  
Press the left and right arrows to decrease or increase the Center  
Erase amount from 0 to 50mm.  
Select Start to make copies or Save to select additional features.  
1–82  
USER GUIDE (COPIER)  
Job Assembly Tab  
Below is a brief description of each feature available on the Job  
Assembly tab. Each feature is explained in detail on the following  
pages.  
Stored Jobs  
Build Job  
Allows you to program various feature settings in the built-in  
copier memory as a single job.  
Allows you to build a job using different settings for each page or  
segment of a job.  
Booklet Creation  
Automatically copies your originals such that the output set can be  
folded into a booklet.  
1–83  
     
USER GUIDE (COPIER)  
Stored Jobs  
The Stored Jobs feature allows you to program various feature  
settings in the built-in copier memory as a single job. Up to 8 jobs  
can be stored and up to 18 characters can be entered for each job  
name. This feature is especially helpful for complex jobs that you  
run frequently.  
You can retrieve stored jobs and apply their programming features  
to a new copy job. Deleting stored jobs frees that memory  
position for storing different jobs.  
Storing a Job  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Program the features and options you want to save for future use.  
On the Job Assembly tab select Stored Jobs.  
Select Store.  
Select the desired icon to identify the job number.  
Select Enter/Change Name to name the job.  
Select the job number.  
Enter a name up to 18 characters long for the stored job and  
select Save.  
8
Select Close.  
1–84  
     
USER GUIDE (COPIER)  
Deleting a Job  
1
2
3
4
On the Job Assembly tab select Stored Jobs.  
Select Delete.  
Select the job number you want to delete.  
Select the desired option:  
Yes: to confirm the deletion.  
No: to cancel the deletion.  
5
Select Close.  
You can now store a new job in place of the job you deleted.  
Retrieving a Job  
1
2
3
4
On the Job Assembly tab select Stored Jobs.  
Select the job number you want to retrieve.  
Select Close.  
Select Start to make copies.  
1–85  
   
USER GUIDE (COPIER)  
Build Job  
Build Job enables you to program, scan, and store individual job  
segments of a large or complex job, and then print all the  
segments as one complete job.  
1
2
3
On the Job Assembly tab, select Build Job.  
Select On.  
To make a sample set of your originals, select On for Sample Set.  
Select Save.  
4
5
6
Load your originals for the first segment of the job.  
Set the desired features for the job and press Start.  
Check that Next Original is selected while the document is being  
copied.  
1–86  
     
USER GUIDE (COPIER)  
7
Load the next segment of the job, and set the desired features.  
Chapter Division - If you select Chapter Division, the next  
document will be copied onto Side 1, if 2 Sided is selected.  
Change Settings - Select Change Settings to change job  
features for the next segment of the job. When you select  
Change Settings, the Basic Copying screen is displayed.  
Select the desired features.  
8
9
Select Start. Repeat steps 5 through 7 for each job segment.  
Select Last Original after the last segment is scanned.  
Sample Set Off - If you selected Off for Sample Set, the entire  
job will be output.  
Sample Set On - If you selected On for Sample Set, one copy  
of the job will be output.  
Check the sample set, and select whether or not to output  
the remaining number of copies. Select Start.  
1–87  
USER GUIDE (COPIER)  
Booklet Creation  
This feature copies your originals to make a booklet. The  
maximum number of originals that can be used is 100.  
If the number of originals is not a multiple of four, blank pages will  
be automatically added.  
The following options are available to indicate binding location:  
Left Bind / Top Bind  
Use this for a booklet that will be bound in a left to right format or  
top to bottom format, such as a calendar.  
Right Bind  
Use this for output that will be bound in a right to left format.  
1
2
On the Job Assembly tab select Booklet Creation.  
Select the required binding location.  
Left Bind/Top Bind  
Right Bind  
3
Select Gutter if you want to add space in the center of your output  
for a gutter ranging from 0 to 50mm.  
4
5
Select Covers if you want to add a cover to the job.  
Select Originals to specify 1 or 2 Sided originals and their  
orientation.  
6
Select Start to make copies or Save to select additional features.  
NOTE:Booklet Creation cannot be used with Auto Paper  
selection, Mixed Size Originals, 2 Sided, Uncollated, Multiple Up,  
Repeat Image, Poster, Covers, and Transparency Separators.  
1–88  
     
USER GUIDE (COPIER)  
Duplex Automatic Document Feeder (DADF) (Optional Accessory)  
This section describes the Duplex Automatic Document Feeder  
(DADF) for the WorkCentre 24 printer/copier.  
The DADF automatically feeds up to 50 sheets of the same size  
documents or mixed size documents, one at a time, onto the  
Document Glass, feeding the top sheet first. Documents are  
delivered to the Original Catch Tray after they have been copied.  
NOTE: If the DADF belt is dirty and the original is a thin or  
transparent document, background may appear on the output.  
This may also occur when copies are made using the Document  
Glass. Place a white sheet of paper of the same size on top of the  
document being copied to eliminate background until the belt is  
cleaned.  
Component Names and Functions  
The following items are the principal components of the Duplex  
Automatic Document Feeder.  
Document Feed Lamp  
This lamp displays a green arrow when a document is inserted  
correctly into the feeder. This light can also indicate a document  
jam.  
Original Catch Tray  
Original Input Area  
Documents are delivered to this tray.  
Place documents here to start copying.  
1–89  
       
USER GUIDE (COPIER)  
Document Specifications  
Always use the recommended types of input documents so that  
the Duplex Automatic Document Feeder operates within the  
design specifications. Documents jams may occur if non-standard  
documents are used, resulting in damaged documents.  
Standard DADF document specifications  
The document should be 16 lb. to 32 lb. (64 to 128 gsm)  
North and South America:  
Weight  
Size  
8.5x5.5 in., 8.5x11 in., 8.5x14 in., 11x17 in., A4  
European market:  
A5, A4, A3, 8.5x13 in., 8.5x14 in., 8.5x11 in., 11x17 in.  
If the DADF senses non-standard size documents in the feeder, a  
message is displayed and the printer/copier stops. Place such  
non-standard documents on the Document Glass, or enter the  
document size using the Original Size feature on the Scan Output  
tab.  
For more information about Original Size, refer to the section  
entitled Scan Output Tab in this chapter.  
If the input document is slightly smaller or larger than a standard  
size document, the Duplex Automatic Document Feeder may  
detect it as a standard size document. Dark areas or an image  
loss along the edges may occur. Enter the document size using  
the Original Size feature, or use the Border Erase feature on the  
Added Features tab.  
For more information about Border Erase, refer to the section  
entitled Added Features Tab, in this chapter.  
1–90  
   
USER GUIDE (COPIER)  
Documents Not Recommended  
The following document types cause document jams or  
malfunction of the printer/copier. Make copies of these documents  
by placing them directly onto the Document Glass.  
Book, pamphlet, and booklet documents  
Broken, creased, or paste-up documents  
Documents with clips and staples  
Transparent documents (the document size cannot be  
detected automatically, or the DADF belt is copied)  
Coated paper or carbon-backed documents  
Documents smaller than A5 size (8.5 x 5.5 inches)  
Documents with glossy surfaces such as photographs  
Loading the Documents  
Placing Documents on the Document Glass  
1
2
Open the Platen cover or the DADF.  
Place the document face down, and align it against the inside left  
cover of the Document Glass.  
3
Close the Platen cover or the DADF.  
1–91  
         
USER GUIDE (COPIER)  
Loading Documents in the DADF  
You can load up to 50 documents from 16 lb. to 32 lb. (64 to 128  
gsm) into the DADF.  
1
2
Remove any paper clips or staples from the documents. Align the  
documents.  
Place the documents face up in the Original Input Area of the  
DADF. Slide the documents to the left until the green Document  
Feed Lamp lights.  
If the lamp does not light, readjust the alignment and or the  
placement of the documents until the lamp lights.  
3
Slide the document guide toward the stack of documents until the  
guide lightly touches the side edges of the documents. If the  
document guide is set too tight, the documents may not feed or  
may become damaged. If the guide is set too loose, the  
documents may skew as they feed, which could cause a  
document jam.  
4
5
Extend the DADF Original Catch Tray to accommodate the size of  
the documents.  
Press the Start button.  
The documents automatically feed one by one, onto the  
Document Glass. The feeding begins from the top of the stack of  
documents.  
1–92  
 
USER GUIDE (COPIER)  
Finisher (Optional Accessory)  
The WorkCentre 24 printer/copier may be equipped with an  
optional Finisher. The Finisher contains the following components:  
Provides access to the Finisher paper path.  
Completed jobs are delivered to this tray.  
Provides access to the Stapler area.  
Finisher Cover Button  
Finisher Tray  
Finisher Front Door  
Staple Cartridge  
Load a new staple pack when needed.  
Finisher Stand  
Supports the Finisher and may be used for storage.  
Delivers the copies to the Finisher.  
Finisher Interface  
Center Tray Exit Cover  
Provides access to the paper path.  
WARNING: Never cheat the safety interlock switch. Injury or  
a document jam may occur. This switch shuts off the Finisher  
power when you open the front door or when you move the  
Finisher to the right to clear a paper jam.  
Using the Finisher  
The Finisher can staple from 2 to 50 sheets (50-sheet maximum  
applies to up to 24lb / 90 gsm paper.) You can staple both portrait  
and landscape documents with single or dual staples. Output to  
the Finisher Tray is delivered face down. The Finisher Tray can  
hold up to 1000 sheets.  
Jobs containing more than 50 sheets will not be stapled.  
Tray 5 (Bypass) cannot be selected as the paper source for a  
job going to the Finisher.  
1–93  
       
USER GUIDE (COPIER)  
Stapling Options  
Stapling options are selected from the UI or from your printer  
driver and depend on the paper selected. The table below shows  
the acceptable paper sizes and stapling options.  
Copying  
Paper  
Orientation  
Paper Size  
One Left  
Two Left  
Two Up  
One Right  
Two Right  
LEF  
B5, A4,  
8.5x11 in.  
SEF  
A4, 8x10 in.,  
8.5x11 in.,  
8.5x13 in.,  
8.5x14 in.  
SEF  
B4, A3, 11x17  
in.  
1–94  
   
USER GUIDE (COPIER)  
Printing  
Paper  
Orientation  
Paper Size  
One Left  
Two Left  
Two Up  
One Right  
Two Right  
LEF  
B5, A4,  
8.5x11 in.  
SEF  
A4, 8x10 in.,  
8.5x11 in.,  
8.5x13 in.,  
8.5x14 in.  
SEF  
B4, A3,  
11x17 in.  
1–95  
USER GUIDE (COPIER)  
Job Status  
This section describes how to check currently copying, printing,  
queued, or completed jobs. It also describes how to change print  
schedules to cancel print jobs, or to change the print priority of  
queued jobs.  
Checking Current Jobs  
This section describes the procedure for checking currently  
copying, printing or queued jobs.  
1
2
Select the Job Status button on the Control Panel. The Job  
Status screen is displayed.  
Select Current and Pending Jobs. The Current and Pending  
Jobs screen is displayed.  
A job list is displayed if jobs are stored to memory. The list  
displays currently printing or queued jobs and documents stored  
to memory. It also displays the current status of each job.  
3
Display the desired job using the up and down arrow buttons, and  
select the desired item from the list. The screen for checking the  
job status is displayed.  
1–96  
       
USER GUIDE (COPIER)  
4
Check the status of the selected job.  
To cancel a job select Stop. This cancels processing of the  
currently printing, copying, or queued job.  
You can change the print priority when there are two or more  
queued jobs. To change the print priority:  
Select Promote Job. The print order will be changed so  
that the job you instructed higher print priority to will be  
printed after the current job.  
NOTE: If you continue to change the print priority again after  
changing the print order in the print schedule, priority will be given  
to the job that you last instructed.  
Changing the Print Priority  
The print order of jobs queued for printing can be changed. If there  
are two or more queued jobs in the list, you can change the print  
order so that jobs are printed in the order that they were received.  
1
2
Select the Job Status button on the Control Panel. The Job  
Status screen is displayed.  
Select Print Waiting Jobs. Queued jobs in the list are printed  
according to the print priority. If there are no queued jobs in the  
list, Print Waiting Jobs cannot be selected.  
1–97  
   
USER GUIDE (COPIER)  
Checking Completed Jobs  
This section describes how to check completed jobs. A list  
displays whether jobs have been completed normally or not. This  
list also allows you to check details of completed jobs in more  
detail.  
1
2
Select the Job Status button on the Control Panel. The Job  
Status screen is displayed.  
Select Completed Jobs. The Completed Jobs screen is  
displayed. A job list is displayed if there are completed jobs.  
3
4
Select the job you want to check using the up and down arrow  
buttons. The screen for checking the job status is displayed.  
Select Close. The screen returns to the Job Status screen.  
1–98  
   
USER GUIDE (COPIER)  
Outputting/Deleting Secure Prints  
This section describes how to output and delete documents saved  
by the secure print feature.  
1
2
Select the Job Status button on the Control Panel. The Job  
Status screen is displayed.  
Select Stored Documents. The Stored Documents screen is  
displayed.  
3
4
Select Secure Print. The Secure Print screen is displayed.  
Select the ID number of the user you want to check.  
Enter a 3-digit number for the user ID using Numeric Keypad  
on the control panel. When you have finished entering the  
number, the screen showing the desired item is automatically  
displayed. You can also select items using the up and down  
arrow buttons.  
NOTE:The latest information can be updated by selecting  
Refresh.  
5
6
Select Document List. The Password screen is displayed.  
NOTE:The Password screen is not displayed if a password has  
not been set.  
Enter the user password, and select Confirm. The secure  
documents for the selected user can be confirmed.  
1–99  
   
USER GUIDE (COPIER)  
7
Select the document to print. All documents can be selected by  
selecting the Select All.  
To print a secure document:  
Select the secure document, and select Print. The Print  
Confirmation screen is displayed.  
Select how the document is to be processed after it is  
printed.  
To cancel printing, select Cancel.  
To delete secure documents:  
Select the secure document, and select Delete. The  
Delete Confirmation screen is displayed.  
Select Yes.  
To cancel the delete, select No.  
8
Select Close. The screen returns to the Stored Documents  
screen.  
1–100  
USER GUIDE (COPIER)  
Outputting Sample Prints  
This section describes how to output and delete documents stored  
by the sample print feature. You can instruct the machine to output  
sample prints when you are printing multiple copies of a job from a  
client. Selecting this feature will instruct the machine to print only  
one copy of the job. To print the remaining copies after confirming  
the print result, instruct the machine to output the sample print.  
1
2
Select the Job Status button on the Control Panel. The Job  
Status screen is displayed.  
Select Stored Documents. The Stored Documents screen is  
displayed.  
3
4
Select Sample Print. The Sample Print screen is displayed.  
Select the ID number of the user you want to verify.  
Enter a 3-digit number for the user ID using the Numeric  
Keypad on the control panel. When you have finished entering  
the number, the screen showing the desired items is  
automatically displayed. You can select items using the up and  
down arrow buttons.  
NOTE:Information can be updated by selecting Refresh.  
5
Select Document List. The sample print documents for the  
selected user can be confirmed.  
1–101  
   
USER GUIDE (COPIER)  
6
Select the document to print. You can select all documents by  
selecting Select All.  
To print a sample print document:  
Select the sample print document, and select Print. The  
Print Confirmation screen is displayed.  
Select Yes. Sample print documents are deleted from  
memory after the remaining number of copies is output.  
To delete sample print documents:  
Select the sample print document, and select Delete. The  
Delete Confirmation screen is displayed.  
Select Yes.  
To cancel the delete, select No.  
7
Select Close. The screen returns to the Stored Documents  
screen.  
1–102  
USER GUIDE (COPIER)  
Delayed Print  
You can specify the time to start outputting jobs from the client.  
When the specified time is reached, jobs stored to memory will  
begin printing.  
NOTE:If the machine is turned Off/On with specified output time  
prints stored to memory, output of these prints will automatically  
begin regardless of the specified time setting.  
1
2
Select the Job Status button on the Control Panel. The Job  
Status screen is displayed.  
Select Stored Documents. The Stored Documents screen is  
displayed.  
3
Select Delayed Print. The Delayed Print screen is displayed.  
1–103  
   
USER GUIDE (COPIER)  
4
Select the document to print. The current time is displayed in the  
message area.  
To print a delayed print document:  
Select the delayed print document, and select Print. The  
Print Confirmation screen is displayed.  
Select Yes.  
To delete a delayed print documents:  
Select the specified time print document, and select  
Delete. The Delete Confirmation screen is displayed.  
Select Yes.  
To cancel the delete, select No.  
5
Select Close. The screen returns to the Stored Documents  
screen.  
1–104  
USER GUIDE (COPIER)  
Deleting Stored Documents  
This section describes how to delete documents stored to  
mailboxes.  
1
2
Select the Job Status button on the Control Panel. The Job  
Status screen is displayed.  
Select Stored Documents. The Stored Documents screen is  
displayed.  
3
4
Select Private Mailbox or Public Mailbox. The Mailbox screen is  
displayed.  
If Private Mailbox is selected, select the mailbox to confirm.  
Enter a 3-digit number for the mailbox using Numeric Keypad  
on the control panel. When you have finished entering the  
number, the screen with the desired items is automatically  
displayed. You can select items using the up and down arrow  
buttons.  
Select Document List. The Password screen is displayed.  
NOTE:If a system administrator’s password and a mailbox  
password are set, the Password screen is displayed.  
Enter the mailbox password, and select Confirm. You can  
confirm the documents in the selected mailbox.  
1–105  
   
USER GUIDE (COPIER)  
5
If Private Mailbox or Public Mailbox is selected, select the  
document. All documents can be selected by selecting Select All.  
6
7
8
Select Delete. The Delete Confirmation screen is displayed.  
Select Yes. To cancel the delete, select No.  
Select Close. The screen returns to the Stored Documents  
screen.  
1–106  
USER GUIDE (COPIER)  
Machine Status  
Machine status can be checked by selecting the Machine Status  
button on the Control Panel. The following items are on the  
Machine Status screen:  
Serial Number  
Machine Configuration  
Software Version  
Consumable Status  
Paper Tray Information  
Billing Meters  
Error Reports  
Machine information, Consumable status, Paper Tray information,  
Billing Meters, and Error Reports can be checked by selecting the  
appropriate tab on the Machine Status screen.  
Checking Paper Trays  
To check the status of the Paper Trays, select the Paper Tray  
button on the Machine Status screen.  
1–107  
       
USER GUIDE (COPIER)  
Billing Meters and Printing  
Reports  
Select the Billing Meter/Print Report tab to check the current meter  
readings and to print reports.  
Checking Consumables  
Select the Consumables tab to check the status of the machine  
consumables.  
Error History Report  
Select the Faults tab to print the Error History Report.  
1–108  
             
USER GUIDE (COPIER)  
Machine Information  
1
2
Press Machine Status. The Machine Status screen is displayed.  
Select Machine Information. The Machine Information screen is  
displayed.  
3
4
The Serial Number will be displayed.  
Select Close to return to the Machine Status screen.  
1–109  
     
USER GUIDE (COPIER)  
Maintenance  
This section describes maintenance procedures that should be  
performed on your machine regularly. When replacing  
consumable items, such as Toner Cartridges, refer to the  
instructions included with the items for information on how to  
replace them.  
Cleaning the DADF and Document Glass  
Keep the DADF and Document Glass clean to ensure clean  
copies and acceptable copy quality. Clean the DADF and  
Document Glass as needed.  
1
2
Open the DADF document cover.  
Wipe off any dirt from the underside of the DADF document cover  
(belt section) with a dry cloth moistened with water. Wipe the  
cover with a soft, dry cloth until it is clean and dry.  
3
4
Wipe off any dirt from the document glass with a soft cloth  
moistened with water. Wipe in a lengthwise direction making sure  
to keep your fingers off the glass. Repeat until the Document  
Glass has no visible marks or streaks.  
Close the DADF document cover.  
1–110  
         
USER GUIDE (COPIER)  
Changing Toner Cartridges  
When a message is displayed to replace a Toner Cartridge, follow  
the instructions provided here in addition to those on the labels  
surrounding the cartridges.  
NOTE: When a message appears indicating that a Toner  
Cartridge is low, the color that is low will be shown. If additional  
cartridges are low, a more generic message will be displayed and  
you will not know which cartridges require replacement. Press the  
Machine Status button on the Control Panel, then select the  
Consumables tab to view the status of all the consumables.  
1
Open the Front Door of the printer/copier and locate the Toner  
Cartridges. From left to right the Toner Cartridge colors are Black,  
Cyan, Magenta, Yellow.  
2
3
Place a few sheets of paper on the floor under the Toner  
Cartridges to catch any toner that may spill.  
Remove the empty cartridge by rotating it counterclockwise until  
the arrow on the cartridge is aligned with the arrow and unlock  
position on the printer/copier.  
1–111  
     
USER GUIDE (COPIER)  
4
Pull the cartridge completely out of the printer/copier. Dispose of  
the cartridge according to local regulations.  
5
6
Remove the new cartridge from the box.  
Shake the cartridge from side to side.  
7
8
With the arrow on the cartridge facing upward, slide the cartridge  
into the printer/copier.  
Rotate the cartridge clockwise until the arrow on the cartridge is  
aligned with the arrow and lock position on the printer/copier.  
1–112  
USER GUIDE (COPIER)  
9
Close the Front Door of the printer/copier.  
10 Remove the sheets of paper on the floor under the Toner  
Cartridge, and dispose of them according to local regulations.  
CAUTION: Do not use warm or hot water, or cleaning solvents, to  
remove toner from your skin or clothing. This will set the toner and  
make it difficult to remove. If any toner gets on your skin or  
clothing, use a brush to remove the toner, blow it off, or wash it off  
with cold water and mild soap.  
CAUTION: If more than one Toner Cartridge needs to be replaced  
at the same time, be careful to place the new cartridges in their  
correct color locations.  
1–113  
USER GUIDE (COPIER)  
Machine Specifications  
Speed by Media  
Plain Paper (8.5x11 in./216x279mm LEF):  
Black and white: 24 ppm  
Color: 13 ppm  
Transparency:  
Black and white: 11 ppm  
Color: 5 ppm  
Heavyweight 1 (28 lb. bond to 65 lb. cover/106 to 169 gsm):  
Black and white: 11 ppm  
Color: 7 ppm  
Heavyweight 2 (65 lb. cover to 110 lb. index/170 to 220 gsm):  
Black and white: 7 ppm  
Color: 7 ppm  
1–114  
       
USER GUIDE (COPIER)  
Dimensions and Weight  
WorkCentre 24  
The dimensions are: 666 x 780 x 1145mm. Each size +/- 5mm.  
The weight is: 174kg.  
Finisher (optional  
accessory)  
The dimensions are: 300 x 590 x 945mm. Each size +/- 5mm. The  
weight is: 35kg.  
1–115  
   
USER GUIDE (COPIER)  
1–116  
Printing User Guide  
WorkCentre M24  
Printer/Copier  
TABLE OF CONTENTS  
Table of Contents  
Overview 1  
As a Local Printer 2  
As a Network Printer 3  
Windows Network (SMB) 3  
TCP/IP (LPD) 3  
Overview 5  
Installing PostScript or PCL Print Driver 6  
Configuring the PostScript Print Driver on Windows 95/98/Me 8  
Configuration Tab Settings 9  
Options Tab Settings 12  
Output Settings Tab Settings 13  
Color Settings Tab Settings 15  
Configuring the PCL Print Driver on Windows 95/98/Me 16  
Print Driver Properties 16  
Configuration Tab Settings 17  
Printer Tab Settings 19  
Document Default Properties 20  
Installing PostScript or PCL Print Driver 23  
Configuring PostScript Print Driver on Windows NT 4.0 26  
Print Driver Properties 26  
Installable Options Settings 27  
Configuration Tab Settings 28  
Print Driver Document Defaults 29  
Advanced Tab Settings 30  
Output Settings Tab Settings 34  
iii  
TABLE OF CONTENTS  
Configuring the PCL Print Driver on Windows NT 4.0 36  
Print Driver Properties 36  
Configuration Tab Settings 37  
Printer Tab Settings 39  
Document Defaults 40  
Installing PostScript or PCL Print Driver 43  
Configuring the PostScript Print Driver on Windows 2000/XP 45  
Print Driver Properties 45  
Installable Options Settings 46  
Configuration Tab Settings 47  
Printing Preferences 48  
Advanced Options Dialog Box Settings 49  
Output Setting Tab Settings 53  
Configuring the PCL Print Driver on Windows 2000/XP 55  
Print Driver Properties 55  
Configuration Tab Settings 56  
Printer Tab Settings 58  
Printing Defaults 59  
Installing PostScript Print Driver 62  
Setting the Print Driver Properties on Macintosh 64  
Configure Settings 64  
Printer Specific Options Settings 65  
Differences From Copying 69  
Prior to Printing 70  
Printing Procedure 70  
Setting Printing Features 72  
Switching Printer Off-line 73  
iv  
Cancel Print from the Workstation 74  
Canceling a Print Job Using Internet Services 74  
Canceling a Print Job From the Printer 74  
Canceling a Print Job in Process 75  
Canceling a Print Job During Print 75  
Canceling Jobs Stored in the Printer 76  
Printing with Black 77  
Print Mode 78  
Image Adjustment Mode 78  
Black & High Speed 79  
Black & Standard 80  
Black & High Quality 81  
Printing with Auto 82  
Print Mode 83  
Image Adjustment Mode 84  
Image Auto Correction 86  
Auto & High Speed 87  
Auto & Standard 88  
Auto & High Quality 89  
Printing with Auto 90  
Adjusting Image Settings (Brightness/Chroma/Contrast) 92  
Adjusting Color Balance 94  
Adjusting Profile Settings 95  
Adjusting Detailed Settings 98  
Options for the Text Group 98  
Options for the Graphic Group 99  
Options for the Photo Group 100  
Options for the Whole Document 101  
Setting Secure Print Jobs 103  
Printing Secure Print Jobs 104  
At the Workstation 104  
At the Printer 105  
v
TABLE OF CONTENTS  
Setting Delayed Print Jobs 106  
Printing Delayed Print Jobs 107  
At the Workstation 107  
At the Printer 107  
Setting Sample Print Jobs 108  
Printing Sample Print Jobs 109  
At the Workstation 109  
Introduction 110  
Screen Structure 111  
System Structure 112  
Netscape Communicator 113  
Internet Explorer 114  
Proxy Server Setting 115  
Port Number Setting 115  
Accessing Internet Services from the Workstation 116  
Internet Services Features 117  
Printing Documents 119  
Viewing the Active Jobs List 120  
Deleting Jobs 121  
vi  
2. User Guide (Print)  
Overview  
This chapter describes how to install print drivers for basic and  
special printing using the Xerox WorkCentre M24, which is also  
referred to as the WorkCentre 24. It also explains the use of  
Internet Services, printing features and all the necessary steps for  
printing.  
Print Drivers  
The print drivers for this machine are multi-environment drivers  
designed to enable printing from the workstation to a WorkCentre  
24 on the network. The print drivers contain a variety of feature  
options which enable you to customize your print jobs. The  
WorkCentre 24 supports PCL 6/5e Version 4.1. Adobe PostScript  
3 version 3011.106 is optional.  
Print drivers for this machine are included on the CD-ROM that  
came with your printer. Print drivers are installed on the user  
workstation to enable fast, efficient printing from your connected  
workstation.  
Print driver installation procedures are provided for the following  
workstation environments:  
Windows 95, 98, and Windows Me  
Windows NT 4.0  
Windows 2000 and Windows XP  
Macintosh  
Basic Printing  
This section explains how to perform basic printing tasks.  
Special Printing  
The Special Printing section explains how to program special  
printing such as printing with special papers, and adjusting colors.  
Internet Services  
When the machine is in TCP/IP environment, Internet Services  
allows the user to change or check printer settings via a web  
browser.  
12  
2–1  
   
USER GUIDE (PRINT)  
Printer Environments  
This machine can be set up in many different environments.  
When connected to a computer directly, it can be used as  
a local printer.  
When connected to a network, it can be used as a network  
printer.  
This section explains the different printer environments that can  
be set up for this machine.  
For details on how to connect this machine to a network, refer to  
the System Administrator’s Guide.  
As a Local Printer  
Using parallel interface connects this machine directly to a  
computer.  
CAUTION: Use only parallel interface cable provided by our  
company. Using a parallel interface cable from another source  
may lead to electric wave obstruction.  
2–2  
     
USER GUIDE (PRINT)  
As a Network Printer  
Windows Network (SMB)  
Server Message Block (SMB) is a protocol for sharing files or a  
printer on Windows 95, Windows 98, Windows Me, Windows NT  
4.0, Windows 2000, and Windows XP. Using SMB, print data or  
settings can be sent directly to a printer on the same network  
(Ethernet interface) without going through a server.  
For details on how to connect this machine to a Windows network  
using SMB, refer to the System’s Administrator’s Guide.  
TCP/IP (LPD)  
This machine supports TCP/IP (LPD). The different connections  
are briefly explained below.  
For details on how to connect this machine to a Windows  
computer using TCP/IP, refer to the System’s Administrator’s  
Guide.  
Windows 95/98/Me  
Using our TCP/IP Direct Print Utility, print data can be sent directly  
to a printer on the same network (Ethernet interface) without going  
through a server. TCP/IP Direct Print Utility is installed together  
with the print driver.  
Windows NT 4.0/2000/XP  
Using the LPR port for the operating system, print data can be  
sent directly for printing.  
Once the printer registered on a Windows NT 4.0, Windows 2000,  
or Windows XP computer is shared, you can also send data from  
Windows 95, Windows 98, Windows Me to the shared printer for  
printing.  
Internet Printing  
This machine supports Internet Printing Protocol (IPP). Using IPP,  
you can print to a remote printer through the internet or intranet.  
For details on how to set-up Internet printing from a Windows  
2000, Windows XP, or Windows Me through Internet Printing  
Protocol, refer to the System Administrator’s Guide.  
2–3  
     
USER GUIDE (PRINT)  
NetWare  
This machine can be used as a network operating system in an  
environment using Novell NetWare.  
For details on how to connect this machine to a Novell NetWare-  
network, refer to the System Administrator’s Guide.  
EtherTalk (optional)  
This machine supports EtherTalk protocol, and enables you to  
print from Macintosh.  
For details on how to connect this machine to EtherTalk, refer to  
the System Administrator’s Guide.  
2–4  
USER GUIDE (PRINT)  
A. Installing the Print Drivers  
Overview  
This section details the procedures for installing PostScript 3  
Version 3011.106, and PCL 6/5 Version 4.1, print drivers onto a  
workstation and setting the print driver properties for the following  
operating systems.  
Windows 95, Windows 98, or Windows Me  
Windows NT 4.0  
Windows 2000 and Windows XP  
Macintosh  
2–5  
     
USER GUIDE (PRINT)  
Windows 95/98/Me  
Installing PostScript or PCL Print Driver  
Prior to installing the AdobePS 4.4.X or PCL 6/5e Version 4.1 print  
driver perform the following.  
Obtain the Print Driver for your workstation's operating  
system. Drivers are available on a CD-ROM that came  
with your Printer. They are also typically available for  
downloading in self-extracting Zip file format from the  
internet at www.xerox.com.  
Obtain the printer’s IP Address by printing a System  
Settings List or contacting your System Administrator.  
Check that the machine is physically connected to the  
network or to your computer.  
For detailed instructions on how to connect the machine to a  
network, refer to the System Administrator’s Guide.  
1
2
From the Start menu on the Windows desktop, select Settings,  
and then Printers.  
In the Printers window, double click Add Printer. The Add Printer  
Wizard screen is displayed.  
3
4
Select Next. The Local or Network Printer screen is displayed.  
Select how the printer is connected to your computer and then  
select Next.  
Select My Computer or Local Printer if the Printer is  
directly cabled to your desktop or you are printing through  
a Spooler Utility (Windows 95/98/Me).  
Select Network Printer if you will be printing through a  
print queue or a network server.  
NOTE: If you select Network printer, specify the path to the printer  
in the Network path or queue name.  
2–6  
     
USER GUIDE (PRINT)  
5
6
Insert the CD-ROM in the CD-ROM drive.  
When the Manufacturers and Printers window displays, select  
Have Disk…. The Install From Disk screen is displayed.  
7
Enter the path for your driver files in the “Copy manufacturer’s files  
from:” box.  
NOTE: You can also use the Browse button to specify a folder on  
the CD-ROM.  
8
9
Select OK on the Install From Disk or Open screen.  
Select your printer model from the Printers list and select Next.  
10 Select the port that you are using from the Available ports list, then  
select Next.  
11 When prompted, accept the default printer name, or give your  
printer a more descriptive name.  
12 Select either Yes or No to make this printer your default Windows  
printer. Choose Yes if you will be printing primarily to this printer  
from your Windows applications. Select Next.  
13 Print a Test Page.  
14 Verify that the test page prints at the printer, then select Finish.  
15 Read the End User License Agreement and select Accept.  
16 Confirm that the printer has been added in the Printers window.  
17 Continue to the next page in order to configure the print driver to  
complete the installation.  
2–7  
USER GUIDE (PRINT)  
Configuring the PostScript Print Driver on Windows 95/98/Me  
This section describes printer specific settings included in the print  
driver properties.  
Configuration Tab  
Options Tab  
Output Settings Tab  
Color Settings Tab  
To view the print driver properties, select the printer icon in the  
Printers window, then select the Properties command on the File  
menu.  
2–8  
   
USER GUIDE (PRINT)  
Configuration Tab Settings  
This section describes the settings of the Configuration tab.  
1
Select the function that you want to set in Features List.  
The settings that can be selected vary depending on which  
options have been installed. Make these settings after  
confirming that option settings are complete.  
2
3
Change the settings in the “Change Setting For” box area.  
You can restore defaults by selecting the Restore  
Defaults button.  
When all setting changes are completed, select OK.  
Feature Settings  
Image Enhancement  
Specify whether to use the Image Enhancement function.  
Selecting On, smooths out the boundaries between black and  
white when printing. This reduces jagged edges, thereby  
artificially increasing the resolution of the image. When printing an  
image (bitmap) composed of coarse halftone dots, smooth color  
gradation is impossible in certain situations. In this case, select  
Off.  
NOTE: The Image Enhancement feature is available only when  
Print Mode is set to High Speed.  
Draft Mode  
Specify whether to reduce the amount of toner used when printing  
drafts. When you select On, the overall printed color becomes  
lighter. This is best for printing documents when print quality is not  
necessary.  
2–9  
 
USER GUIDE (PRINT)  
Transparency Separators  
Specify whether to use transparency separators and the source of  
the separators.  
Select Auto for the paper source to automatically feed from the  
paper tray with paper of the same size and in the same orientation  
as the transparencies.  
NOTE: When using Transparency Separators, be sure to load  
paper of the same size and in the same orientation as  
transparencies into the paper tray.  
NOTE: The Transparency Separators function cannot be used in  
the following situations:  
When anything other than Manual feed is selected for  
Paper source in the Paper tab.  
When anything other than Transparency is selected for  
Paper type in the Paper tab.  
When anything other than Center Output Tray is selected  
for Output bin in the Paper tab.  
When the Duplex feature is selected in the Paper tab.  
Stapling  
Specify whether to staple printed documents as well as the  
position of the staple.  
NOTE: You can staple 2 to 50 sheets.  
NOTE: You cannot use staples in the following situations:  
When anything other than Finisher Tray is selected for  
Output bin in the Paper tab.  
When Job Offset is selected.  
Job Offset  
Collated  
Shifting the output positions of adjacent jobs (print command) or  
copies (sets) is called Job Offset. The positions of adjacent jobs or  
sets of copies are shifted to either sides of the output tray.  
Select whether to collate a multi-page file per set when they are  
printed.  
Custom Paper Image  
Rotation  
Select whether to correct the paper orientation when printing on  
custom paper. When printing on custom paper, select On to  
correct the orientation rotated at 90 degrees.  
Bypass Feed Orientation  
Specify the paper orientation when printing from the bypass tray.  
When you set the short side of the paper in the bypass tray feed  
direction, select Landscape. When you set the long side of the  
paper in the bypass tray, select Portrait.  
2–10  
USER GUIDE (PRINT)  
Substitute Tray  
Specify what action to take when the paper size called for is not  
loaded in the machine.  
Use Printer Settings: The settings can be confirmed on the  
printer control panel.  
Display message: Display paper supply messages on the printer  
control panel. Printer will be unavailable until paper is supplied.  
Use Nearest Size (With Zoom): Select the nearest paper size.  
Automatically reduces or enlarges images for printing, as  
necessary.  
Use Nearest Size (No Zoom): Select the nearest paper size  
available and prints in equal size.  
Use Larger Size (With Zoom): Print in equal size on paper larger  
than the original. Automatically reduces images for printing, as  
necessary.  
Use Larger Size (No Zoom): Print on paper larger than the  
original.  
Available Printer Memory  
Available Font Cache  
Enter the amount of usable printer memory (in KB) in the Edit box.  
Normally, it is not necessary to change this setting.  
Enter the amount of memory available for the font cache (in KB) in  
the Edit box. Normally, it is not necessary to change this setting.  
2–11  
USER GUIDE (PRINT)  
Specify Job Owner  
The following selections are available:  
Use Login Name: Use your Windows Login Name as the Job  
Owner Name. The Job Owner Name becomes the “Login User  
Name\Host Name”.  
Enter Owner name: Select this if you want to specify a custom  
Job Owner Name, which is used for all the printer icons.  
NOTE: You can enter up to 31 alphanumeric characters for the  
Login Name and the Owner Name. If you enter more than 31  
characters for either name, only the first 31 characters are used.  
Password: Enter the password for the Job Owner Name. The  
password can consist of 4 to 12 digits. Each digit entered displays  
as an asterisk (*).  
Job Type User ID  
Enter the User ID for the Job Type, which includes Secure Print,  
Sample Print, and Delayed Print.  
Job Type User ID: Enter the User ID for the Job Type. The User  
ID can contain a maximum of 24 alphanumeric characters.  
Password: Enter the password for the Job Type. You can enter up  
to 4 digits. Each digit entered displays as an asterisk (*).  
Options Tab Settings  
This section describes the settings of the Options tab.  
1
2
Select the settings that you want to set in Hardware Options.  
Change the settings in the “Change Settings For” box area.  
You can restore defaults by selecting the Restore  
Defaults button.  
3
When all setting changes are completed, select OK.  
2–12  
 
USER GUIDE (PRINT)  
Settings  
Output Tray  
Specify whether Finisher is installed and the type.  
Paper Detect by Tray  
Specify either Statement Paper Detection, or A5 Paper Detection.  
Output Settings Tab Settings  
This section describes the settings in the Output Settings tab.  
You can restore defaults by selecting the Restore  
Defaults button.  
Output Paper  
Output Size  
Select the size of the paper used for output. The output is  
automatically enlarged or reduced, depending on the paper size  
selected in the Output Size and the paper size selected in the  
Paper tab.  
Example: When you select 8 1/2 x 11 inches in Paper size  
in the Paper tab and 11 x 17 inches is selected in the  
Output Size, the output is automatically enlarged and  
printed.  
When None is selected the job is printed based on the paper size  
selected in the application.  
2–13  
 
USER GUIDE (PRINT)  
Job Type  
Job Type  
You can specify the print function from among Secure Print,  
Sample Print, and Delayed Print.  
Secure Print: A function that temporarily stores print jobs in the  
printer, and prints the job when instructed from the printer control  
panel.  
If you want to output secure prints, set the User ID and  
password for Print Type in the Configuration tab.  
Sample Print: A function that outputs only 1 set when multiple  
sets are specified. If the job is as specified, the remaining sets are  
printed.  
Delayed Print: A function that temporarily stores print jobs in the  
printer, and prints them at a scheduled time.  
Normal Print  
Select when you do not want to output secure prints, sample  
prints, or delayed prints.  
Secure Print  
Sample Print  
Select when you want to output secure prints.  
Select when you want to output sample prints.  
NOTE: The Collated setting must be selected in the Page Setup  
tab when using Job Type.  
Delayed Print  
User ID  
Select when you want to output delayed prints.  
Displays the User ID for Job Type. The User ID displayed is the  
User ID specified on the Configuration tab. This option can only be  
selected when the setting on the Configuration tab has been  
completed. This is a display-only item and cannot be changed in  
User ID.  
Password  
Displays the Job Type password specified in the Configuration  
tab. Each digit entered is displayed as an asterisk (*). This option  
can only be selected when the setting on the Configuration tab  
has been completed. This is a display-only item and cannot be  
changed in Password.  
Retrieve Document Name  
Document Name  
Select the method of specifying the document name. If you have  
selected Auto Retrieve, the valid document name can be up to 24  
alphanumeric characters.  
When “Enter Document Name” is selected in the Stored  
Document Name list, you can specify a document name with a  
maximum of 24 alphanumeric characters.  
2–14  
USER GUIDE (PRINT)  
Start Print Time  
Set the time that you want Delayed Print to be carried out. Place  
the cursor in the hour or minute box and press the up or down  
triangle to specify the starting time. You can also set the time by  
entering the time directly into the boxes.  
The default setting is 00:00  
Color Settings Tab Settings  
Settings  
Output Color  
Specify whether to print in color or black.  
Print Mode  
Specify whether to give priority to the print speed or the image  
quality. The printer/copier is capable of printing at three different  
resolutions:  
High Speed: 600 x 600  
Standard: 1200 x 600  
High Quality: 1200 x 1200  
To change resolution settings, use the Print Mode selections.  
NOTE: The Image Enhancement feature is not available when  
Standard or High Quality is selected.  
RGB Color Correction  
Specify the coloration of the RGB Color Correction.  
Normal: This setting is optimized for printing documents that  
contain text and graphics, such as business documents.  
Photo: This setting is optimized for printing photos or images with  
gradations. Select this setting when printing images in RBG.  
Web Pages: This setting is optimized for printing web pages.  
Presentation: This setting is optimized for printing the color  
documents vividly, such as presentation documents.  
Screen  
You can adjust the image quality. Select Gradation to print photos  
and gradations clearly. Select Fineness to print the colors in  
illustrations, tables, or graphs evenly.  
RBG Gamma Correction  
Gray Guaranteed  
Specify the brightness of the documents. The higher the value, the  
darker the print becomes.  
Select On to print grays and black within documents in black toner  
only. This prevents neutral grays from exhibiting any kind of color  
shading or misregistration. This feature does not apply to images  
of the documents.  
NOTE: For documents containing sweeps/gradients that include  
gray, it may be preferable to set this feature to Off.  
2–15  
 
USER GUIDE (PRINT)  
Configuring the PCL Print Driver on Windows 95/98/Me  
This section describes the following printer specific settings  
included in the PCL 6/5e Version 4.1 Print Driver Properties and  
Printing Preferences.  
Print Driver Properties  
Configuration Tab > Print Features  
Printer Tab  
Document Default Properties  
Watermarks  
Fonts  
User Settings  
Color Management  
Paper Output  
Output Options  
Graphics  
Print Driver Properties  
Configuration Tab  
Printer Tab  
To view the Configuration or Printer tabs, select the printer icon in  
the printers window, then select Properties on the File menu.  
2–16  
     
USER GUIDE (PRINT)  
Configuration Tab Settings  
This describes Print Features in the Configuration tab.  
NOTE: In order to print correctly, it is necessary to make  
appropriate settings in this tab.  
1
Select the printer icon in the Printers window, then select  
Properties from the File menu.  
2
3
4
Select the Configuration tab.  
Select the items in Print Features that you want to set.  
Change the settings in the list box that is displayed below the Print  
Features list.  
5
When all setting changes are completed, select OK.  
2–17  
 
USER GUIDE (PRINT)  
Print Features  
Print Page Mode  
Set Print Page Mode to On to enhance printer performance with  
large complex jobs.  
Specify Job Owner  
Use this feature to specify a job owner.  
Use Login Name: Use your Windows Login Name as the Job  
Owner Name. The Job Owner Name becomes the “Login User  
Name\Host Name”.  
Enter Owner Name (For Administrator): Select this if you want  
to specify a custom Job Owner Name, which is used for all the  
printer icons.  
Enter Owner Name (For User): Select this if you want to specify  
a custom Job Owner Name for each Windows Login user.  
NOTE: You can enter up to 31 alphanumeric characters for the  
Login Name and the Owner Name. If you enter more than 31  
characters for either name, only the first 31 characters are used.  
Password: Enter the password for the Job Owner Name. The  
password can consist of 4 to 12 digits. Each digit entered displays  
as an asterisk (*).  
Bypass Feed Orientation  
Substitute Tray  
Specify the paper orientation when printing from the bypass tray.  
When you set the short side of the paper in the bypass tray feed  
direction, select Landscape setting. When you set the long side of  
the paper in the bypass tray, select Portrait setting.  
Specify what action to take when the paper size called for is not  
loaded in the machine.  
Use Printer Settings: The settings can be confirmed on the  
printer control panel.  
Display message: Displays paper supply messages on the  
printer control panel. Printer will be unavailable until paper is  
supplied.  
Use Nearest Size (With Zoom): Selects the nearest paper size.  
Automatically reduces or enlarges images for printing, as  
necessary.  
Use Nearest Size (No Zoom): Selects the nearest paper size  
available and prints in equal size.  
2–18  
USER GUIDE (PRINT)  
Printer Tab Settings  
This describes the available Printer tab settings.  
NOTE: In order to print correctly, it is necessary to make  
appropriate settings in this tab.  
1
Select the printer icon in the Printers window, then select  
Properties from the File menu.  
2
3
Select the Printer tab.  
Select the Auto Configuration button or select the items  
manually in Change Setting For: that you want to set.  
4
When all setting changes are completed, select OK.  
Finisher  
An optional output tray with stapling function that can be added to  
the side of the printer.  
A5 & Statement Paper  
Detection  
Optional output functions to enable Trays 1 - 4 to detect certain  
paper sizes.  
2–19  
 
USER GUIDE (PRINT)  
Document Default Properties  
This describes the document default properties available in the  
Properties dialog box.  
NOTE: In order to print correctly, it is necessary to make  
appropriate settings in this tab.  
2–20  
 
USER GUIDE (PRINT)  
1
2
Select the printer icon in the Printers window, then select  
Properties from the File menu.  
Select the appropriate tab to view or change the document default  
properties for all users of the selected printer. Select your changes  
on the following tabs:  
Color Management  
Paper/Output  
Output Options  
Graphics  
Watermarks  
Fonts  
User Settings  
3
When all setting changes are completed, select OK.  
Specify your printing options from the following:  
For more information, refer to the B. Basic Printing section in this  
chapter.  
Color Management  
Paper/Output Tab  
Allows you to associate color profile (s) with your color printer.  
Selections include Job Type, Copies, Paper Size, Output Size,  
Image Orientation, Mixed Orientation, Multiple Up, Output Color, 2  
Sided Print, Output Destination, Paper Source, Paper Type  
(Bypass Tray), or select Printer Status, Poster/Booklet, Print Area,  
or Restore Defaults buttons.  
2–21  
USER GUIDE (PRINT)  
Output Options Tab  
Select from Front Cover, Feed Cover from, Transparency  
Separators, Job Offset, Stapling, or select Margin Shift Restore  
Defaults buttons.  
Graphic Tabs  
Specify how you want to manipulate graphic images for your print  
job. Select from the following options: Output Color, Print Mode,  
Image Adjustment Mode, Image Types, Image Auto Correction, or  
select the Image Settings, Color Balance, Profile Settings,  
Detailed Settings, or Restore Defaults buttons.  
For more information on how to set graphic options refer to section  
C.) Special Printing in the User Guide (Print).  
Watermarks Tab  
Specify watermark settings. Selections for watermarks include  
First Page Only or In Background, Encircle, Text, Position, Angle,  
or select the Restore Defaults button.  
Fonts Tab  
Use the TrueType Font control to select how TrueType Fonts will  
be processed and printed.  
User Settings Tab  
The User Settings tab dialog provides options for you to save  
frequently used print driver settings and then recall these settings  
without having to configure again.  
2–22  
USER GUIDE (PRINT)  
Windows NT 4.0  
Installing PostScript or PCL Print Driver  
Prior to installing the AdobePS 4.4.X or PCL 6/5e Version 4.1 print  
driver perform the following.  
Obtain the Print Driver for your client's operating system.  
Print drivers are available on a CD-ROM that came with  
your machine. They are also typically available for  
downloading in self-extracting Zip file format from the  
internet at www.xerox.com.  
Obtain the printer’s IP Address by printing a System  
Settings List or contacting your System Administrator.  
Check that the machine is physically connected to the  
network or to your computer.  
For detailed instructions on how to connect the machine to a  
network, refer to the System Administrator’s Guide.  
1
2
3
4
From the Start menu on the Windows desktop, select Settings,  
and then Printers.  
In the Printers window, double click Add Printer. The Add Printer  
Wizard screen is displayed.  
Verify that My Computer is selected, then select Next. The  
Available ports screen is displayed.  
Perform one of the following steps:  
Select an existing available port and continue to step 8.  
Select Add Port....  
5
Select LPR Port from the Available Printer Ports list, and then  
select New Port.... The Add LPR compatible printer screen is  
displayed.  
2–23  
     
USER GUIDE (PRINT)  
6
7
In the LPR Compatible Printer screen enter the following  
information:  
Type in the IP address of the Printer for the “Name or  
address of server providing lpd.”  
Type in the case-sensitive name of your Printer, or enter  
the word raw for “Name of printer or print queue on that  
server.”  
Select OK.  
On the Print Ports screen, select Close.  
The Wizard will return you to the previous dialog box.  
Verify the new IP address you entered is in the list and  
correct.  
NOTE: In the next step the port check box to the left of the  
address must be checked prior to selecting Next.  
8
9
Verify that the port check box is checked, then select Next. The  
Manufacturers and Printers lists are displayed.  
Insert the CD-ROM in the CD-ROM drive.  
10 Select Have Disk… The Install From Disk screen is displayed.  
11 Enter the path for your driver files in the “Copy manufacturer’s files  
from:” box.  
NOTE: You can also use the Browse button to specify a folder in  
the CD-ROM.  
12 Select the .INF file, then select Open.  
13 When the Install From Disk screen is displayed, verify that the  
path and file name are correct and select OK.  
14 Select your printer model from the Printers list, and select Next.  
2–24  
USER GUIDE (PRINT)  
15 When prompted, accept the default printer name, or give your  
printer a more descriptive name, then select Yes or No for making  
this your Windows default printer.  
16 Select Next.  
17 Select Not shared and select Next.  
18 Select Yes to print a test page, then select Finish.  
19 Read the End User License Agreement and select Accept.  
20 Verify that the test page prints at the printer, then select Yes.  
21 Confirm that the printer has been added in the Printers window.  
22 Continue to the next page in order to configure the print driver to  
complete the installation.  
2–25  
USER GUIDE (PRINT)  
Configuring PostScript Print Driver on Windows NT 4.0  
This section describes the following Adobe PostScript printer  
specific settings included in the AdobePS 4.4.X print driver  
properties and document defaults.  
Print Driver Properties  
Installation Options in the Device Settings Tab  
Configuration Tab  
To view the Device Settings or Configuration tabs, select the  
printer icon in the Printers window, then select Properties from  
the File menu.  
2–26  
     
USER GUIDE (PRINT)  
Installable Options Settings  
This section describes Installable Options in the Device Settings  
tab.  
NOTE: In order to print correctly, it is necessary to make  
appropriate settings in this tab.  
1
2
3
Select the items you want to set in Installable Options on the  
Device Settings tab.  
Change the settings in the Change Setting box located at the  
bottom of the tab.  
When all setting changes are completed, select OK.  
Settings  
Output Tray  
Specify whether Finisher is installed and the type.  
Paper Detect by Tray  
Specify either Statement Paper Detection, or A5 Paper Detection.  
2–27  
 
USER GUIDE (PRINT)  
Configuration Tab Settings  
This section describes the settings of the Configuration tab.  
Specify Job Owner  
Use Login Name  
Use your Windows Login Name as the Job Owner Name. The Job  
Owner Name becomes the “Login User Name\Host Name”.  
Enter Owner Name (For  
Administrator)  
Select this if you want to specify a custom Job Owner Name,  
which is used for all the printer icons.  
Enter Owner Name (For  
User)  
Select this if you want to specify a custom Job Owner Name for  
each Windows Login user.  
NOTE: You can enter up to 31 alphanumeric characters for the  
Login Name and the Owner Name. If you enter more than 31  
characters for either name, only the first 31 characters are used.  
Password  
Enter the password for the Job Owner Name. The password can  
consist of 4 to 12 digits. Each digit entered displays as an asterisk  
(*).  
Job Type User Setting  
Enter the User ID and password for the Job Type, which includes  
Secure Print, Sample Print, and Delayed Print.  
User ID  
Enter the User ID for Print Type. The User ID can contain up to a  
maximum of 24 alphanumeric characters.  
Password  
Enter the password for the Job Type. You can enter up to 4 digits.  
Each digit entered displays as an asterisk (*).  
2–28  
 
USER GUIDE (PRINT)  
Print Driver Document Defaults  
Printer Specific Sections in the Printer Features of the  
Advanced Tab  
Output Settings Tab  
To view the Advanced or Output Settings tabs, select the printer  
icon in the Printers window, then select Document Defaults on  
the File menu.  
2–29  
 
USER GUIDE (PRINT)  
Advanced Tab Settings  
This section describes the settings of Printer Features in the  
Advanced tab.  
NOTE: The settings that can be selected vary depending on which  
options have been installed.  
1
2
3
Select the items in Printer Features under Document Options  
located in the on the Advanced tab that you want to set.  
Change the settings in the Change Setting box located at the  
bottom of the tab.  
When all setting changes are completed, select OK.  
2–30  
 
USER GUIDE (PRINT)  
Printer Features Settings  
Output Tray  
Set the destination for the output.  
The items that can be selected vary according to whether  
the Center Tray or Finisher has been installed.  
Job Offset  
Shifting the output positions of adjacent jobs (print command) or  
copies (sets) is called Job Offset. The positions of adjacent jobs or  
sets of copies are shifted to either sides of the output tray.  
Transparency Separators  
Specify whether to use transparency separators and the source of  
the separators.  
Select Auto for three paper source to automatically feed from the  
paper tray with paper of the same size and in the same orientation  
as the transparencies.  
NOTE: When using Transparency Separators, be sure to load  
paper of the same size and in the same orientation as  
transparencies into the paper tray.  
NOTE: The Transparency Separators function cannot be used in  
the following situations:  
When anything other than Manual feed is selected for  
Paper source in the Paper tab.  
When anything other than Transparency is selected for  
Media type in the Advanced tab.  
When anything other than Center Output Tray is selected  
for Output Destination of Printers Features in the  
Advanced tab.  
Bypass Feed Orientation  
Print Mode  
Specify the paper orientation when printing from the bypass tray.  
When you set the short side of the paper in the bypass tray feed  
direction, select Landscape. When you set the long side of the  
paper in the bypass tray, select Portrait.  
Specify whether to give priority to the print speed or the image  
quality. The printer/copier is capable of printing at three different  
resolutions:  
High Speed: 600 x 600  
Standard: 1200 x 600  
High Quality: 1200 x 1200  
To change resolution settings, use the Print Mode selections.  
NOTE: The Image Enhancement feature is not available when  
Standard or High Quality is selected.  
2–31  
USER GUIDE (PRINT)  
Output Color  
Specify whether to print in color or black.  
RBG Color Correction  
Specify the coloration of the RBG Color Correction.  
Normal: This setting is optimized for printing documents that  
contain text and graphics, such as business documents.  
Photo: This setting is optimized for printing photos or images with  
gradations. Select this setting when printing images in RBG.  
Web Pages: This setting is optimized for printing web pages.  
Presentation: This setting is optimized for printing the color  
documents vividly, such as presentation documents.  
RBG Gamma Correction  
Screen  
Specify the brightness of the documents. The higher the value, the  
darker the print becomes.  
You can adjust the image quality. Select Gradation to print photos  
and gradations clearly. Select Fineness to print the colors in  
illustrations, tables, or graphs evenly.  
Image Enhancement  
Specify whether to use Image Enhancement.  
Selecting On, smooths out the boundaries between black and  
white when printing. This reduces jagged edges, thereby  
artificially increasing the resolution of the image. When printing an  
image (bitmap) composed of coarse halftone dots, smooth color  
gradation is impossible in certain situations. In this case, select  
Off.  
NOTE: The Image Enhancement feature is available only when  
Print Mode is set to High Speed.  
Draft Mode  
Specify whether to reduce the amount of toner used when printing  
drafts. When you select On, the overall printed color becomes  
lighter. This is best for printing documents when print quality is not  
necessary.  
Gray Guaranteed  
Select On to print grays and black within documents in black toner  
only. This prevents neutral grays from exhibiting any kind of color  
shading or misregistration. This feature does not apply to images  
of the documents.  
NOTE: For documents containing sweeps/gradients that include  
gray, it may be preferable to set this feature to Off.  
2–32  
USER GUIDE (PRINT)  
Stapling  
Select whether to staple printed documents as well as the position  
of the staple.  
You can staple 2 to 50 sheets.  
You can only staple when Finisher Tray is selected for  
Output Destination in the Advanced tab.  
You cannot use staples when Job Offset is selected.  
Custom Page Image  
Rotation  
Select whether to correct the paper orientation when printing on  
custom paper. When printing on custom paper, select On to  
correct the orientation rotated at 90 degrees.  
Substitute Tray  
Specify what action to take when the paper size called for is not  
loaded in the machine.  
Use Printer Settings: The settings can be confirmed on the  
printer control panel.  
Display message: Display paper supply messages on the printer  
control panel. Printer will be unavailable until paper is supplied.  
Use Nearest Size (With Zoom): Select the nearest paper size.  
Automatically reduces or enlarges images for printing, as  
necessary.  
Use Nearest Size (No Zoom): Select the nearest paper size  
available and prints in equal size.  
Use Larger Size (With Zoom): Print in equal size on paper larger  
than the original. Automatically reduces images for printing, as  
necessary.  
Use Larger Size (No Zoom): Print on paper larger than the  
original.  
2–33  
USER GUIDE (PRINT)  
Output Settings Tab Settings  
This section describes the settings in the Output Settings tab.  
Job Type  
Job Type  
You can specify the print function from among Secure Print,  
Sample Print, and Delayed Print.  
Secure Print: A function that temporarily stores print jobs in the  
printer, and prints the job when instructed from the printer control  
panel.  
If you want to output secure prints, set the User ID and  
password for Print Type in the Configuration tab.  
Sample Print: A function that outputs only 1 set when multiple  
sets are specified. If the job is as specified, the remaining sets are  
printed.  
Delayed Print: A function that temporarily stores print jobs in the  
printer, and prints them at a scheduled time.  
Normal Print  
Select when you do not want to output secure prints, sample  
prints, or delayed prints.  
Secure Print  
Sample Print  
Select when you want to output secure prints.  
Select when you want to output sample prints.  
NOTE: The Collated setting must be selected in the Page Setup  
tab when using Job Type.  
Delayed Print  
User ID  
Select when you want to output delayed prints.  
Displays the User ID for Job Type. The User ID displayed is the  
User ID specified on the Configuration tab. This option can only be  
selected when the setting on the Configuration tab has been  
completed. This is a display-only item and cannot be changed in  
User ID.  
2–34  
 
USER GUIDE (PRINT)  
Password  
Displays the Job Type password specified in the Configuration  
tab. Each digit entered is displayed as an asterisk (*). This option  
can only be selected when the setting on the Configuration tab  
has been completed. This is a display-only item and cannot be  
changed in Password.  
Retrieve Document Name  
Document Name  
Select the method of specifying the document name. If you have  
selected Auto Retrieve, the valid document name can be up to 24  
alphanumeric characters.  
When Enter Document Name is selected in the Stored Document  
Name list, you can specify a document name with a maximum of  
24 alphanumeric characters.  
Start Print Time  
Set the time that you want Delayed Print to be carried out. Place  
the cursor in the hour or minute box and press the up or down  
triangle to specify the starting time. You can also set the time by  
entering the time directly into the boxes.  
The default setting is 00:00  
2–35  
USER GUIDE (PRINT)  
Configuring the PCL Print Driver on Windows NT 4.0  
This section describes the following printer specific settings  
included in the PCL 6/5e Version 4.1 Print Driver Properties and  
Printing Preferences.  
Print Driver Properties  
Configuration Tab > Print Features  
Printer Tab  
Document Defaults  
Print Driver Properties  
Configuration Tab  
Printer Tab  
To view the Configuration or Printer tabs, select the printer icon in  
the Printers window, then select Properties on the File menu.  
2–36  
     
USER GUIDE (PRINT)  
Configuration Tab Settings  
This describes Print Features in the Configuration tab.  
NOTE: In order to print correctly, it is necessary to make  
appropriate settings in this tab.  
1
Select the printer icon in the Printers window, then select  
Properties from the File menu.  
2
3
4
Select the Configuration tab.  
Select the items in Print Features that you want to set.  
Change the settings in the list box that is displayed below the Print  
Features list.  
5
When all setting changes are completed, select OK.  
2–37  
 
USER GUIDE (PRINT)  
Print Features  
EMF Spooling  
Select On to specify the spool format of the print data in the hard  
drive as RAW format. As it takes time to convert print data, the  
processing time is extended.  
Print Page Mode  
Select Print Page Mode to On to enhance printer performance  
with large complex jobs.  
Specify Job Owner  
Use this feature to specify a job owner.  
Use Login Name: Use your Windows Login Name as the Job  
Owner Name. The Job Owner Name becomes the “Login User  
Name\Host Name”.  
Enter Owner Name (For Administrator): Select this if you want  
to specify a custom Job Owner Name, which is used for all the  
printer icons.  
Enter Owner Name (For User): Select this if you want to specify  
a custom Job Owner Name for each Windows Login user.  
NOTE: You can enter up to 31 alphanumeric characters for the  
Login Name and the Owner Name. If you enter more than 31  
characters for either name, only the first 31 characters are used.  
Password: Enter the password for the Job Owner Name. The  
password can consist of 4 to 12 digits. Each digit entered displays  
as an asterisk (*).  
Bypass Feed Orientation  
Substitute Tray  
Specify the paper orientation when printing from the bypass tray.  
When you set the short side of the paper in the bypass tray feed  
direction, select Landscape. When you set the long side of the  
paper in the bypass tray, select Portrait.  
Specify what action to take when the paper size called for is not  
loaded in the machine.  
Use Printer Settings: The settings can be confirmed on the  
printer control panel.  
Display message: Display paper supply messages on the printer  
control panel. Printer will be unavailable until paper is supplied.  
Use Nearest Size (With Zoom): Select the nearest paper size.  
Automatically reduces or enlarges images for printing, as  
necessary.  
Use Nearest Size (No Zoom): Select the nearest paper size  
available and prints in equal size.  
2–38  
USER GUIDE (PRINT)  
Printer Tab Settings  
This describes Printer tab.  
NOTE: In order to print correctly, it is necessary to make  
appropriate settings in this tab.  
1
Select the printer icon in the Printers window, then select  
Properties from the File menu.  
2
3
Select the Printer tab.  
Select the Auto Configuration button or select the items  
manually in Change Setting For: that you want to set.  
4
When all setting changes are completed, select OK.  
Finisher  
An optional output tray with stapling function that can be added to  
the side of the printer.  
A5 & Statement Paper  
Detection  
Optional output functions to enable Trays 1 - 4 to detect certain  
paper sizes.  
2–39  
 
USER GUIDE (PRINT)  
Document Defaults  
This describes the Document Defaults.  
NOTE: In order to print correctly, it is necessary to make  
appropriate settings in this tab.  
2–40  
 
USER GUIDE (PRINT)  
1
2
Select the printer icon in the Printers window, then select  
Document Defaults from the File menu.  
Select your changes on the following tabs:  
Paper/Output  
Output Options  
Graphics  
Watermarks  
Fonts  
User Settings  
3
When all setting changes are completed, select OK.  
Specify your printing options from the following:  
Paper/Output Tab  
Selections include Job Type, Copies, Paper Size, Output Size,  
Image Orientation, Mixed Orientation, Multiple Up, Output Color, 2  
Sided Print, Output Destination, Paper Source, Paper Type  
(Bypass Tray), or select Printer Status, Poster/Booklet, Print Area,  
or Restore Defaults buttons.  
Output Options  
Select from Front Cover, Feed Cover from, Transparency  
Separators, Job Offset, Stapling, or select Margin Shift or Restore  
Defaults buttons.  
2–41  
USER GUIDE (PRINT)  
Graphics  
Specify how you want to manipulate graphic images for your print  
job. Select from the following options: Output Color, Print Mode,  
Image Adjustment Mode, Image Types, Image Auto Correction, or  
select the Image Settings, Color Balance, Profile Settings,  
Detailed Settings, or Restore Defaults buttons.  
For more information on how to set graphic options refer to section  
C. Special Printing in the User Guide (Print).  
Watermarks  
Specify watermark settings. Selections for watermarks include  
First Page Only or In Background, Encircle, Text, Position, Angle,  
or select the Restore Defaults button.  
Fonts  
Use the TrueType Font control to select how TrueType Fonts will  
be processed and printed.  
User Settings  
The User Settings tab dialog provides options for you to save  
frequently used print driver settings and then recall these settings  
without having to configure again.  
2–42  
USER GUIDE (PRINT)  
Windows 2000 and Windows XP  
Installing PostScript or PCL Print Driver  
Prior to installing the AdobePS 4.4.Xor PCL 6/5e Version 4.1 print  
driver perform the following.  
Obtain the Print Driver for your workstation's operating  
system. Print drivers are available on a CD-ROM that  
came with your Printer. They are also available for  
downloading from www.xerox.com.  
Obtain the printer’s IP Address by printing a System  
Settings List or contacting your System Administrator.  
Check that the machine is physically connected to the  
network or to your computer.  
For detailed instructions on how to connect the machine to a  
network, refer to the System Administrator’s Guide.  
1
2
To begin the print driver installation select one of the following.  
Windows 2000: from the Start menu, select Settings, and  
then Printers.  
Windows XP: from the Start menu, and then Printers and  
Faxes.  
In the Printers window select one of the following.  
Windows 2000: double click Add Printer.  
Windows XP: from Printer Tasks, select Add a printer.  
3
4
When the Add Wizard displays, select Next. The Local or Network  
Printer screen is displayed.  
Select either Local Printer or Network Printer.  
If Local printer is selected, deselect the “Automatically  
detect and install my Plug and Play printer” check box.  
If Network printer is selected, specify the target printer in  
the “Connect to printer” dialog box.  
2–43  
     
USER GUIDE (PRINT)  
5
6
Select Next. The Select the Printer Port screen is displayed.  
Select one of the following and then select Next.  
Use the following port.  
Create a new port.  
7
8
Insert the CD-ROM in the CD-ROM drive.  
When the Add Printer Wizard window displays Manufacturers and  
Printers lists, select Have Disk… The Install From Disk screen is  
displayed.  
9
Enter the path for your driver files in the “Copy manufacturer’s files  
from:” box.  
NOTE: You can also use the Browse button to specify a folder in  
the CD-ROM.  
10 Select the .INF file, then select Open.  
11 When the Install From Disk screen is displayed, verify that the  
path and file name are correct and select OK.  
12 Select your printer model from the Printers list and select Next.  
13 Enter the printer name, set whether you want to use it as your  
default printer, and select Next.  
14 Select Do not share this printer, and select Next  
15 Select Yes to print a test page, then select Next.  
16 Select Finish.  
17 Verify that the test page prints at the printer then select Yes.  
18 Confirm that the printer has been added in the Printers window.  
19 Continue to the next page in order to configure the print driver to  
complete the installation.  
2–44  
USER GUIDE (PRINT)  
Configuring the PostScript Print Driver on Windows 2000/XP  
This section describes the following printer specific settings  
included in the AdobePS 4.4.X Print Driver Properties and Printing  
Preferences.  
Print Driver Properties  
Device Settings Tab > Installable Options  
Configuration Tab  
Printing Preferences  
Advanced Options Dialog Box > Printer Features  
Output Setting Tab  
Print Driver Properties  
Installable Options in the Device Settings Tab  
Configuration Tab  
2–45  
     
USER GUIDE (PRINT)  
Installable Options Settings  
This describes Installable Options in the Device Settings tab.  
NOTE: In order to print correctly, it is necessary to make  
appropriate settings in this tab.  
1
Select the printer icon in the Printers window, then select  
Properties from the File menu.  
2
3
4
Select the Device Settings tab.  
Select the items you want to set in Installable Options.  
Change the settings in the underlined menu that is displayed on  
the right of the option.  
5
When all setting changes are completed, select OK.  
Settings  
Memory  
Specify the amount of printer memory.  
The default setting is Normal 512MB  
Output Tray  
Specify whether Finisher is installed and the type.  
Paper Detect by Tray  
Specify either Statement Paper Detection, or A5 Paper Detection.  
2–46  
 
USER GUIDE (PRINT)  
Configuration Tab Settings  
This section describes the settings of the Configuration tab.  
1
Select the printer icon in the Printers window, then select  
Properties from the File menu.  
2
3
4
Select the Configuration tab.  
Change the settings that you want to set.  
When all setting changes are completed, select OK.  
Specify Job Owner  
Use Login Name  
Use your Windows Login Name as the Job Owner Name. The Job  
Owner Name becomes the “Login User Name\Host Name”.  
Enter Owner Name (For  
Administrator)  
Select this if you want to specify a custom Job Owner Name,  
which is used for all the printer icons.  
Enter Owner Name (For  
User)  
Select this if you want to specify a custom Job Owner Name for  
each Windows Login user.  
NOTE: You can enter up to 31 alphanumeric characters for the  
Login Name and the Owner Name. If you enter more than 31  
characters for either name, only the first 31 characters are used.  
Password  
Enter the password for the Job Owner Name. The password can  
consist of 4 to 12 digits. Each digit entered displays as an asterisk  
(*).  
2–47  
 
USER GUIDE (PRINT)  
Job Type User Setting  
Enter the User ID and password for the Job Type, which includes  
Secure Print, Sample Print, and Delayed Print.  
User ID  
Password  
Enter the User ID for Print Type. The User ID can contain up to a  
maximum of 24 alphanumeric characters.  
Enter the password for the Job Type. You can enter up to 4 digits.  
Each digit entered displays as an asterisk (*).  
Printing Preferences  
Sections specific to the printer in Printer Features of the  
Advanced Options Dialog Box  
Output Settings Tab  
2–48  
 
USER GUIDE (PRINT)  
Advanced Options Dialog Box Settings  
This section describes the settings of the Advanced Options  
dialog box displayed when selecting Advanced in the Layout tab.  
1
Select the printer icon in the Printers window, then select Printing  
Preferences from the File menu.  
2
3
4
5
On the Layout tab, select Advanced....  
Select the items in Printer Features.  
Change the settings on the menu displayed to the right.  
When all setting changes are completed, select OK.  
2–49  
 
USER GUIDE (PRINT)  
Printer Features Settings  
Output Tray  
Set the destination for the output.  
The items that can be selected vary according to whether  
the Center Tray or Finisher Tray has been installed.  
Job Offset  
Shifting the output positions of adjacent jobs (print command) or  
copies (sets) is called Job Offset. The positions of adjacent jobs or  
sets of copies are shifted to the front and the next job or set of  
copies is shifted to the back.  
Transparency Separators  
Specify whether to use transparency separators and the source of  
the separators.  
Select Auto for three paper source to automatically feed from the  
paper tray with paper of the same size and in the same orientation  
as the transparencies.  
NOTE: When using Transparency Separators, be sure to load  
paper of the same size and in the same orientation as  
transparencies into the paper tray.  
NOTE: The Transparency Separators function cannot be used in  
the following situations:  
When anything other than Manual feed is selected for  
Paper source in the Paper/Quality tab.  
When anything other than Transparency is selected for  
Media type in the Paper/Quality tab.  
When anything other than Center Output Tray is selected  
for Output Destination in the Advanced Options tab.  
Bypass Feed Orientation  
Specify the paper orientation when printing from the bypass tray.  
When you set the short side of the paper in the bypass tray feed  
direction, select Landscape. When you set the long side of the  
paper in the bypass tray, select Portrait.  
2–50  
USER GUIDE (PRINT)  
Print Mode  
Specify whether to give priority to the print speed or the image  
quality. The printer/copier is capable of printing at three different  
resolutions:  
High Speed: 600 x 600  
Standard: 1200 x 600  
High Quality: 1200 x 1200  
To change resolution settings, use the Print Mode selections.  
NOTE: The Image Enhancement feature is not available when  
Standard or High Quality is selected.  
Output Color  
Specify your output printing options select either Color or Black.  
Specify the coloration of the RBG Color Correction.  
RGB Color Correction  
Normal: This setting is optimized for printing documents that  
contain text and graphics, such as business documents.  
Photo: This setting is optimized for printing photos or images with  
gradations. Select this setting when printing images in RBG.  
Web Pages: This setting is optimized for printing web pages.  
Presentation: This setting is optimized for printing the color  
documents vividly, such as presentation documents.  
RGB Gamma Correction  
Screen  
Specify the brightness of the documents. The higher the value, the  
darker the print becomes.  
You can adjust the image quality. Select Gradation to print photos  
and gradations clearly. Select Fineness to print the colors in  
illustrations, tables, or graphs evenly.  
Image Enhancement  
Specify whether to use the Image Enhancement function.  
Selecting On, smooths out the boundaries between black and  
white when printing. This reduces jagged edges, thereby  
artificially increasing the resolution of the image. When printing an  
image (bitmap) composed of coarse halftone dots, smooth color  
gradation is impossible in certain situations. In this case, select  
Off.  
NOTE: The Image Enhancement feature is available only when  
Print Mode is set to High Speed.  
2–51  
USER GUIDE (PRINT)  
Draft Mode  
Specify whether to reduce the amount of toner used when printing  
drafts. When you select On, the overall printed color becomes  
lighter. This is best for printing documents when print quality is not  
necessary.  
Gray Guaranteed  
Select On to print grays and black within documents in black toner  
only. This prevents neutral grays from exhibiting any kind of color  
shading or misregistration. This feature does not apply to images  
of the documents.  
NOTE: For documents containing sweeps/gradients that include  
gray, it may be preferable to set this feature to Off.  
Stapling  
Select whether to staple printed documents as well as the position  
of the staple.  
You can staple 2 to 50 sheets.  
You can only staple when Finisher Tray is selected for  
Output Destination in the Advanced Options tab.  
You cannot use staples when Job Offset is selected.  
Custom Paper Image  
Rotation  
Select whether to correct the paper orientation when printing on  
custom paper. When printing on custom paper, select On to  
correct the orientation rotated at 90 degrees.  
Substitute Tray  
Specify what action to take when the paper size called for is not  
loaded in the machine.  
Use Printer Settings: The settings can be confirmed on the  
printer control panel.  
Display message: Display paper supply messages on the printer  
control panel. Printer will be unavailable until paper is supplied.  
Use Nearest Size (With Zoom): Select the nearest paper size.  
Automatically reduces or enlarges images for printing, as  
necessary.  
Use Nearest Size (No Zoom): Select the nearest paper size  
available and prints in equal size.  
Use Larger Size (With Zoom): Print in equal size on paper larger  
than the original. Automatically reduces images for printing, as  
necessary.  
Use Larger Size (No Zoom): Print on paper larger than the  
original.  
2–52  
USER GUIDE (PRINT)  
Output Setting Tab Settings  
This section describes the settings in the Output Settings tab.  
1
Select the printer icon in the Printers window, then select Printing  
Preferences from the File menu.  
2
3
4
Select the Output Settings tab.  
Change the settings that you want to set.  
When all setting changes are completed, select OK.  
Job Type  
Job Type  
You can specify the print function from among Secure Print,  
Sample Print, and Delayed Print.  
Secure Print: A function that temporarily stores print jobs in the  
printer, and prints the job when instructed from the printer control  
panel.  
If you want to output secure prints, set the User ID and  
password for Print Type in the Configuration tab.  
Sample Print: A function that outputs only 1 set when multiple  
sets are specified. If the job is as specified, the remaining sets are  
printed.  
Delayed Print: A function that temporarily stores print jobs in the  
printer, and prints them at a scheduled time.  
Normal Print  
Select when you do not want to output secure prints, sample  
prints, or delayed prints.  
2–53  
 
USER GUIDE (PRINT)  
Secure Print  
Select when you want to output secure prints.  
Select when you want to output sample prints.  
Sample Print  
NOTE: The Collated setting must be selected in the Page Setup  
tab when using Job Type.  
Delayed Print  
User ID  
Select when you want to output delayed prints.  
Displays the User ID for Job Type. The User ID displayed is the  
User ID specified on the Configuration tab. This option can only be  
selected when the setting on the Configuration tab has been  
completed. This is a display-only item and cannot be changed in  
User ID.  
Password  
Displays the Job Type password specified in the Configuration  
tab. Each digit entered is displayed as an asterisk (*). This option  
can only be selected when the setting on the Configuration tab  
has been completed. This is a display-only item and cannot be  
changed in Password.  
Retrieve Document Name  
Document Name  
Select the method of specifying the document name. If you have  
selected Auto Retrieve, the valid document name can be up to 24  
alphanumeric characters.  
When “Enter Document Name” is selected in the Stored  
Document Name list, you can specify a document name with a  
maximum of 24 alphanumeric characters.  
Start Print Time  
Set the time that you want Delayed Print to be carried out. Place  
the cursor in the hour or minute box and press the up or down  
triangle to specify the starting time. You can also set the time by  
entering the time directly into the boxes.  
The default setting is 00:00  
2–54  
USER GUIDE (PRINT)  
Configuring the PCL Print Driver on Windows 2000/XP  
This section describes the following printer specific settings  
included in the PCL 6/5e Version 4.1 Print Driver Properties and  
Printing Preferences.  
Print Driver Properties  
Configuration Tab  
Printer Tab  
Printing Defaults  
Advanced Tab  
Print Driver Properties  
Configuration Tab  
Printer Tab  
2–55  
     
USER GUIDE (PRINT)  
Configuration Tab Settings  
This describes Print Features in the Configuration tab.  
NOTE: In order to print correctly, it is necessary to make  
appropriate settings in this tab.  
1
Select the printer icon in the Printers window, then select  
Properties from the File menu.  
2
3
4
Select the Configuration tab.  
Select the items in Print Features that you want to set.  
Change the settings in the list box that is displayed below the Print  
Features list.  
5
When all setting changes are completed, select OK.  
2–56  
 
USER GUIDE (PRINT)  
Print Features  
EMF Spooling  
Select On to specify the spool format of the print data in the hard  
drive as RAW format. As it takes time to convert print data, the  
processing time is extended.  
Print Page Mode  
Select Print Page Mode to On to enhance printer performance  
with large complex jobs.  
Specify Job Owner  
Use this feature to specify a job owner.  
Use Login Name: Use your Windows Login Name as the Job  
Owner Name. The Job Owner Name becomes the “Login User  
Name\Host Name”.  
Enter Owner Name (For Administrator): Select this if you want  
to specify a custom Job Owner Name, which is used for all the  
printer icons.  
Enter Owner Name (For User): Select this if you want to specify  
a custom Job Owner Name for each Windows Login user.  
NOTE: You can enter up to 31 alphanumeric characters for the  
Login Name and the Owner Name. If you enter more than 31  
characters for either name, only the first 31 characters are used.  
Password: Enter the password for the Job Owner Name. The  
password can consist of 4 to 12 digits. Each digit entered displays  
as an asterisk (*).  
Bypass Feed Orientation  
Substitute Tray  
Specify the paper orientation when printing from the bypass tray.  
When you set the short side of the paper in the bypass tray feed  
direction, select Landscape. When you set the long side of the  
paper in the bypass tray, select Portrait.  
Specify what action to take when the paper size called for is not  
loaded in the machine.  
Use Printer Settings: The settings can be confirmed on the  
printer control panel.  
Display message: Display paper supply messages on the printer  
control panel. Printer will be unavailable until paper is supplied.  
Use Nearest Size (With Zoom): Select the nearest paper size.  
Automatically reduces or enlarges images for printing, as  
necessary.  
Use Nearest Size (No Zoom): Select the nearest paper size  
available and prints in equal size.  
2–57  
USER GUIDE (PRINT)  
Printer Tab Settings  
This describes Printer tab.  
NOTE: In order to print correctly, it is necessary to make  
appropriate settings in this tab.  
1
Select the printer icon in the Printers window, then select  
Properties from the File menu.  
2
3
Select the Printer tab.  
Select the Auto Configuration button or select the items  
manually in Change Setting For: that you want to set.  
4
When all setting changes are completed, select OK.  
Finisher  
An optional output tray with stapling function that can be added to  
the side of the printer.  
A5 & Statement Paper  
Detection  
Optional output functions to enable Trays 1 - 4 to detect certain  
paper sizes.  
2–58  
 
USER GUIDE (PRINT)  
Printing Defaults  
This describes the Printing Defaults on the Advanced tab.  
NOTE: In order to print correctly, it is necessary to make  
appropriate settings in this tab.  
2–59  
 
USER GUIDE (PRINT)  
1
Select the printer icon in the Printers window, then select  
Properties from the File menu.  
2
3
Select the Advanced tab.  
Select the Printing Defaults button to view or change the  
document default properties for all users of the selected printer.  
Select your changes on the following tabs:  
Paper/Output  
Output Options  
Graphics  
Watermarks  
Fonts  
User Settings  
About  
4
When all setting changes are completed, select OK.  
Specify your printing options from the following:  
Paper/Output Tab  
Selections include Job Type, Copies, Paper Size, Output Size,  
Image Orientation, Mixed Orientation, Multiple Up, Output Color, 2  
Sided Print, Output Destination, Paper Source, Paper Type  
(Bypass Tray), or select Printer Status, Poster/Booklet, Print Area,  
or Restore Defaults buttons.  
2–60  
USER GUIDE (PRINT)  
Output Options  
Graphics  
Select from Front Cover, Feed Cover from, Transparency  
Separators, Job Offset, Stapling, or select Margin Shift Restore  
Defaults buttons.  
Specify how you want to manipulate graphic images for your print  
job. Select from the following options: Output Color, Print Mode,  
Image Adjustment Mode, Image Types, Image Auto Correction, or  
select the Image Settings, Color Balance, Profile Settings,  
Detailed Settings, or Restore Defaults buttons.  
For more information on how to set graphic options refer to section  
C.) Special Printing in the User Guide (Print).  
Watermarks  
Specify watermark settings. Selections for watermarks include  
First Page Only or In Background, Encircle, Text, Position, Angle,  
or select the Restore Defaults button.  
Fonts  
Use the TrueType Font control to select how TrueType Fonts will  
be processed and printed.  
User Settings  
The User Settings tab provides options for you to save frequently  
used print driver settings and then recall these settings without  
having to configure again.  
About  
The About tab displays the name, version, and copyright  
information of the print driver.  
2–61  
USER GUIDE (PRINT)  
Macintosh  
Installing PostScript Print Driver  
There are three steps to install the print driver:  
Use the installer CD-ROM that you received with the  
printer to install the printer to the Macintosh.  
Configure the PPD File.  
Configure the print driver.  
Prior to installing the AdobePS 4.4.X print driver perform the  
following.  
1
2
Insert the CD-ROM in the CD-ROM drive.  
Copy the PPD (PostScript Printer Description) file to the System  
Folder\Extensions\Printer Descriptions folder on your  
workstation.  
3
4
Locate the Adobe PostScript Print Driver file.  
Double click the Adobe PS Installer icon. The Introduction screen  
is displayed.  
5
6
7
8
9
Select Continue on the Introduction screen.  
On the Licensing screen, select Accept.  
Review the Read Me file then select Continue.  
Verify the location for the print driver file and select Install.  
When the installation completes, select Restart to reboot the  
workstation.  
2–62  
     
USER GUIDE (PRINT)  
Configure the PPD File  
10 In the Apple Chooser, select the Adobe Postscript or Apple  
LaserWriter printer.  
11 Select the appropriate AppleTalk zone (if applicable) and the  
printer name.  
12 Select Create (for initial installation) or Setup (for all subsequent  
installations) and select the PPD file for the printer. The PPD  
screen is displayed.  
13 On the PPD screen, select Select PPD.  
14 If it is not already selected, highlight the Printer’s PPD in the list  
and select Select.  
15 Select OK.  
16 Confirm that the printer has been added.  
17 Continue to the next page in order to configure the print driver to  
complete the installation.  
2–63  
 
USER GUIDE (PRINT)  
Setting the Print Driver Properties on Macintosh  
This section describes printer specific settings included in the print  
driver properties.  
NOTE: Typically, Installable Options is automatically set according  
to the 1-directional communications with the printer. It is not  
necessary to change the setting.  
Installable Options on the Option menu  
Printer Specific Options  
Configure Settings  
This describes Installable Options.  
NOTE: In order to print correctly, it is necessary to make  
appropriate settings in this tab.  
1
Select the printer using the Chooser and select Setup. The  
Current Printer Description File (PPD) Selected screen is  
displayed.  
2
3
Select Configure on the Current Printer File (PPD) Selected  
screen. The Installable Options list is displayed.  
Set the option menu items in Installable Options. Select OK.  
Settings  
Memory  
Specify the amount of printer memory.  
The default setting is Standard 512MB  
Output Tray  
Set the destination for the output.  
The items that can be selected vary according to whether  
Finisher has been installed.  
Paper Detect by Tray  
Specify either Statement Paper Detection, or A5 Paper Detection.  
2–64  
     
USER GUIDE (PRINT)  
Printer Specific Options Settings  
This describes Printer Specific Options, used to set the print  
driver.  
1
2
3
On the File menu of the application, select Print.  
Select Printer Specific Options.  
Select the features you want to set.  
Settings  
This section describes the settings of the Printer Specific Options  
list.  
Output Tray  
Job Offset  
Set the destination for the output.  
The items that can be selected vary according to whether  
the Side Output Tray or Finisher Tray has been installed.  
Shifting the output positions of adjacent jobs (print command) or  
copies (sets) is called Job Offset. The positions of adjacent jobs or  
sets of copies are shifted to the front and the next job or set of  
copies is shifted to the back.  
Collated  
Selects whether to collate a multi-page file per set when they are  
printed.  
2–65  
 
USER GUIDE (PRINT)  
Transparency Separators  
Specify whether to use transparency separators and the source of  
the separators.  
Select Auto for three paper source to automatically feed from the  
paper tray with paper of the same size and in the same orientation  
as the transparencies.  
NOTE: When using Transparency Separators, be sure to load  
paper of the same size and in the same orientation as  
transparencies into the paper tray.  
NOTE: The Transparency Separators function cannot be used in  
the following situations:  
When anything other than Manual feed is selected for  
Paper source in the Paper/Quality tab.  
When anything other than Transparency is selected for  
Media type in the Paper/Quality tab.  
When anything other than Center Output Tray is selected  
for Output Destination in the Advanced Options tab.  
When print on both sides is selected.  
Bypass Feed Orientation  
Specify the paper orientation when printing from the bypass tray.  
When you set the short side of the paper in the bypass tray feed  
direction, select Landscape. When you set the long side of the  
paper in the bypass tray, select Portrait.  
Paper Type (Bypass Tray)  
Print Mode  
Select the type of the paper set in the bypass tray.  
Specify whether to give priority to the print speed or the image  
quality. The printer/copier is capable of printing at three different  
resolutions:  
High Speed: 600 x 600  
Standard: 1200 x 600  
High Quality: 1200 x 1200  
To change resolution settings, use the Print Mode selections.  
NOTE: The Image Enhancement feature is not available when  
Standard or High Quality is selected.  
Output Color  
Specify your output printing options select either Color or Black.  
2–66  
USER GUIDE (PRINT)  
RGB Color Correction  
Specify the coloration of the RGB Color Correction.  
Normal: This setting is optimized for printing documents that  
contain text and graphics, such as business documents.  
Photo: This setting is optimized for printing photos or images with  
gradations. Select this setting when printing images in RGB.  
Web Pages: This setting is optimized for printing web pages.  
Presentation: This setting is optimized for printing the color  
documents vividly, such as presentation documents.  
RGB Gamma Correction  
Screen  
Specify the brightness of the documents. The higher the value, the  
darker the print becomes.  
You can adjust the image quality. Select Gradation to print photos  
and gradations clearly. Select Fineness to print the colors in  
illustrations, tables, or graphs evenly.  
Image Enhancement  
Specify whether to use the Image Enhancement function.  
Selecting On, smooths out the boundaries between black and  
white when printing. This reduces jagged edges, thereby  
artificially increasing the resolution of the image. When printing an  
image (bitmap) composed of coarse halftone dots, smooth color  
gradation is impossible in certain situations. In this case, select  
Off.  
NOTE: The Image Enhancement feature is available only when  
Print Mode is set to High Speed.  
Draft Mode  
Specify whether to reduce the amount of toner used when printing  
drafts. When you select On, the overall printed color becomes  
lighter. This is best for printing documents when print quality is not  
necessary.  
Gray Guaranteed  
Select On to print grays and black within documents in black toner  
only. This prevents neutral grays from exhibiting any kind of color  
shading or misregistration. This feature does not apply to images  
of the documents.  
NOTE: For documents containing sweeps/gradients that include  
gray, it may be preferable to set this feature to Off.  
Stapling  
Select whether to staple printed documents as well as the position  
of the staple.  
You can staple 2 to 50 sheets.  
You can only staple when Finisher Tray is selected for  
Output Destination in the Advanced Options tab.  
You cannot use staples when Job Offset is selected.  
2–67  
USER GUIDE (PRINT)  
2–68  
USER GUIDE (PRINT)  
B. Basic Printing  
Paper  
This section identifies differences in paper usage as compared to  
paper usage when copying. Other than these, there are no  
differences between using paper for copying and printing.  
For more information on how to load paper, refer to the User  
Guide (Copier).  
Differences From Copying  
Tray 5 (Bypass)  
When using Tray 5 (Bypass), there is a restriction on the  
orientation of loading paper.  
When printing with Tray 5 (Bypass), be sure to select Tray 5  
(Bypass) from the Paper Source menu on the Tray/Output tab,  
and then select the correct paper type from the Paper Tray  
(Bypass) menu on the print driver screen.  
For details on loading paper in Tray 5 (Bypass), refer to the User  
Guide (Copier).  
Caution for Printing  
If the paper size or type used for printing is different from the  
selection on the print driver, or if the paper is loaded in an  
unsuitable paper tray, it may cause paper to jam.  
Automatic Tray Switching  
Outputting Paper  
To enable the Auto Tray Switch feature, Auto must be selected  
from the Paper Source menu on the Tray/Output tab.  
NOTE: The Auto Tray Switch feature is displayed as Disable Auto  
Tray Switch in the Common Menu and Internet Services.  
To use the Job Offset feature you must first configure the setting  
on the Configuration tab of the print driver.  
2–69  
       
USER GUIDE (PRINT)  
Prior to Printing  
In order to print from your computer, you must first install a print  
driver. Print drivers are software that convert print data or  
instructions from the computer into data that can be interpreted by  
the printer.  
Printing Procedure  
The printing procedure will differ according to the application  
program used. For details, refer to your application program  
manual.  
I
1
Select Print from the application program File menu. The Print  
screen is displayed.  
2–70  
       
USER GUIDE (PRINT)  
2
3
Select the Printer and then select Properties. The Printer  
Properties screen is displayed.  
Select the desired printing options for your print job.  
4
Select OK.  
2–71  
USER GUIDE (PRINT)  
Setting Printing Features  
Typically, printing features are set on the printer properties dialog  
box that is displayed when entering either printing from the  
application program or selecting Properties from the File menu on  
the printer icon.  
From the Properties screen, select the desired features in each  
tab.  
NOTE:  
For Windows 95/98/Me, select Properties.  
For Windows NT 4.0, select options from the tabs that are  
displayed by selecting Document Defaults and  
Properties from the File menu.  
For Windows 2000 and Windows XP, select options from  
the tabs that are displayed by selecting Printing  
Preferences and Properties from the File menu.  
For Windows 98, Windows Me, Windows 2000 and  
Windows XP, options are also displayed on the Color  
Management tab.  
For complete settings details, refer to the Driver  
Configuration information at the beginning of this chapter.  
2–72  
   
USER GUIDE (PRINT)  
Switching Printer Off-line  
When the printer is switched off-line, it cannot receive data.  
Receiving data will be interrupted and will not be printed.  
1
2
On the control panel, press the Machine Status button. The  
Machine Status screen is displayed.  
Select Print Mode located on the Machine Status tab. The Print  
Mode screen is displayed.  
3
4
Select Off-line.  
Select Close.  
2–73  
   
USER GUIDE (PRINT)  
Cancel Print/Check Print Job Status  
Cancel Print from the Workstation  
1
2
3
From the Start menu, select Settings and then select Printers.  
Open the icon of the printer model.  
In the window displayed, select any document name and then  
press Delete on the keyboard.  
Canceling a Print Job Using Internet Services  
You can cancel printing from your workstation using Internet  
Services via a browser.  
For more information on Internet Services, refer to the Internet  
Services section D in the User Guide (Print).  
Canceling a Print Job From the Printer  
There are three options available for canceling a print job at the  
machine. You can cancel a print job that is in process, one that is  
currently being printed or one that is stored for printing at a later  
time.  
2–74  
             
USER GUIDE (PRINT)  
Canceling a Print Job in Process  
Either press the Stop button on the control panel or select  
Stop on the following screen.  
The job currently being processed will be discontinued.  
Canceling a Print Job During Print  
1
2
Either press the Stop button on the control panel or select Stop.  
The job currently being processed will be discontinued.  
To stop printing, either press the Stop button on the control panel  
or select Stop on the following screen.  
NOTE: The page that is currently printing will be printed.  
2–75  
   
USER GUIDE (PRINT)  
Canceling Jobs Stored in the Printer  
You can interrupt the printer from receiving data and empty the  
buffer using the procedure below.  
1
2
On the control panel, press Job Status. The Job Status screen is  
displayed.  
On the Job Status screen, select Current/Pending Jobs. A list of  
jobs in process or waiting is displayed.  
3
4
5
Select the job that you want to delete. The job status is displayed.  
Select Stop. The job processing will be discontinued.  
Select Close.  
2–76  
 
USER GUIDE (PRINT)  
C. Special Printing  
Specifying Output Color for Printing in a PCL Driver  
You can specify the output color for printing.  
From the Output Color menu of either the Paper/Output or  
Graphics tab, select Black or Auto.  
Printing with Black  
To print in black and white, select Black from the Output Color  
menu.  
2–77  
         
USER GUIDE (PRINT)  
Print Mode  
Specify whether to give priority to the print speed or the image  
quality. The printer/copier is capable of printing at three different  
resolutions:  
High Speed: 600 x 600  
Standard: 1200 x 600  
High Quality: 1200 x 1200  
To change resolution settings, use the Print Mode selections.  
NOTE: The Image Enhancement feature is not available when  
Standard or High Quality is selected.  
Options  
Contents  
High Speed  
Prints faster but with a loss of image  
quality.  
Standard  
The average mode of High Speed and  
High Quality.  
High Quality  
Prints with better quality but slower  
NOTE: If printing is slow even when High Speed has been  
selected, try setting Print Page Mode on the Configuration tab to  
On. The printing time may be shortened.  
Image Adjustment Mode  
Options  
Recommended  
Contents  
A unique system of our company to  
adjust image quality.  
The possible feature combinations of Print Mode and Output Color  
and other options of the Graphics tab are as follows:  
NOTE: When Black has been selected for Output Color, only  
Recommended can be selected for Image Adjustment.  
2–78  
   
USER GUIDE (PRINT)  
Black & High Speed  
The possible feature combinations when Black for Output Color  
and High Speed for Print Mode have been selected:  
Image  
Adjustment  
Mode  
Recommended  
Graphics Options  
Image Settings  
Brightness  
Chroma  
Contrast  
Black  
Available  
NA  
Available  
Available  
NA  
Color Balance  
Profile Settings  
Cyan  
Magenta  
Yellow  
NA  
NA  
Color  
Available  
Correction  
Temperature/  
Gamma  
ICC Profile  
Available  
Available  
Detailed Text  
Settings:  
Change All  
Colors to  
Black  
Graphic  
Change All  
Colors to  
Black  
Available  
Thicken Fine  
Lines  
Available  
Available  
Paint Only  
Enclosed  
Areas  
Photo  
Image  
Available  
Compression  
Smoothing  
Available  
Available  
High Speed  
Image  
Processing  
All  
Image  
Available  
Enhancement  
Draft Mode  
Resolution  
Available  
Available  
2–79  
 
USER GUIDE (PRINT)  
Black & Standard  
The possible feature combinations when Black for Output Color  
and Standard for Print Mode have been selected:  
Image  
Adjustment  
Mode  
Recommended  
Graphics Options  
Image Settings  
Brightness  
Chroma  
Contrast  
Black  
Available  
NA  
Available  
Available  
NA  
Color Balance  
Profile Settings  
Cyan  
Magenta  
Yellow  
NA  
NA  
Color  
Available  
Correction  
Temperature/  
Gamma  
ICC Profile  
Available  
Available  
Detailed Text  
Settings:  
Change All  
Colors to  
Black  
Graphic  
Change All  
Colors to  
Black  
Available  
Thicken Fine  
Lines  
Available  
Available  
Paint Only  
Enclosed  
Areas  
Photo  
Image  
Available  
Compression  
Smoothing  
Available  
Available  
High Speed  
Image  
Processing  
All  
Image  
NA  
Enhancement  
Draft Mode  
Resolution  
Available  
Available  
2–80  
 
USER GUIDE (PRINT)  
Black & High Quality  
The possible feature combinations when Black for Output Color  
and High Quality for Print Mode have been selected:  
Image  
Adjustment  
Mode  
Recommended  
Graphics Options  
Image Settings  
Brightness  
Chroma  
Contrast  
Black  
Available  
NA  
Available  
Color Balance  
Profile Settings  
Available  
Cyan  
X
Magenta  
Yellow  
X
X
Color  
Available  
Correction  
Temperature/  
Gamma  
ICC Profile  
Available  
Available  
Detailed Text  
Settings:  
Change All  
Colors to  
Black  
GraphIC  
Change All  
Colors to  
Black  
Available  
Thicken Fine  
Lines  
Available  
Available  
Paint Only  
Enclosed  
Areas  
Photo  
Image  
Available  
Compression  
Smoothing  
Available  
Available  
High Speed  
Image  
Processing  
All  
Image  
NA  
Enhancement  
Draft Mode  
Resolution  
Available  
Available  
2–81  
 
USER GUIDE (PRINT)  
1
2
3
4
Select Print from the File menu.  
Select the printer, and then select Properties.  
Select the Graphics tab.  
Select Black from the Output Color drop-down list.  
NOTE: You can also select from Output Color on the Paper/  
Output tab.  
5
6
Select the mode from the Print Mode drop-down list box.  
Select OK.  
Printing with Auto  
Auto  
Before printing, the printer can detect the colors on every  
document page, and then switch automatically to Color when  
colors other than black and white are used, and to Black when  
only black and white are used. Select Auto from the Output Color  
menu.  
Output Color Recognition  
When this feature is checked, pages with only some degree of  
unevenness in color will be detected as black and white. When the  
box has not been checked, only pages with even degree of color  
will be detected as black and white.  
You can also configure the Print Mode, Image Adjustment Mode  
and Image Auto Correction settings. However, pages detected as  
black and white will be printed with the settings of Black mode.  
Display the Graphics tab to configure these settings.  
2–82  
 
USER GUIDE (PRINT)  
Print Mode  
Specify whether to give priority to the print speed or the image  
quality. The printer/copier is capable of printing at three different  
resolutions:  
High Speed: 600 x 600  
Standard: 1200 x 600  
High Quality: 1200 x 1200  
To change resolution settings, use the Print Mode selections.  
NOTE: The Image Enhancement feature is not available when  
Standard or High Quality is selected.  
Options  
Contents  
High Speed  
Prints faster but with a loss of image  
quality.  
Standard  
The average mode of High Speed and  
High Quality.  
High Quality  
Prints with better quality but slower  
NOTE: If printing is slow even when High Speed has been  
selected, try setting Print Page Mode on the Configuration tab to  
On. The printing time may be shortened.  
2–83  
 
USER GUIDE (PRINT)  
Image Adjustment Mode  
The available options in Image Adjustment mode are:  
Recommended  
ICM (System)  
NOTE: The ICM (System) setting is not available for Windows NT  
4.0 Operating System.  
CMS (Application)  
Complimentary Color Conversion  
Recommended  
When Recommended has been selected, select the image type  
from the Image Types list box.  
Options  
Contents  
Normal  
Prints documents with a mixture of  
texts, graphs and photos, fast.  
Photo  
Reproduces photos and gradation  
more accurately. Suitable for printing  
of images in RGB.  
Presentation  
Web Pages  
Adjusts colors vividly for printing.  
Suitable for presentation materials.  
Effectively reproduces screen displays  
like web pages.  
2–84  
 
USER GUIDE (PRINT)  
ICM (System)  
Changes colors using the ICM feature of Windows 98, Windows  
Me, Windows 2000, and Windows XP.  
When ICM (System) has been selected, select the way of  
converting colors from the Indent list box.  
NOTE: Prior to using the ICC profile of this machine, register it on  
the Color Management tab of the print driver.  
Options  
Contents  
Saturation  
Converts colors to improve the  
reproduction of graphics in  
presentation materials.  
Perceptual  
Converts colors to improve the  
reproduction of images like photos.  
Colorimetric  
Reproduces suitably only colors that  
can be reproduced by the printer and  
converts others not within the  
reproduction range to other colors.  
CMS (Application)  
The print driver does not convert any colors. When printing from  
an application program with its own Color Management System  
(CSM), the print driver will receive instruction on color data  
converted according to the printer characteristics. In this case,  
select this item to prevent double color conversion by the print  
driver.  
Complementary Color  
Conversion  
Selecting this will enable the Auto Correction for you to select an  
option.  
2–85  
USER GUIDE (PRINT)  
Image Auto Correction  
When the document to be printed includes photo images, you can  
correct the image quality according to the special characteristics  
of the photo images. You can perform automatic correction  
according to the characteristics of the specified image type.  
NOTE: Image Auto Correction cannot be selected when ICM  
(System) or CMS (Application) has been selected for Image  
Adjustment Mode.  
The possible feature combinations of Print Mode, Image  
Adjustment Mode and other options of the Graphics tab are as  
follows:  
Options  
Contents  
Normal  
Corrects imbalances in photo images  
like too bright or dark, or too greyish.  
Images with insufficient contrast and  
saturation will be automatically  
corrected.  
Portrait  
Landscape  
Map  
Automatically corrects the brightness,  
contrast and saturation suitable for  
images of people.  
Automatically corrects the brightness,  
contrast and saturation suitable for  
images of scenery.  
Automatically corrects maps and on-  
site photos to reproduce the text and  
detailed portions clearly.  
NOTE: ICM (System) only will be display in Windows 98, Windows  
Me, Windows 2000, and Windows XP.  
2–86  
 
USER GUIDE (PRINT)  
Auto & High Speed  
The possible feature combinations when Auto for Output Color  
and High Speed for Print Mode have been selected:  
Comple-  
Image  
Adjustment  
Mode  
Recommended  
ICM Adj.  
(System)  
CMS Adj.  
(Application)  
mentary  
Color  
Graphics Options  
Conversion  
Image Settings  
Brightness  
Chroma  
Contrast  
Black  
Available  
Available  
Available  
Available  
Available  
Available  
Available  
Available  
NA  
NA  
NA  
NA  
Available  
Available  
Available  
Available  
Available  
Available  
Available  
Available  
NA  
NA  
Color Balance  
Profile Settings  
Available  
Available  
Available  
Available  
NA  
Available  
Available  
Available  
Available  
NA  
Cyan  
Magenta  
Yellow  
Color  
Temperature/  
Gamma  
ICC Profile  
Available  
NA  
NA  
NA  
NA  
NA  
Available  
NA  
Detailed Text  
Settings:  
Change All  
Colors to  
Black  
Graphic  
Change All  
Colors to  
Black  
NA  
NA  
NA  
NA  
Thicken Fine  
Lines  
Available  
Available  
Available  
Available  
Available  
Available  
Available  
Available  
Paint Only  
Enclosed  
Areas  
Photo  
Image  
Available  
Available  
Available  
Available  
Compression  
Smoothing  
Available  
Available  
Available  
Available  
Available  
Available  
Available  
Available  
High Speed  
Image  
Processing  
All  
Image  
Available  
Available  
Available  
Available  
Enhancement  
Draft Mode  
Resolution  
Available  
Available  
Available  
Available  
Available  
Available  
Available  
Available  
2–87  
 
USER GUIDE (PRINT)  
Auto & Standard  
The possible feature combinations when Auto for Output Color  
and Standard for Print Mode have been selected:  
Comple-  
mentary  
Color  
Image  
Adjustment  
Mode  
Recommended  
ICM Adj.  
(System)  
CMS Adj.  
(Application)  
Graphics Options  
Conversion  
Image Settings  
Brightness  
Chroma  
Contrast  
Black  
Available  
Available  
Available  
Available  
Available  
Available  
Available  
Available  
NA  
NA  
NA  
NA  
Available  
Available  
Available  
Available  
Available  
Available  
Available  
Available  
NA  
NA  
Color Balance  
Profile Settings  
Available  
Available  
Available  
Available  
NA  
Available  
Available  
Available  
Available  
NA  
Cyan  
Magenta  
Yellow  
Color  
Temperature/  
Gamma  
ICC Profile  
Available  
NA  
NA  
NA  
NA  
NA  
Available  
NA  
Detailed Text  
Settings:  
Change All  
Colors to  
Black  
Graphic  
Change All  
Colors to  
Black  
NA  
NA  
NA  
NA  
Thicken Fine  
Lines  
Available  
Available  
Available  
Available  
Available  
Available  
Available  
Available  
Paint Only  
Enclosed  
Areas  
Photo  
Image  
Available  
Available  
Available  
Available  
Compression  
Smoothing  
Available  
Available  
Available  
Available  
Available  
Available  
Available  
Available  
High Speed  
Image  
Processing  
All  
Image  
NA  
NA  
NA  
NA  
Enhancement  
Draft Mode  
Resolution  
Available  
Available  
Available  
Available  
Available  
Available  
Available  
Available  
2–88  
 
USER GUIDE (PRINT)  
Auto & High Quality  
The possible feature combinations when Auto for Output Color  
and High Quality for Print Mode have been selected:  
Comple-  
Image  
Adjustment  
Mode  
Recommended  
ICM Adj.  
(System)  
CMS Adj.  
(Application)  
mentary  
Color  
Graphics Options  
Conversion  
Image Settings  
Brightness  
Chroma  
Contrast  
Black  
Available  
Available  
Available  
Available  
Available  
Available  
Available  
Available  
NA  
NA  
NA  
NA  
Available  
Available  
Available  
Available  
Available  
Available  
Available  
Available  
NA  
NA  
Color Balance  
Profile Settings  
Available  
Available  
Available  
Available  
NA  
Available  
Available  
Available  
Available  
NA  
Cyan  
Magenta  
Yellow  
Color  
Temperature/  
Gamma  
ICC Profile  
Available  
NA  
NA  
NA  
NA  
NA  
Available  
NA  
Detailed Text  
Settings:  
Change All  
Colors to  
Black  
GraphIC  
Change All  
Colors to  
Black  
NA  
NA  
NA  
NA  
Thicken Fine  
Lines  
Available  
Available  
Available  
Available  
Available  
Available  
Available  
Available  
Paint Only  
Enclosed  
Areas  
Photo  
Image  
Available  
Available  
Available  
Available  
Compression  
Smoothing  
Available  
Available  
Available  
Available  
Available  
Available  
Available  
Available  
High Speed  
Image  
Processing  
All  
Image  
NA  
NA  
NA  
NA  
Enhancement  
Draft Mode  
Resolution  
Available  
Available  
Available  
Available  
Available  
Available  
Available  
Available  
2–89  
 
USER GUIDE (PRINT)  
Printing with Auto  
This section describes the possible feature combinations when  
Auto for Output Color and High Speed for Print Mode have been  
selected.  
1
2
3
4
Select Print from the File menu.  
Select the printer, and then select Properties.  
Select the Graphics tab.  
Select Auto from the Output Color drop-down list.  
NOTE: You can also select from Output Color on the Paper/  
Output tab.  
5
6
7
Select the mode from the Print Mode drop-down list.  
Select the mode from the Image Adjustment Mode drop-down list.  
When Recommended has been selected, select the image type  
from the Image Type list.  
When ICM (System) has been selected, select the way of  
converting colors from the Indent list.  
8
Select OK.  
2–90  
 
USER GUIDE (PRINT)  
Adjusting Color for Printing  
This section explains how to configure detailed color settings for  
printing. These settings are configured on the Graphics tab. There  
are four tabs on the Graphics tab. The options are as follows:  
Options  
Contents  
Image Settings  
Adjusts the brightness, chroma, and  
contrast of the whole document or of  
each of the elements like text, graphic,  
and photos.  
Color Balance  
Profile Settings  
Fine-tunes the toner density of black,  
cyan, magenta, and yellow. Can be  
set in low, medium, or high density.  
Configures settings like color  
temperature/gamma correction and  
ICC profile that match the  
characteristics of devices (like monitor  
and scanner) in order to reproduce  
document image faithfully.  
Detailed Settings  
Adjusts the detailed image quality  
settings of the whole document or  
each of the elements like text, graphic,  
and photos.  
2–91  
   
USER GUIDE (PRINT)  
Adjusting Image Settings (Brightness/Chroma/Contrast)  
The brightness/chroma/contrast of the whole document or of each  
of the elements like text, graphic, and photos can be adjusted.  
You can adjust the brightness/chroma/contrast within the range of  
-100 to 100 in units of 1. When adjusting for each of the elements  
within the page will be detected automatically and will be set to the  
appropriate value respectively.  
Options  
Contents  
Brightness  
Expresses the degree of lightness/  
darkness of color. The higher the  
brightness, the closer the color is to  
white.  
Chroma  
Contrast  
Expresses the degree of vividness of  
color. The higher the chroma, the  
more vivid is the color.  
Expresses the degree of change of  
lightness/darkness/ from white to  
black. The higher the contrast, the  
more sudden is the change of degree.  
Display the Image Settings tab to adjust these settings.  
NOTE: When Output Color of the Graphics tab has been set to  
Black, the chroma setting cannot be adjusted regardless of the  
Print Mode setting.  
NOTE: When Image Adjustment Mode of the Graphics tab has  
been set to ICM (System) or CMS (Application), the brightness/  
chroma/contrast setting cannot be adjusted. ICM (System) will  
only be displayed in Windows 98, Windows Me, Windows 2000,  
and Windows XP.  
2–92  
   
USER GUIDE (PRINT)  
1
2
3
Select Print from the File menu.  
Select the printer, and then select Properties.  
Select the Graphics tab and then Image Settings.  
The Graphics tab will be opened with the Image Setting tab  
displayed.  
4
5
6
Select either Apply to All Elements or Apply to Selected  
Element.  
When Apply to Selected Element has been selected, select the  
element from the list box on the right.  
Adjusts the settings of brightness, chroma, and contrast.  
You can either enter the value or use the slider bar to adjust  
the value to be within the range of -100 to 100, in units of 1.  
7
Select OK.  
2–93  
USER GUIDE (PRINT)  
Adjusting Color Balance  
You can adjust the toner density of Cyan, Magenta, Yellow, Black  
(CMYK) for printing. Each color can be adjusted to low/medium/  
high density and in seven levels each within the range of -3 to 3.  
Display the Color Balance tab to adjust these settings.  
NOTE: When Output Color of the Graphics tab has been  
selected as Black, only black can be adjusted here.  
1
2
3
Select Print from the File menu.  
Select the printer, and then select Properties.  
Select the Graphics tab and then the Color Balance button.  
The Graphics tab will be opened with the Color Balance  
tab displayed.  
4
5
6
Check the Adjust Color Balance check box.  
Select the color to be adjusted from the list box below.  
Adjust the density.  
Use the up and down arrow buttons located below the  
graphs of low/medium/high density to adjust the settings.  
7
Select OK.  
2–94  
   
USER GUIDE (PRINT)  
Adjusting Profile Settings  
You can correct profile settings to match the characteristics of  
devices (like monitor and scanner) in order to reproduce graphic  
images consistently for printing. There are two types of profile  
settings:  
Color Temperature/Gamma Correction  
ICC Profile  
For Color Temperature/Gamma Correction, you can specify the  
appropriate Color Temperature and Gamma Correction for all  
elements of a document.  
Options  
Contents  
Color Temperature  
Changes the color tone of all the  
document elements to match the  
setting of the monitor in use. Select  
the option closest to the  
characteristics of the monitor. Options  
available: 5000 K (D50), 6500 K  
(D65), 9300 K.  
Gamma Correction  
Changes the brightness of all the  
document elements. Options  
available: 1.0, 1.4, 1.8, 2.2, 2.6  
2–95  
   
USER GUIDE (PRINT)  
For Profile Settings, you can specify the ICC profile for Monitor  
and Input Image. ICC profile is a file that describes the  
characteristic about the device color. The selectable ICC profile  
applies only to the monitor and RBG scanner.  
Options  
Contents  
Monitor  
Specifies the ICC profile that is  
applicable to text, drawing, table and  
graph. Options available: Off and  
Browse.... Usually, select the ICC  
profile of the monitor in use.  
Input Image  
IUCC profile appropriate to the image  
data. Options available: Off, Same as  
Monitor, and Browse.... Usually,  
select the ICC profile of the RBG  
scanner which entered the image.  
Browse... is displayed when ICC profile has been previously  
specified.  
For both Monitor and Input Image, you can read the ICC profile  
from any folder. In the selection dialog box of ICC profile, only files  
with the ICC profile extension (.icm) will be displayed. Up to 128  
file names with the full path can be specified.  
The default directories when opening the selection dialog box of  
ICC profile are as follows:  
NOTE: x is the drive name.  
Windows 95/98/Me  
x:\windows\system\color\  
Windows NT 4.0:  
x:\winnt\  
Windows 2000  
x:winnt\system\spool\drivers\color\  
Windows XP  
x:\winnt\system\spool\drivers\color\  
Display the Profile Settings tab to adjust these settings.  
2–96  
USER GUIDE (PRINT)  
NOTE: When Output Color of the Graphics tab has been set to  
Black, the chroma setting cannot be adjusted regardless of the  
Print Mode setting.  
NOTE: When Image Adjustment Mode of the Graphics tab has  
been set to ICM (System) or CMS (Application), or  
Complementary Color Conversion, the setting cannot be  
adjusted. ICM (System) will only be displayed in Windows 98,  
Windows Me, Windows 2000, and Windows XP.  
1
2
3
Select Print from the File menu.  
Select the printer, and then select Properties.  
Select the Graphics tab and then the Profile Settings button.  
The Graphics tab will be opened with the Profile Setting  
tab displayed.  
4
5
6
Select either Color Temperature/Gamma or ICC Profile.  
Specify the detailed settings of the selected item.  
Select OK.  
2–97  
USER GUIDE (PRINT)  
Adjusting Detailed Settings  
You can adjust the detailed settings of image quality for the entire  
document or specific elements like text, graphics, and photos.  
The options are as follows:  
Options for the Text Group  
The following settings are effective for text data only.  
Options  
Contents  
Change All Colors to  
Black  
If the check box is checked, text in  
colors other than white/black will be  
printed in black when printing color  
documents in black and white. This  
makes colored text in fine print easier  
to see when the text is close in color to  
the background.  
NOTE: This option is available  
when Output Color on the  
Graphics or Paper/Output tab has  
been selected as Black.  
2–98  
     
USER GUIDE (PRINT)  
Options for the Graphic Group  
The following settings are effective for drawing data such as lines.  
Options  
Contents  
Change All Colors to  
Black  
If the box is checked, drawing/table/  
graph in colors other than white/black  
will be printed in black when printing  
color documents in black and white.  
This makes colored fine lines easier to  
see.  
NOTE: This option is available  
when Output Color on the  
Graphics or Paper/Output tab has  
been selected as Black.  
Thicken Fine Lines  
If the box is selected, fine lines will be  
thickened for printing.  
Paint Only Enclosed  
Areas  
If the box is checked, areas defined as  
O will not be filled for printing.  
2–99  
 
USER GUIDE (PRINT)  
Options for the Photo Group  
These settings are effective only for images like photos.  
Options  
Contents  
Image Compression  
Compresses image data like photos within the page for printing.  
Options for compression include High Quality and High Compression.  
High Quality compresses without loss of image quality. Suitable for data  
with many images of the same color like those scanned images in black  
and white of business documents.  
High Compression is suitable for images like photos. Generally, the  
compression effect is high, but there might be a little loss of image quality.  
To compress without loss of image quality, select High Quality.  
NOTE: Selecting High Quality when printing documents consisting  
of only photos will slow down the printing speed. When this occurs,  
it is recommended to select High Compression.  
Smoothing  
When this box is checked, the method of resolution conversion of image  
data will be changed and the image will be smoothed. If this is not  
checked, the printing speed will be faster.  
High Speed Image  
Processing  
When this box is checked, the images inside the document will be  
processed for printing with a shortened processing time.  
2–100  
 
USER GUIDE (PRINT)  
Options for the Whole Document  
These settings are effective for the whole document.  
Options  
Contents  
Image Enhancement  
When this is checked, edges of the whole document will be smoothed.  
With this selection the effect of density smoothing might be lost for some  
documents that contain images (bitmaps) whose density seems to be  
smoothed. When this happens, uncheck the check box. Checking and  
unchecking the check box does not change the printing speed.  
NOTE: This option is available when Print Mode on the Graphics  
tab has been selected as High Speed.  
Draft Mode  
Resolution  
When this box is checked, less toner will be used for printing. In general.  
The colors will be lighter when this feature is used compared to when it  
is not used. Suitable for printing documents whose image quality is not  
very important, like draft.  
Specifies the resolution to be used in the application program when  
printing.  
Options available: Normal (600 dpi), Layout (300 dpi) and Lines (200  
dpi).  
Although the resolution of this machine is 600 dpi, selecting Layout (300  
dpi) or Lines (200 dpi) will inform the application program which cannot  
usually print at 600 dpi, to print at 300 or 200 dpi.  
Even if Layout (300 dpi) or Lines (200 dpi) has been selected for  
printing, it will not effect the print result much although the dots might  
become coarser when fonts have been downloaded.  
2–101  
 
USER GUIDE (PRINT)  
Display the Detailed Settings tab to configure these settings.  
NOTE: Depending on the application program, the way to display  
the printer properties dialog box may differ. Refer to the  
application program documentation for details on how to display  
printer properties.  
1
2
3
Select Print from the File menu.  
Check Printer, and then select Properties.  
Select the Graphics tab and then the Detailed Settings button.  
The Graphics tab will be opened with the Detailed Setting  
tab displayed.  
4
Select the desired options then select OK.  
2–102  
USER GUIDE (PRINT)  
Secure Print  
Secure Print allows you to add a password to your print data on  
the computer, send it to the printer for temporary storing; and then  
print out the data using the control panel on the printer. You can  
also save print data in the printer without a password and print  
frequently-used data just from the printer without having to send  
print instructions from a workstation. For more information on how  
to set the user name and password before printing, refer to the  
driver properties settings, in the User Guide (Print).  
Setting Secure Print Jobs  
In order to use Secure Print, you need to set the user name and  
password.  
1
From the Start menu, select Settings then select Printers to  
display the printer properties.  
2
3
Select the Configuration tab.  
Select Secure/Sample Print User ID from the Print Features list  
box.  
Enter the User ID using 24 characters or less at the Secure/  
Sample Print User ID text box.  
NOTE: The User ID entered here will be displayed as the user ID  
on the Secure Print screen on the printer. You can enter the same  
user more than once if it is used with different passwords.  
4
5
Enter the password at the Password text box.  
Select OK.  
2–103  
     
USER GUIDE (PRINT)  
Printing Secure Print Jobs  
After setting and sending the Secure Print job at the workstation,  
execute print at the printer to output the data.  
NOTE: You can also check or delete print jobs saved in the  
machine using the same procedure of executing print instruction  
at the printer  
At the Workstation  
This procedure uses Windows 98 Notepad as an example. The  
procedure is the same when using other operating systems.  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Select Print from the File menu.  
Select the Printer icon, then select Properties.  
Select Printing Preferences on the General tab.  
Select the Tray/Output tab.  
Select Secure Print. The Secure Print screen is displayed.  
Select Secure Print from the Print Type drop-down list box.  
From Stored Document Name in the Secure Print Settings  
group, select either Enter Document Name or Auto Retrieve.  
8
9
Select OK.  
Select OK on the Tray/Output tab.  
2–104  
     
USER GUIDE (PRINT)  
At the Printer  
1
Press the Job Status button on the control panel. The Job Status  
screen is displayed.  
2
3
4
Select the Stored Documents button  
Select the Secure Print button.  
Select your User ID, then select Document List.  
Refresh the document list by selecting Refresh Status.  
If a password has been set, the password screen will be  
displayed.  
Information about the saved document will be displayed on  
the specific user ID screen.  
5
6
Select the document to be printed, then the Print button. The  
Confirmation screen is displayed.  
Review the contents displayed, then select from one of the  
following selections:  
If Print was selected in the previous step: Print and  
Delete, Print and Save, or Cancel.  
If Delete was selected in the previous step: Yes or No.  
7
Select Close repeatedly until the Job Status screen is displayed.  
2–105  
 
USER GUIDE (PRINT)  
Delayed Print  
Delayed Print temporarily stores your print job and allows you to  
start print time. You can also start printing prior to the specified  
time using the control panel. For more information on how to set  
the user name and password before printing, refer to the driver  
properties settings, in the User Guide (Print).  
Setting Delayed Print Jobs  
1
2
From the Start menu, select Settings then select Printers to  
display the Printing Preferences.  
Select one of the following:  
PostScript Driver: Select Delayed Print on the Output  
Settings tab.  
PCL Driver: Select Delayed Print on the Paper/Output tab.  
3
4
Enter the time on a 24-hour basis to start printing in the Start Print  
Time box.  
Select OK.  
2–106  
       
USER GUIDE (PRINT)  
Printing Delayed Print Jobs  
After setting and sending the Delayed Print job at the workstation,  
the print job will print at the specified time. When printing delayed  
print jobs before the specified time set, use the control panel on  
the machine.  
At the Workstation  
1
2
From the Start menu, select Settings then select Printers to  
display the Printing Preferences.  
Select one of the following:  
PostScript Driver: Select Delayed Print on the Output  
Settings tab.  
PCL Driver: Select Delayed Print on the Paper/Output tab.  
3
4
From Retrieve Document Name in Delayed Print Settings, select  
either Enter Document Name or Auto Retrieve.  
Select OK, then select OK on the Output Settings or Paper/Output  
tab.  
At the Printer  
1
2
3
Press the Job Status button on the control panel.  
Select the Delayed Print button.  
Select the document to be printed, then the Print button. The  
Confirmation screen is displayed.  
4
5
Review the contents displayed, then select Yes to print the job or  
No to delete the job.  
Select Close repeatedly until the Job Status screen is displayed.  
2–107  
       
USER GUIDE (PRINT)  
Sample Print  
When printing multiple copies, sample print allows you to print out  
the first set to check the printing result prior to printing the  
remaining copies from the printer control panel.  
In order to use Sample Print, you need to set the user name prior  
to printing.  
Up to 200 users and 1,000 files per user can be set. You can save  
up to 9,999 files or until the hard disk is full.  
Setting Sample Print Jobs  
1
From the Start menu, select Settings then select Printers to  
display the printer properties.  
2
3
Select the Configuration tab.  
Select Secure/Sample Print User ID from the Print Features list  
box.  
4
Enter the User ID using 24 characters or less at the Secure/  
Sample Print User ID text box.  
NOTE: The user ID entered here will be displayed as the user ID  
on the Sample Print screen on printer.  
5
Select OK.  
2–108  
       
USER GUIDE (PRINT)  
Printing Sample Print Jobs  
After setting and sending the Sample Print job at the workstation,  
execute the print instruction at the printer to print out the data.  
NOTE: You can also check or delete print jobs saved in the  
machine using the same procedure of executing print instruction  
at the printer.  
At the Workstation  
This procedure uses Notepad of Windows 98 as an example. The  
procedure is the same when using other operating systems.  
1
2
3
4
5
6
Select Print from the File menu.  
Select the Printer icon, then select Properties.  
Select Printing Preferences on the General tab.  
Select the Output Settings tab.  
Select Secured Print from the Job Type drop-down list box.  
From Stored Document Name in Secure Print Settings, select  
either Enter Document Name or Auto Retrieve.  
7
8
Select OK.  
Select OK on the Output Settings tab to start the Sample Print.  
2–109  
     
USER GUIDE (PRINT)  
D. Internet Services  
Overview  
Internet Services are a series of Web (HTML) Pages located  
within the printer that give you access to the printer from your  
client workstation using a web browser. You can use Internet  
Services to:  
Print from you workstation  
Review print jobs  
Obtain machine and consumable status  
Download scanned originals  
Create and edit scan templates  
Configure the printer (with access rights)  
Introduction  
Internet Services is the embedded HTTP server application that  
resides in the Printer. Using a browser (Netscape Navigator 4.x or  
Internet Explorer 5.x) you can access any WorkCentre 24 on an IP  
network using TCP/IP protocol. Simply enter the printer/copier’s IP  
address as the URL in the browser.  
2–110  
       
USER GUIDE (PRINT)  
Screen Structure  
The Internet Services screen is made up of four frames.  
Top Frame  
Bottom Frame  
Each feature page will display a link to the Home Page, as well as  
tabs for moving to each feature.  
Typically, it displays links to the Home Page of our company and  
the copyright screen.  
Right and Left Frames  
The contents of these frames will change according to the  
features selected.  
NOTE: You can drag the line separating the left and right frames  
to change the size of these frames. The position of the line  
separating the top and bottom frames cannot be changed.  
2–111  
   
USER GUIDE (PRINT)  
System Structure  
To use Internet Services, you need to activate an environment  
using TCP/IP and enable this software on the machine.  
Target Operating System  
The OS and browsers that can be used for Internet Services are  
as follows:  
Microsoft Windows 95  
Microsoft Windows 98  
Microsoft Windows 98 Second Edition  
Microsoft Windows Millennium Edition  
Microsoft Windows NT Workstation 4.0 (Service Pack 4 or  
later)  
Microsoft Windows NT Server 4.0 (Service Pack 4 or later)  
Microsoft Windows 2000 Professional (Service Pack 2 or  
later)  
Microsoft Windows 2000 Server (Service Pack 2 or later)  
Microsoft Windows XP Professional Edition  
Microsoft Windows XP Home Edition  
Macintosh OS 10 (Update 1.1 or later)  
Macintosh OS 9.0  
2–112  
   
USER GUIDE (PRINT)  
Browsers  
For Windows 95, Windows 98, Windows Me, Windows NT 4.0,  
Windows 2000, Windows XP:  
Netscape Communicator version 4.51 or later  
Internet Explorer version 5.0 or later  
For Macintosh:  
Netscape Communicator version 4.5 or later  
Internet Explorer version 5.0 or later  
Configuring the Browser  
Prior to using Internet Services, check the following setting for  
your browser.  
Netscape Communicator  
1
2
3
4
5
From the Edit menu, select Preferences.  
From the Category tree, select Advanced.  
Select the + sign on the left of Advanced.  
Select Cache under Advanced.  
Select Once per session or Every time for Document in cache  
is compared to document on network.  
6
Select OK.  
2–113  
     
USER GUIDE (PRINT)  
Internet Explorer  
1
Select Internet Options from the Display menu for version 4.x,  
and Internet Options from the Tools menu for version 5.x.  
2
3
Select Settings for Temporary Internet files on the General tab.  
For Check for newer versions of stored pages on the Settings tab,  
select either Every visit to the page or Every time you start  
Internet Explorer.  
4
Select OK.  
2–114  
 
USER GUIDE (PRINT)  
Proxy Server and Port Number  
Prior to using Internet Services, check the proxy server setting  
and port number.  
Proxy Server Setting  
When using Internet Services, it is recommended to make direct  
connection without going through a proxy server.  
NOTE: When connection through a proxy server has been made,  
it may take a long time to set the IP address using the browser  
and the screen may not be displayed. When this occurs, set the IP  
address at the browser without going through a proxy server. For  
details on how to define these settings, refer to the browser  
documentation.  
Port Number Setting  
The default port number of Internet Services is “80”. The port  
number can be changed on the Properties screen > Protocol  
Settings > HTTP. The port numbers that can be set at “80” or  
“8,000” to “9,999”  
To enter the port number at the browser after it has been changed,  
you need to add a “:” after IP address or Internet address before  
adding it.  
For example, specify the port number as follows after it has been  
defined as “8080”.  
http://IP address: 8080 or http://Internet address: 8080  
NOTE: The port number can be checked in the “Maintenance”  
item on the “Printer Settings List”. For details on printing the  
“Printer Settings “, refer to the System Administrator’s Guide.  
2–115  
       
USER GUIDE (PRINT)  
Accessing Internet Services from the Workstation  
To access the Printer's Internet Services from your workstation,  
set your browser so that it will not try to access the Printer through  
a proxy server.  
1
2
Open your Internet Browser program on your workstation.  
Enter the Printer's IP Address (as seen on the System Settings  
List) into the Address or Location field of the browser.  
3
Press the Enter key on your keyboard. The Home Page for the  
machine is displayed.  
2–116  
   
USER GUIDE (PRINT)  
Internet Services Features  
There are seven features that are available within Internet  
Services. Each contains specific options, depending on the task  
you are performing. The following list shows the features and their  
usage:  
Services  
Jobs  
You can process print-ready documents using the Services Page.  
Allows you to view the active processed Job list/job history list and  
delete jobs.  
Status  
Allows you to review the status of the Printer's Trays and  
Consumables and displays the host device status.  
Properties  
Allows you to configure the Printer for job processing and network  
communications, as well as to download scanned originals from  
the Printer to your desktop.  
Maintenance  
Support  
Displays the Printer's error history.  
Provides an editable, Internet hot link to an external Customer  
Support Site.  
Job Template  
Allows you to create, edit, copy, and delete job templates that can  
be applied to jobs on the machine.  
For more information on Job Template, refer to the User Guide  
(Scan).  
NOTE: The rectangular button, containing a semi-circular arrow, is  
meant to be used to Refresh the current screen.  
2–117  
   
USER GUIDE (PRINT)  
Printing Documents Using the Services Feature  
Print-ready documents can be quickly and easily submitted for  
printing using the Services feature. A print-ready document is a  
file that has been formatted and saved for printing from the  
application that created it or was printed to file by a print driver.  
NOTE: Selecting print and/or finishing options from the Services  
feature will override, but not reformat existing PostScript or PCL  
print-ready documents.  
The following formats can be printed from the Services page:  
PostScript  
PDF  
2–118  
   
USER GUIDE (PRINT)  
Printing Documents  
To Submit a Document for Printing  
1
2
Access Internet Services.  
Select the Services tab or select Services from the machine’s  
Home Page.  
3
Select your printing options from the drop-down lists according to  
your job requirements:  
Paper Tray  
Output Destination  
No. of Sets  
2 Sided Print  
File Name  
4
5
Type the path and file name or select Browse to locate the print-  
ready file to process.  
When finished with your selections, select the Start button to  
process your job.  
NOTE: Do not exit the Job Submission Page until the page  
redraws after your job has been submitted.  
2–119  
 
USER GUIDE (PRINT)  
Viewing/Deleting Jobs Using the Jobs Feature  
You can view all active print jobs that are being processed. Details  
of the jobs include the job name, owner, status and type of job,  
and the number of sets processed.  
Viewing the Active Jobs List  
1
Access Internet Services.  
For more information on how to access Internet Services, refer to  
Accessing Internet Services From the Workstation, in the User  
Guide (Print).  
2
3
Select the Jobs tab or select Jobs on the machine’s Home Page.  
The Job List page is displayed.  
Select the Refresh Status button to update the job lists and status  
information.  
NOTE: Automatic update will not be carried over if a job is being  
processed even if Auto Refresh Interval is specified.  
2–120  
     
USER GUIDE (PRINT)  
Deleting Jobs  
1
Access Internet Services.  
For more information on how to access Internet Services, refer to  
Accessing Internet Services From the Workstation, in the User  
Guide (Print).  
2
3
4
Select the Jobs tab or select Jobs on the machine’s Home Page.  
The Job List page is displayed.  
Select the check box to the left of the job(s) that you wish to  
delete.  
Select the Delete button displayed in the top right corner of the  
screen’s right panel. The selected job(s) will be deleted.  
2–121  
 
USER GUIDE (PRINT)  
2–122  
Scanning User Guide  
WorkCentre M24  
Printer/Copier  
TABLE OF CONTENTS  
Table of Contents  
Scanning Using Mailboxes 2  
Scanning Using Templates 2  
How to Scan Using Mailboxes 3  
Output Color 6  
Scanning Resolution 8  
2 Sided Originals 9  
2 Sided Originals 12  
Reduce/Enlarge 13  
Using Presets 13  
Using Variable% 14  
Using Auto % 15  
Scan Size 16  
Bound Originals 17  
Mixed Size Originals 19  
Border Erase 20  
Original Type 23  
Image Compression 24  
Lighter/Darker/Contrast 25  
File Format 26  
Auto Exposure 27  
How to Pause or Cancel a Scanning Job 28  
iii  
TABLE OF CONTENTS  
How to Cancel Scanning Jobs from the Workstation 28  
Checking a Scan Job 29  
Deleting a Scan Job 30  
Scanning in Batches 31  
Retrieving/Deleting Scanned Documents 32  
Retrieving a Scanned Document 32  
Deleting a Scanned Document 32  
Configuring the Client for Scanning 33  
Required Environment 33  
Installation 34  
Uninstallation 34  
Changing Network Scanner Utility Settings 35  
Importing to an Application 35  
Requirements 36  
Scan and Mail 37  
Fax 40  
iv  
3. User Guide (Scan)  
Scanning Overview  
Your new Xerox WorkCentre M24 printer/copier, also referred to  
as the WorkCentre 24, can also be used as a scanner. You can  
either store your scanned job in a mailbox on the printer and  
retrieve it at your workstation, or you can select a template, that  
you have previously created using Internet services, on your  
desktop. The template will determine the characteristics of your  
scanned job and its destination.  
3–1  
     
USER GUIDE (SCAN)  
Scanning Using Mailboxes  
The scanner function is available when you are connected to the  
network environment using TCP/IP protocol.  
You can scan your originals using the printer/copier and apply  
most of the features to scanned output, just as when making  
copies. The scans are stored in an electronic mailbox that has  
been created in the machine. The stored data can be retrieved on  
your client workstation if it has the appropriate scanning driver and  
if it has been connected to the network.  
Scanning Using Templates  
Job Templates can be created, edited, copied, and deleted using  
Internet Services. You can create these templates with different  
features and settings that will be applied to specified scan jobs on  
the machine. You can retrieve the job template by selecting the  
Job Template tab in Internet Services. Up to 250 job templates can  
be stored on the machine.  
For more information on Internet Services, refer to the User Guide  
(Print).  
3–2  
           
USER GUIDE (SCAN)  
How to Scan Using Mailboxes  
You can scan originals, and then store the scanned document in  
mailboxes. The scanned document can be saved in JPEG or  
TIFF format.  
NOTE: In order to use this machine as a scanner, the IP address,  
Port, and mailboxes must be properly configured. Contact your  
System Administrator to set up a mailbox for you.  
1
2
Place the document in the DADF or on the Document Glass.  
Select Scan from the Menu screen. The Basic Scanning screen is  
displayed.  
3
Select Mailbox. The Mailbox screen is displayed.  
3–3  
     
USER GUIDE (SCAN)  
4
Select the mailbox where the scanned data is to be stored.  
You can go to the previous screen by touching the up arrow, and  
the next screen by touching the down arrow. Or using the  
numeric keypad, you can enter numbers in the Go to box to go  
directly to a specific Mailbox.  
Once a mailbox is selected, any documents stored in the box will  
be displayed in the Number of Docs box.  
NOTE: If you select Mailbox and press Document List, you can  
check the documents stored in the Mailbox.  
5
Press Start to begin scanning, or press Close to select additional  
scanning functions. The scan data will be saved in the specified  
mailbox.  
For more information on scanning functions, refer to the following  
sections.  
To view or retrieve scanned documents, refer to the Managing  
Scanned Documents section in this chapter.  
3–4  
USER GUIDE (SCAN)  
Basic Scanning Tab  
Below is a brief explanation of each feature available on the Basic  
Scanning tab. Each feature is explained in detail on the following  
pages.  
E-Mail  
Allows you to scan originals and send the data to an email  
address.  
Mailbox  
Job Template  
Allows you to scan originals and then store the scan data in  
mailboxes. The scan data can be saved in JPEG or TIFF format.  
Allows you to apply preexisting job templates to jobs on the  
machine.  
Output Color  
Allows you to select the output color for specific types of originals.  
You can choose from Auto, Full Color, Grayscale, or Black.  
Scan Resolution  
2 Sided Originals  
Allows you to select the desired scan resolution. Select from 200  
dpi, 300 dpi, 400 dpi, or 600 dpi.  
You can scan both sides of 2-sided originals automatically.  
3–5  
       
USER GUIDE (SCAN)  
Output Color  
Output Color allows you to define the kind of original document  
you wish to scan. The default is Auto.  
The following options are available:  
Auto  
The Auto Color option enables the copier to determine if the  
document is black and white or color.  
The DADF must be closed for the Auto option to function. In order  
for the scanner to accurately sense color on a document, the color  
area must be greater than 50 mm2 (approximately 2 inches2). If  
the color area is less, select the Full Color option. Very dark  
colors may be sensed as black. In this case, select the Full Color  
option as well.  
Full Color  
Grayscale  
Black  
Best used when scanning color originals. The text in the  
document will be clearer, and the color graduation will be  
represented in greater detail.  
Select when scanning originals with different shades of black and  
white. This option can be used for originals that cannot be  
scanned in black and white only.  
Select when the desired output is a black and white copy. Black  
and white copies can be made from any original. With Black  
selected only Black toner is used.  
3–6  
     
USER GUIDE (SCAN)  
1
2
Load your originals and select the mailbox where the scanned  
data is to be stored.  
Select the Output Color from the Basic Scanning screen.  
3
Select additional scanning features, or press Start to begin  
scanning.  
3–7  
USER GUIDE (SCAN)  
Scanning Resolution  
Scan Resolution allows you to select the desired scan resolution.  
Select from 200 dpi, 300 dpi, 400 dpi, or 600 dpi.  
The higher the scanning resolution, the larger the image file  
created.  
1
2
Load your originals and select the mailbox where the scanned  
data is to be stored.  
Select the desired Scan Resolution from the Basic Scanning  
screen.  
3
Select additional scanning features, or press Start to begin  
scanning.  
3–8  
     
USER GUIDE (SCAN)  
2 Sided Originals  
2 Sided Originals allows you to select 1 Sided or 2 Sided originals  
and output. You can select 2-Sided options from the Basic  
Scanning tab or select the More... button to get a complete set of  
options.  
The 2 Sided Originals feature can be set on the Basic Scanning  
tab and the Scan Options tab.  
NOTE: This feature is not available with a platen only  
configuration.  
2 Sided (H to H)  
2 Sided (H to T)  
More...  
Select 2 Sided Head to Head if your originals are two-sided, head-  
to-head.  
Select 2 Sided Head to Toe if your originals are two-sided, head-  
to-toe.  
Select the More... button to get a complete set of options.  
1
2
Load your originals and select the mailbox where the scanned  
data is to be stored.  
Display the Basic Scanning screen.  
3
Select the desired option:  
2 Sided (Head to Head)  
2 Sided (Head to Toe)  
More...  
3–9  
     
USER GUIDE (SCAN)  
When More... is selected the 2 Sided Originals screen is  
displayed.  
4
Select 1 Sided or 2 Sided.  
If 1 Sided has been selected, proceed to the next step.  
If 2 Sided has been selected, select Head to Head or  
Head to Toe for the Original.  
5
6
In Original Orientation, select the icon that most closely resembles  
the orientation for the loaded document(s), Head to Top or Head  
to Left.  
Select additional scanning features, or press Start to begin  
scanning.  
3–10  
USER GUIDE (SCAN)  
Scan Options Tab  
Below is a brief explanation of each feature available on the Scan  
Options tab. Each feature is explained in detail on the following  
pages.  
2 Sided Originals  
Use this setting to specify the original orientation when using the  
DADF for scanning.  
When the DADF is used for scanning, the original orientation must  
be set in order to specify the “Head” position of the document.  
Reduce/Enlarge  
Scan Size  
The Reduce/Enlarge feature allows you to copy the image at  
different magnifications.  
Allows you to scan the original for automatic size detection, or the  
size may be input manually.  
Bound Originals  
Mixed Size Originals  
Border Erase  
Allows you to scan the original for automatic size detection, or the  
size may be input manually.  
Automatically determines the correct paper size, based on the  
original size and the selected reduction/enlargement.  
Allows you to erase unwanted edge markings from the original on  
the scanned image.  
3–11  
   
USER GUIDE (SCAN)  
2 Sided Originals  
When the DADF is used for scanning, the original orientation must  
be set in order to specify the “Head” position of the document.  
2 Sided Originals can be set on the Basic Scanning tab and the  
Scan Options tab.  
1
Load your originals and select the mailbox where the scanned  
data is to be stored.  
2
3
Display the Scan Options screen.  
Select 2 Sided Originals from Scan Options screen. The 2 Sided  
Originals screen is displayed.  
4
5
Select 1 Sided or 2 Sided on the 2 Sided Originals screen.  
Based on how the originals are loaded, select either Head to Top  
or Head to Left from Original Orientation.  
6
Select additional scanning features, or press Start to begin  
scanning.  
3–12  
     
USER GUIDE (SCAN)  
Reduce/Enlarge  
The Reduce/Enlarge feature allows you to copy the image at  
different magnifications.  
The following options are available:  
Preset %  
Variable %  
Auto %  
There are 7 preset percentages to choose from. The selected  
percentage displays in the value box on the Reduce/Enlarge  
screen. These presets can be changed in System Settings mode.  
Select the Variable% option to enter the desired percentage for  
Reduce/Enlarge. Use either the up and down arrows or the  
number buttons that display on the Touch Screen.  
This option automatically reduces or enlarges the copy, based on  
the size and orientation of the document and the paper supply  
selected. This option is applied only to standard size documents.  
Using Presets  
1
2
Load your originals and select the mailbox for saving the scanned  
data.  
On the Scan Options screen, select Reduce/Enlarge. The  
Reduce/Enlarge screen is displayed.  
3
4
5
Select Preset %.  
Select the desired percentage.  
Select additional scanning features, or press Start to begin  
scanning.  
3–13  
         
USER GUIDE (SCAN)  
Using Variable%  
1
2
Load your originals and select the mailbox for saving the scanned  
data.  
On the Scan Options screen, select Reduce/Enlarge. The  
Reduce/Enlarge screen is displayed.  
3
4
Select Variable%.  
Perform one of the following:  
Press the arrow buttons to increase or decrease the  
percentage value.  
Use the Numeric Keypad on the Control Panel to enter a  
specific percentage. Use C to clear the value entered.  
5
Select additional scanning features, or press Start to begin  
scanning.  
3–14  
   
USER GUIDE (SCAN)  
Using Auto %  
1
2
Load your originals and select the mailbox for saving the scanned  
data.  
On the Scan Options screen, select Reduce/Enlarge. The  
Reduce/Enlarge screen is displayed.  
3
4
5
Select Auto %.  
Select the desired Output Size.  
Select additional scanning features, or press Start to begin  
scanning.  
3–15  
   
USER GUIDE (SCAN)  
Scan Size  
The Scan Size feature lets you to specify how the size of the  
original document is determined.  
Auto Size Detect  
The copier automatically recognizes the size of standard originals  
in the DADF. This is the default setting.  
Standard Sizes  
Select the document size from one of the 11 preset sizes. These  
presets can be changed in System Settings mode. You must  
place the original on the Document Glass.  
Non-standard Sizes  
Allows you to manually enter the size of the document placed on  
the Document Glass.  
1
2
Load your originals and select the mailbox for saving the scanned  
data.  
Select Scan Size from the Scan Options screen. The Scan Size  
Input screen is displayed.  
3
4
Select the desired option:  
Select Auto Size Detect to have the machine identify the  
size of the original document.  
Select the appropriate size from one of the preset buttons.  
Enter the width (x) and the length (y) dimensions of the  
original document.  
Press the arrows to decrease or increase the X and Y  
dimensions. X dimensions range from 15 to 432 mm. Y  
dimensions range from 15 to 297 mm in 1 mm increments.  
Select additional scanning features, or press Start to begin  
scanning.  
3–16  
     
USER GUIDE (SCAN)  
Bound Originals  
The Bound Originals feature enables you to scan bound originals  
such as books, magazines or journals, notebooks, glued forms, or  
stapled sets.  
When this feature is selected, each page is scanned into a  
separate file.  
The pages of the book may be any size up to 8.5 x 11 inches (A4).  
The Center Erase option allows you to remove the shadow  
caused by the center binding of bound originals when they are  
scanned.  
CAUTION: Do not force the DADF down onto the book. Forcing  
the DADF down could damage it. Instead, leave the DADF open  
and apply a slight pressure with your hand to the book to keep it  
flat against the Document Glass.  
1
2
Load your originals and select the mailbox for saving the scanned  
data.  
Select Bound Originals from the Scan Options screen. The  
Bound Originals screen is displayed.  
3
Select the desired option:  
Left Page then Right  
Right Page then Left  
Top Page then Bottom  
3–17  
     
USER GUIDE (SCAN)  
4
5
Select the pages that you want scanned:  
Both Pages  
Left Page only  
Right Page only  
Enter the value for the Center Erase, if necessary.  
Center Erase is used to delete the center shadow from the  
output. Use the arrows to adjust the amount of erase.  
Center Erase values range from 0 to 50 mm.  
6
7
Place the open document face down with the upper outside corner  
of the right page in the upper left corner of the document glass.  
Select additional scanning features, or press Start to begin  
scanning.  
3–18  
USER GUIDE (SCAN)  
Mixed Size Originals  
This feature automatically determines the correct paper size when  
scanning different size documents. The correct paper size will be  
determined based on the original size and the selected reduction/  
enlargement.  
NOTE: This feature is not available with a platen only  
configuration.  
1
2
Load your originals and select the mailbox for saving the scanned  
data.  
Select Mixed Size Originals on the Scan Options screen. The  
Mixed Size Originals screen is displayed.  
3
4
Select On.  
Select additional scanning features, or press Start to begin  
scanning.  
3–19  
     
USER GUIDE (SCAN)  
Border Erase  
The Border Erase feature enables you to eliminate unwanted  
marks near the edges of the original from the output copy. The  
range for Border Erase is 0 through 50 mm in 1mm increments.  
Border Erase offers the following options which can be used  
individually or combined together:  
Top & Bottom  
Left & Right  
The default is 5mm.  
The default is 5mm.  
The default is 5mm.  
Center (Gutter)  
The selected settings are applied to both Side 1 and Side 2 of 2-  
sided copies.  
When the image is reduced or enlarged, the selected percentage  
will be applied to the border erase.  
When scanning, the machine adds a margin of 2mm to all sides.  
This cannot be eliminated.  
3–20  
     
USER GUIDE (SCAN)  
1
2
Load your originals and select the mailbox for saving the scanned  
data.  
On the Scan Options tab select Border Erase. The Border Erase  
screen is displayed.  
3
4
Select Normal or Variable Erase.  
Press the up or down arrows to increase or decrease the Border  
Erase amount for Top & Bottom, Left & Right, and Center.  
5
6
Select the icon that most closely resembles the Original  
Orientation.  
Select additional scanning features, or press Start to begin  
scanning.  
3–21  
USER GUIDE (SCAN)  
Image Quality / File Format Tab  
Original Type  
Image Compression  
Lighter/Darker/Contrast  
Auto Exposure  
When the Original Type is specified, the machine automatically  
makes adjustments to optimize the copy quality.  
Selecting this feature saves the scanned data in either high,  
normal, or low compression rates.  
Allows you to adjust the lightness, darkness and contrast of the  
scanned original.  
Prevents undesired marks or images that are printed on the back  
of an original from appearing on the scanned images.  
3–22  
   
USER GUIDE (SCAN)  
Original Type  
Original Type enables you to define the kind of original document  
you wish to scan. The machine automatically makes adjustments  
to optimize the copy quality based on the original type. The  
following types are available:  
Text & Photo  
Text  
Use for originals that contain pictures and printed text, as in  
magazines or professional journals.  
Use for text originals composed of fine line characters or other  
high contrast originals with bright, dense colors. Selecting this  
option suppresses background color.  
Photo  
Use for photographs or lithographs.  
1
2
Load your originals and select the mailbox for saving the scanned  
data.  
On the Image Quality/File Format tab, select Original Type. The  
Original Type screen is displayed.  
3
4
Select the desired option:  
Text & Photo  
Text  
Photo  
Select additional scanning features, or press Start to begin  
scanning.  
3–23  
     
USER GUIDE (SCAN)  
Image Compression  
When Full Color or Grayscale has been selected for Output Color,  
you can select how to compress full color originals.  
High  
Normal  
Low  
Files will be saved at a high compression rate. The file size will be  
small, but may impact image quality.  
Files will be saved at a standard compression rate. This is the  
best balance between image quality and file size.  
Files will be saved at a low compression rate. Image quality will  
be optimum, but file size will be large.  
1
2
Load your originals and select the mailbox for saving the scanned  
data.  
Select Image Compression from the Image Quality/File Format  
tab. The Image Compression screen is displayed.  
3
4
Press the desired compression rate.  
Select additional scanning features, or press Start to begin  
scanning.  
3–24  
     
USER GUIDE (SCAN)  
Lighter/Darker/Contrast  
Lighter/Darker enables you to adjust the overall lightness or  
darkness of the output image.  
NOTE: If Full Color or Gray Scale is selected in Output Color, the  
contrast level can be set as well.  
Contrast allows you to adjust the clarity of the image. If you  
increase the Contrast, the copy appears sharp & vivid. If you  
decrease the Contrast, the copy is softer.  
1
2
Load your originals and select the mailbox for saving the scanned  
data.  
Select Lighter/Darker/Contrast from the Image Quality/File  
Format tab. The Lighter/Darker/Contrast screen is displayed.  
3
4
Press the up or down arrow to lighten or darken the original.  
Press the up and down arrow to adjust the Contrast of the original.  
NOTE: Contrast can only be set when Full Color or Gray Scale is  
selected in Output Color.  
5
Select additional scanning features, or press Start to begin  
scanning.  
3–25  
     
USER GUIDE (SCAN)  
File Format  
File Format enables you to select the file format for saving  
scanned data.  
1
2
Load your originals and select the mailbox for saving the scanned  
data.  
Select File Format from the Image Quality/File Format tab. The  
File Format screen is displayed.  
3
4
5
Select the compression method.  
Press Save.  
Select additional scanning features, or press Start to begin  
scanning.  
3–26  
     
USER GUIDE (SCAN)  
Auto Exposure  
Auto Exposure automatically reduces or eliminates undesired  
marks or images that are printed on the back of an original from  
appearing on the scanned image.  
1
Load your originals and select the mailbox for saving the scanned  
data.  
2
Select Auto Exposure from the Image Quality/File Format tab.  
The Auto Exposure screen is displayed.  
.
3
4
Select On  
Select additional scanning features, or press Start to begin  
scanning.  
3–27  
     
USER GUIDE (SCAN)  
How to Pause or Cancel a Scanning Job  
You can cancel a scan job during the scanning process or delete  
scan jobs that are stored in the machine. In order to pause or  
cancel a scan job the procedure below:  
1
2
Press Stop to pause scanning. The machine will stop.  
Press Stop to end scanning, or press Start to resume scanning.  
How to Cancel Scanning Jobs from the Workstation  
You can use Internet Services to cancel scanning from the  
workstation.  
For more information on how to cancel a scanned document refer  
to the User Guide (Print).  
3–28  
       
USER GUIDE (SCAN)  
Checking or Deleting a Scan Job on the Machine  
This section explains how to check or delete documents saved in  
the mailbox using the Control Panel.  
Checking a Scan Job  
1
Select the mailbox where the job is stored.  
2
3
Select Document List. The screen for the selected mailbox is  
displayed.  
Check the document or select the document to be deleted. Select  
the up or down arrow to view your document.  
3–29  
     
USER GUIDE (SCAN)  
Deleting a Scan Job  
Select the document to be deleted, and then select Delete.  
NOTE: You can delete all documents listed by selecting the  
Select All button.  
The Confirmation screen is displayed.  
Check the contents on the screen, and then select Yes.  
Select Close repeatedly to return to the Basic Scanning tab.  
3–30  
   
USER GUIDE (SCAN)  
Scanning in Batches  
This section describes how to scan multiple originals as one scan  
job if you have more originals to be scanned than can fit into the  
DADF.  
1
Begin scanning your first original, then select Next Original.  
NOTE:  
When using the DADF, wait until the machine has  
completed scanning the first batch of originals before  
loading the next batch.  
If no action is carried out after the above screen has been  
displayed, the machine will assume that there are no more  
originals to be scanned and end the job.  
2
3
Load the next original and then press Start.  
Select Last Original after all originals have been scanned.  
3–31  
   
USER GUIDE (SCAN)  
Managing Scanned Documents  
NOTE: In order to manage scanned documents, the Scan Driver  
must be loaded on your client workstation.  
For more information about the Scan Driver, refer to the section  
entitled, Installing the Network Scanner Utility, in this chapter.  
Retrieving/Deleting Scanned Documents  
Images can be viewed, retrieved, or deleted from the Mailbox  
using the Printer’s Internet Services.  
Using a browser (Netscape Navigator 4.x or Internet Explorer 5.x)  
you can access any WorkCentre 24 on an IP network using TCP/  
IP protocol. Simply enter the printer/copier’s IP address as the  
URL in the browser and select the Properties tab to access the  
scanned documents stored in the Mailbox.  
Retrieving a Scanned Document  
To retrieve a scanned document perform the following:  
To retrieve the entire document, select the Retrieve  
button.  
To retrieve specific pages of the document, put a check in  
the Enable box, type in the Page Number, then select the  
Retrieve button.  
Open or Save the scanned document.  
Deleting a Scanned Document  
Select the document you want to delete, then select Delete.  
3–32  
               
USER GUIDE (SCAN)  
Configuring the Client for Scanning  
You need to install the scanner driver on your client workstation to  
retrieve scanned documents directly from the Printer’s Mailboxes  
into an image editing application.  
Installing the Network Scanner Utility  
Network Scanner Utility allows you to access stored data in the  
mailbox from a client. This section describes the installation and  
uninstallation of the Network Scanner Utility using the Driver/  
Network Utility CD.  
Required Environment  
To install Network Scanner Utility, a client must meet the following  
requirements:  
Target Operating System  
Client Workstation  
Network  
Microsoft Windows 95/98/ME  
Microsoft Windows NT version 4.0/2000/XP  
NOTE: Windows NT Server TSE (Terminal Server Edition) and  
Windows 2000 Server/Advanced Server Terminal Service are not  
compatible with this feature.  
i486DX4/100 MHz processor or above (Pentium 100 MHz or  
above is recommended.  
32 MB memory.  
40 MB or more of free hard disk space (not including space for  
scanned data).  
A client must be connected to a network and be able to  
communicate with the TCP/IP protocol.  
Target Application  
Software  
To import the data stored in the mailbox to application software,  
the software must be compatible with the TWAIN interface.  
3–33  
           
USER GUIDE (SCAN)  
Installation  
The Network Scanner Utility includes the following software:  
Network Scanner Driver  
Scan driver to import the data stored in the mailbox of the machine  
to software compatible with TWAIN.  
1
2
3
Insert the Driver/Network Utility (Windows) CD into your client’s  
CD-ROM drive.  
Open Windows Explorer, select the drive letter for your CD-ROM  
drive and open SCN\Disk1.  
Double click Setup.exe and follow the instructions displayed on  
the screen.  
Uninstallation  
This section describes the procedure to remove the Network  
Scanner Utility.  
1
Double click My Computer > Control Panel. Select Add/  
Remove Programs.  
2
3
Select Network Scanner Utility, then select Add/Remove.  
Select Yes.  
3–34  
     
USER GUIDE (SCAN)  
Changing Network Scanner Utility Settings  
For help in changing the configuration of Network Scanner driver  
settings, select Help in the driver (e.g., TWAIN) portion of your  
image editing application.  
Importing Scanned Data  
This section describes how to import data in the mailbox of the  
machine to the computer.  
Import data saved in a mailbox to an application.  
Importing to an Application  
1
2
Start the application program.  
NOTE: The application must support TWAIN.  
From the File menu, select the command for selecting scan  
source (TWAIN source).  
3
4
Select WorkCentre 24 from Sources, then select OK.  
From the File menu, select the command to import the image from  
the scanner. For example, select Import, then select TWAIN.  
5
Select the scanner for connection from the list, then select  
Scanner, or double click the displayed scanner name.  
6
7
Enter the mailbox password, and select Open Mailbox.  
Select the desired document, and select Import.  
3–35  
           
USER GUIDE (SCAN)  
Scanning Document to Send as E-mail  
You can scan a document and send it as an e-mail at the same  
time using this machine. This feature is known as “E-mail  
Scanning”. You can also set the maximum size of the e-mail.  
NOTE: Scanned documents cannot be printed.  
Requirements  
To send the document as an e-mail, you need to set up the  
following. Check with your system administrator or network  
administrator to check if the settings have been configured.  
Setting network environment and mail server  
registering user account  
setting mail server  
3–36  
   
USER GUIDE (SCAN)  
Scan and Mail  
The procedure to scan a document and e-mail it is as follows:  
1
2
Place the document in the DADF or on the Document Glass.  
Select Scan from the Menu screen. The Basic Scanning screen is  
displayed.  
3
Select E-mail. The E-mail screen is displayed.  
I
3–37  
 
USER GUIDE (SCAN)  
4
Specify the recipient of the scanned data.  
The options to specify are as follows:  
Item  
Description  
Default value  
To:  
Enter the e-mail address. You  
can also use the dial directory  
Not Set  
Subject:  
From:  
Enter the subject of the e-mail  
Auto Set  
Register the name of the sender.  
Machine E-mail  
This sender’s name will appear on Address  
the Send Header and Cover Note.  
Reply To:  
Errors-To:  
Enter the e-mail address of the  
recipient.  
Same as  
Sender  
Specify whether to send an Error Same as  
Mail when the data cannot be sent Sender  
due to wrong address being set or  
an error that occurred  
When the contents is Same as Sender:  
Select Same as Sender to set the address to the same as the  
senders address.  
When using an address list:  
Select Open Address Book. Select the Address Number or use  
the numeric keypad to enter the speed dial number at Go to will  
display the specified number at the beginning of the dial directory  
list. You also specify the index on the screen displayed by clicking  
ABCDE, FGHIJ, KLMNO, PQRST, UVWXYZ, 0-9 tabs. Selecting  
the up button will display the previous screen and the down button  
the next screen.  
NOTE: Only the address for e-mail can be used.  
When using the keyboard to enter:  
Select Keyboard. Use the keyboard to type the E-mail address of  
the recipient and select Save.  
3–38  
USER GUIDE (SCAN)  
5
Select Save.  
The display will return to the Basic Scanning screen  
If necessary, configure the scan settings.  
6
7
Press Start.  
Scanning of the document will begin and the scanned data will be  
sent to the specified recipient.  
3–39  
USER GUIDE (SCAN)  
Fax  
The Fax option on the WorkCentre 24 supports:  
Internet fax  
Phone fax  
The Fax feature is supported by a number of Quick Start Guides.  
The Quick Start Guides cover the following topics:  
Sending fax from PC  
Internet faxing  
Scan to E-mail  
A simple test routine to verify SMTP server on customer’s site  
The following additional documents are available to support Fax:  
Quick Connect Guide  
SA Guide  
Fax Reference Guide  
3–40  
 
Machine Administrator User  
Guide  
WorkCentre M24  
Printer/Copier  
TABLE OF CONTENTS  
Table of Contents  
Overview 1  
System Settings 2  
Setting and Changing the Administrator Password 3  
Entering the System Settings Mode 5  
Exiting System Settings Mode 6  
Changing Settings in System Settings Mode 6  
Machine Clock/Timers Setting 8  
Audio Tone Settings 10  
Setting Screen Defaults 12  
Paper Tray Attributes 13  
Setting Printing Priority Defaults 17  
Image Quality Adjustment 18  
Image Quality Setting 18  
Auto Gradation Adjustment 21  
Reports Settings 23  
Other Machine Settings 24  
Basic Copying Presets 25  
Copy Defaults 26  
Copy Control 39  
Original Size Defaults 40  
Setting Reduce/Enlarge Presets 41  
iii  
TABLE OF CONTENTS  
Setting Custom Colors 42  
Network Settings 42  
Allocate Memory 44  
Others (Print Mode Settings) 47  
Basic Scanning Presets 48  
Setting Scan Defaults 49  
Setting the Scan Size Defaults 53  
Setting the Output Size Defaults 54  
Setting Reduce/Enlarge Presets 55  
Other Settings (Scanner) 56  
Setting/Deleting Mailboxes 58  
Create/Check Accounts 60  
Deleting/Resetting Data by Account 61  
Enabling Auditron Mode 62  
System Administrator Data 63  
Delete/Reset All Account Data 64  
Printing Meter Reports 65  
Internet Services 66  
Fax 67  
iv  
4. User Guide (Machine  
Administrator)  
This chapter describes the features found in the System Settings  
Mode of the Xerox WorkCentre M24 which is also referred to as  
the WorkCentre 24.  
Overview  
The System Settings Mode allows you to change the machine  
default settings, and the image quality settings.  
4–1  
   
USER GUIDE (MACHINE ADMINISTRATOR)  
System Settings  
System Settings allows you to change the default of the following  
features:  
Common Settings :  
Change the default settings for:  
Date/Timers  
Audio Tones  
Screen Defaults  
Paper Trays  
Printing Priority  
Image Quality/Auto Gradation Adjustment  
Reports  
Sleep Mode  
Copy Mode Settings:  
Change the default settings for:  
Copy Defaults  
Control of Copy Operation  
Original Size  
Reduce/Enlarge  
Custom Colors  
Network Settings:  
Print Mode Settings:  
Scan Mode Settings:  
Set the default settings for:  
Port Settings  
Protocol Settings  
Set the default settings for:  
Memory Settings  
Other Settings (Printer Settings)  
Change the default settings for:  
Scanner Settings  
Other Settings (Scanner Settings)  
4–2  
   
USER GUIDE (MACHINE ADMINISTRATOR)  
Setting and Changing the Administrator Password  
This section explains how to set and change the System Settings  
Mode password. The default password is set to "11111". You  
cannot enter System Settings Mode unless the password is  
entered. Setting a password also allows you to output total reports  
and a list of registered mailboxes.  
1
Press the Access button. The Password Entry screen is  
displayed.  
2
3
Enter the password using the numeric keypad on the Control  
Panel, and select Confirm. The System Administrator Menu  
screen is displayed.  
NOTE: Your password will be displayed by an asterisk (*). If you  
make a mistake, press Clear (C) and re-enter the password.  
Select System Settings. The System Settings screen is  
displayed.  
4–3  
   
USER GUIDE (MACHINE ADMINISTRATOR)  
4
Select System Administrator Password. The System  
Administrator Password screen is displayed.  
5
6
Select Off to disable entering a password.  
Select On, and enter the new password using the numeric keypad  
on the Control Panel.  
7
8
Select Enter.  
Re-enter the password, exactly as you did in Step 5, and select  
Enter.  
NOTE: Enter the exact same number in Step 5 and Step 7. If you  
make a mistake, select Reset and return to Step 5.  
9
Select Close. You will be returned to the System Settings screen.  
10 Select Exit to exit the System Settings Mode.  
4–4  
USER GUIDE (MACHINE ADMINISTRATOR)  
Entering and Exiting the System Settings Mode  
This section explains how to enter and exit System Settings Mode.  
Entering the System Settings Mode  
This section explains how to enter the System Settings Mode.  
NOTE: The machine will not enter the System Settings Mode  
when an error message is displayed.  
1
2
Press the Access button. The Enter Password screen is  
displayed. The default password is 11111.  
Enter the password and select Confirm. The machine enters  
System Settings Mode, and the System Administrator Menu  
screen is displayed.  
NOTE: Your password will be displayed by an asterisk (*). If you  
make a mistake, press the Clear button and re-enter the  
password.  
If you want to cancel the operation, select Cancel.  
3
Select either User Mode or System Settings.  
User Mode - make copies and scan documents in the System  
Settings Mode. If you select Machine Status or Job Status  
while in the System Settings Mode, printer and copier total  
reports can be printed.  
System Settings - you can change the settings of features.  
4–5  
     
USER GUIDE (MACHINE ADMINISTRATOR)  
Exiting System Settings Mode  
This section outlines the procedure for exiting the System Settings  
Mode.  
1
2
When you finish performing the desired operations, select Close  
until the System Settings screen is displayed.  
Select Exit.  
Changing Settings in System Settings Mode  
This section provides an example of the basic procedures  
required to change settings in System Settings Mode using the  
System Clock Setting feature. Please follow these procedures for  
all the features in System Settings Mode.  
1
2
Press the Access button.  
Enter the password, and select Confirm. The System  
Administrator Menu screen is displayed.  
3
4
Select System Settings. The System Settings screen is  
displayed. Select System Settings.  
Select Common Settings. The Common Settings screen is  
displayed.  
NOTE: If you are setting a feature in Copy Mode Settings,  
Network Settings, Print Mode Settings, or Scan Mode Settings,  
press the desired button.  
5
Select Machine Clock / Timers. The Machine Clock / Timers  
screen is displayed.  
4–6  
       
USER GUIDE (MACHINE ADMINISTRATOR)  
6
Select Date, then select Change Settings. The Date screen is  
displayed.  
7
8
Select the desired Date format.  
Use the up and down arrow buttons to enter the year, month, and  
date.  
NOTE: If Cancel is selected, the machine will return to the  
previous screen without saving any changes.  
9
Select Save. You are returned to the Machine Clock / Timers  
screen.  
10 To make changes to other settings, repeat the procedure.  
11 When you are finished making changes, select Close until the  
System Settings screen is displayed.  
12 Select Exit. System Settings Mode closes.  
Setting the Common Settings  
This section describes the Common Setting items, which relate to  
the main features on the machine.  
4–7  
   
USER GUIDE (MACHINE ADMINISTRATOR)  
Machine Clock/Timers Setting  
This setting allows you to set the time and date. You can also  
determine the duration of time until the Power Saver Mode or  
reset functions engage.  
Machine Clock/Timers allows you to set the following items.  
Sets the Date (Month/Day/Year) of the machine's system clock to:  
Date  
Date Format - Y/M/D, M/D/Y, or D/M/Y  
Month - 1 to 12  
Day - 1 to 31  
Year - 2000 to 2099  
The date set here is printed on lists and reports. The default is  
2001, January 1.  
Time  
Sets the system clock time (H / M) by 12-hour clock display or 24-  
hour clock display.  
Hours - 0~23 (24-hour clock) OR 1~12 (12-hour clock)  
Minutes - 0~59.  
Set AM or PM if it is a 12-hour clock display.  
The time set here will be printed on lists and reports. The default is  
12-hour clock display, 0:00 AM.  
Time Zone  
Sets the time zone that you are in. Use the up and down arrow  
buttons to set the time difference from Greenich Mean Time.  
Daylight Savings  
Sets whether or not to apply daylight savings to the system clock  
time.  
Adjust Off  
Adjust On  
4–8  
   
USER GUIDE (MACHINE ADMINISTRATOR)  
Auto Clear  
Sets the time to wait before returning the Control Panel to the  
default screen. The amount of time until reset can be set to:  
0
OR  
60 ~ 240 seconds, in 60-second increments.  
Enter the value using the numeric keypad on the Control Panel.  
The default is 60 seconds.  
Auto Job Release  
Tells the machine to release the current job to enable the  
execution of the next job when a fault occurs during copying or  
scanning. The job can be executed only in parts of the machine  
that are functioning normally. Set the time to:  
0 - do not automatically release the job.  
240 ~ 5940 seconds (4 ~ 99 minutes) in 60-second  
increments.  
Enter the value using the numeric keypad on the Control Panel.  
The default is 600 seconds.  
Auto Print  
Allows the machine to automatically start print jobs when there  
has been no activity for a set amount of time. Set the time to:  
1 ~ 240 seconds in 1-second increments.  
Enter the value using the number keys on the Control Panel. The  
default setting is 10 seconds.  
Auto Power Saver  
Low Power Mode and Sleep Mode are part of the energy-saving  
mode. As time lapses, the machine lowers power consumption:  
Last Operation -> Low Power Mode -> Sleep Mode.  
Set the time to Low Power Mode from 6 ~ 240 minutes and  
Set the time to Sleep Mode from 0 ~ 234 minutes  
Both are set in 1 minute increments.  
NOTE: Low Power Mode cannot be disabled. The total set time of  
both Low Power Mode and Sleep Mode must be between 15 - 240  
minutes.  
4–9  
USER GUIDE (MACHINE ADMINISTRATOR)  
Audio Tone Settings  
This determines the conditions under which Audio Tones are  
used.  
Audio Tone Settings allows you to set the following items.  
Control Panel Select Tone  
Control Panel Alert Tone  
Machine Ready Tone  
Sets the tone when a button is selected on the display. It can be  
set to:  
Off  
Soft  
Normal  
Loud  
The default is Normal.  
Sets the tone when an incorrect button was selected, or an  
operation was attempted during an error. It can be set to:  
Off  
Soft  
Normal  
Loud  
The default is Normal.  
Sets the tone when the machine is ready for copying or printing. It  
can be set to:  
Off  
Soft  
Normal  
Loud  
The default is Normal.  
Copy Job Complete Tone  
Sets the tone when copying has been completed successfully. It  
can be set to:  
Off  
Soft  
Normal  
Loud  
The default is Normal.  
4–10  
   
USER GUIDE (MACHINE ADMINISTRATOR)  
Non-Copy Job Complete  
Tone  
Sets the tone when a job other than copying has been completed  
successfully. It can be set to:  
Off  
Soft  
Normal  
Loud  
The default is Normal.  
Fault Tone  
Sets the tone when a fault occurs and the job is held in a faulted  
state. It can be set to:  
Off  
Soft  
Normal  
Loud  
The default is Normal.  
Alert Tone  
Sets the tone when a job finishes abnormally. It can be set to:  
Off  
Soft  
Normal  
Loud  
The default is Off.  
Low Toner Alert Tone  
Sets the tone when the Drum Cartridge or Toner Cartridge has to  
be replaced. It can be set to:  
Off  
Soft  
Normal  
Loud  
The default is Normal.  
4–11  
USER GUIDE (MACHINE ADMINISTRATOR)  
Setting Screen Defaults  
This allows you to chose the default screen that is displayed when  
the machine is turned on.  
Screen Defaults allows you to set the following items.  
Screen Default at Power On  
Select one of the following screens to display as the default  
screen when the machine is turned on:  
Features  
Job Status  
Machine Status  
The default is the Features screen.  
Features Screen Default  
Select one of the following screens to display as the default  
screen when Features is selected:  
Menu - gives you the option to select copy or scan.  
Copy - displays the copy feature tabs.  
Scan - displays the scan feature tabs.  
Fax - displays the fax feature tabs if optional Fax is installed.  
The default is the Copy Screen.  
4–12  
   
USER GUIDE (MACHINE ADMINISTRATOR)  
Paper Tray Attributes  
This enables you to set the type and priority of paper loaded in  
trays, image quality processing settings by paper type, and other  
paper tray related settings.  
Paper Tray Attributes allows you to set the following items.  
Custom Paper Name  
Paper Type  
Allows you to set up to 5 custom paper types. The paper must be  
plain, bond, or recycled. Set a name up to 12 characters long for  
custom paper 1 to 5 using letters and symbols.  
Sets up the type of paper loaded in Trays 1, 2, 3, 4, and 5  
(Bypass).  
Plain paper, recycled paper, bond paper and Custom Paper 1  
~ 5 can be loaded in Trays 1 - 4.  
Enter the setting on the Numeric Keypad using the numbers listed  
in the following table.  
The default is 14, or Bond Paper.  
For more information on recommended paper types, refer to the  
Recommended Materials List.  
Setting  
Description  
Comments  
14  
Color-exclusive or laser print paper, usually  
24 or 28 lb., such as Xerox Digital Color  
Expressions+ 24 and 28 lb. In general, use for  
81 - 105 gsm paper.  
Bond Paper  
Plain Paper  
0
Office environment or multipurpose paper  
usually 18 or 20 lb., such as Xerox Business  
Multipurpose 4200 and Premium  
Multipurpose 4024 20 lb. In general, use for  
64 - 80 gsm paper.  
3
Environmentally responsible paper usually 18  
or 20 lb. In general, use for 64 - 80 gsm  
paper.  
Recycled Paper  
Custom Paper 1  
161  
User defined paper name for paper loaded in  
Tray. Responds equivalent to Plain Paper as  
printer default. If using Bond or Recycled  
paper, change the Image Quality value. Refer  
to Image Quality in Paper Tray Attributes.  
162  
User defined paper name for paper loaded in  
Tray. Responds equivalent to Plain Paper as  
printer default. If using Bond or Recycled  
paper, change the Image Quality value. Refer  
to Image Quality in Paper Tray Attributes.  
Custom Paper 2  
4–13  
   
USER GUIDE (MACHINE ADMINISTRATOR)  
Setting  
Description  
Comments  
163  
User defined paper name for paper loaded in  
Tray. Responds equivalent to Plain Paper as  
printer default. If using Bond or Recycled  
paper, change the Image Quality value. Refer  
to Image Quality in Paper Tray Attributes.  
Custom Paper 3  
164  
165  
16  
User defined paper name for paper loaded in  
Tray. Responds equivalent to Plain Paper as  
printer default. If using Bond or Recycled  
paper, change the Image Quality value. Refer  
to Image Quality in Paper Tray Attributes.  
Custom Paper 4  
Custom Paper 5  
Lightweight *  
User defined paper name for paper loaded in  
Tray. Responds equivalent to Plain Paper as  
printer default. If using Bond or Recycled  
paper, change the Image Quality value. Refer  
to Image Quality in Paper Tray Attributes.  
Office environment paper usually 16 lb. In  
general, use for 55 - 63 gsm paper.  
5
1
For use with transparencies.  
Transparency *  
Heavyweight 1 *  
Color-exclusive or office environment paper.  
In general, use for 106 - 169 gsm paper.  
8
Color-exclusive or office environment paper.  
In general, use for 170 - 220 gsm paper.  
Heavyweight 2 *  
12  
Color-exclusive or office environment paper  
for use on Side 2 while duplexing. In general,  
use for 106 - 169 gsm paper.  
Heavyweight 1 (Side 2) *  
13  
17  
Color-exclusive or office environment paper  
for use on Side 2 while duplexing. In general,  
use for 170 - 220 gsm paper.  
Heavyweight 2 (Side 2) *  
Labels *  
Label special application media.  
* indicates paper type for Tray 5 (Bypass) only.  
4–14  
USER GUIDE (MACHINE ADMINISTRATOR)  
Paper Tray Priority  
Paper Type Priority  
Select the order that Trays 1 - 4 are selected for Auto Tray  
Switching. You can select the priority of each tray: First, Second,  
Third, and Fourth.  
The same tray cannot be selected twice. The default is Tray 1 ->  
Tray 2 -> Tray 3 -> Tray 4.  
Set the priority of each of the paper types for Auto Tray Switching.  
Set the priority for:  
Bond Paper  
Plain Paper  
Recycled Paper  
Custom Paper 1 - 5  
Enter the setting on the Numeric Keypad using the numbers listed  
in the following table.  
Setting  
Description  
Auto Tray Switching Off  
Highest priority  
2nd priority  
255  
1
2
3
3rd priority  
4
4th priority  
5
5th priority  
6
6th priority  
7
7th priority  
8
8th priority  
4–15  
USER GUIDE (MACHINE ADMINISTRATOR)  
Image Quality  
Different image quality settings can be selected for Bond Paper,  
Plain Paper, Recycled Paper, and Custom Paper 1 to 5.  
Enter the setting on the Numeric Keypad using the numbers listed  
in the following table.  
Setting  
Description  
1
Best suited for color-exclusive bond  
paper  
2
Best suited for paper used in office  
environments  
4
8
Best suited for recycled paper  
Select if small white spots or streaks  
appear when printing on Plain paper  
only  
16  
32  
Select if small white spots or streaks  
appear when printing on Plain paper  
only  
Select if small white spots or streaks  
appear when printing on Plain paper  
only  
64  
Select if small white spots or streaks  
appear when printing on Plain paper  
only  
128  
Your Xerox Customer Support Center  
will set this if you are printing on  
paper that does not fall under any of  
the above categories. Use this setting  
to improve gloss on 28 lb. Bond  
paper.  
NOTE: 16 and 64 are valid numerical values when printing from  
the printer. When making copies using these settings, the result  
will be the same as 8 and 32 respectively.  
NOTE: Poor-texture paper refers to paper whose surface is  
uneven when viewed against a strong light.  
4–16  
USER GUIDE (MACHINE ADMINISTRATOR)  
Tray 5 (Bypass) Paper Size  
Defaults  
Paper sizes can be assigned to Tray 5 Standard Size buttons 1 to  
11. 11 sizes can be assigned to this paper size list.  
A/B Series Size -A3, A4 SEF, A4 LEF, A5 SEF, A5 LEF, A6,  
B4, B5 SEF, B5 LEF, B6  
Inch Size - 12 x 8", 11 x 17", 11 x 15", 8.5 x 14", 8.5 x 13", 8.5  
x 11" SEF, 8.5 x 11" LEF, 5.5 x 8.5" SEF, 5.5 x 8.5" LEF  
Others - 8K, 16K, 6K  
Variable - Set the X (horizontal) range between 140 and  
483mm, and the Y (vertical) range between 100 and 305mm in  
1mm increments  
Setting Printing Priority Defaults  
Select which job will be prioritized when the machine receives a  
copy job and printer job at the same time. If both are set at the  
same priority, jobs are processed in the order they are received.  
Depending on the condition of the machine, they may not be  
processed according to this setting.  
Copy Job  
Print Job  
Sets the priority that will be given to copy jobs.  
Enter the setting on the Numeric Keypad using the numbers listed  
in the following table. The default is 38, 3rd Priority.  
Sets the priority that will be given to print jobs.  
Received Fax  
Sets the priority that will be given to received faxes.  
(Optional with Fax)  
Received: Fax Documents  
(Optional with Fax)  
Sets the priority that will be given to faxed documents.  
For Print Job, Received Fax and Received: Fax Documents  
enter the setting on the Numeric Keypad using the numbers listed  
in the following table. The default is 48, No Priority.  
Setting  
18  
Description  
1st priority  
28  
2nd priority  
3rd priority  
No priority  
38  
48  
4–17  
   
USER GUIDE (MACHINE ADMINISTRATOR)  
Promoted Job  
Set whether or not to automatically overtake a job if there is  
another job that can be started when something on the machine  
prevents execution of a job.  
Enter the setting on the Numeric Keypad using the numbers listed  
in the following table. The default is 0, Promote Disabled.  
Setting  
Description  
0
Disables promotion of  
jobs  
1
Enables promotion of  
jobs  
Image Quality Adjustment  
You can set the default for Image Quality/Automatic Gradation  
Adjustment.  
Image Quality Setting  
The following items can be set in Image Quality Setting.  
Photo & Text Recognition  
The level at which the machine judges text or photos during  
document scanning can be changed when making copies by  
selecting Text&Photo on the Original Type screen.  
More Text - fine text can be easily identified as text.  
More Photo - halftone images, such as newspapers or  
circulars, can be easily identified as photos.  
Enter the setting on the Numeric Keypad using the numbers listed  
in the following table. The default is 3, Normal.  
Setting  
Description  
1
2
3
4
5
More Text  
Text  
Normal  
Photo  
More Photo  
4–18  
     
USER GUIDE (MACHINE ADMINISTRATOR)  
Output Color Recognition  
The level at which the machine judges B/W and color during  
document scanning can be changed when making copies by  
selecting Auto under Output Color.  
More B/W - a black & white original is easily identified.  
More Color - a color original is easily identified.  
Enter the setting on the Numeric Keypad using the numbers listed  
in the following table. The default is 3, Normal.  
Setting  
Description  
1
2
3
4
5
More B/W  
B/W  
Normal  
Color  
More Color  
Photo Reproduction Level  
You can adjust the color reproduction of images judged by the  
machine as photos when making copies by selecting Text&Photo  
on the Original Type screen.  
Heavy Text - the black areas of the image are intensified,  
creating a sharper looking copy.  
Select Heavy Text to emphasize black text in documents  
containing both text and photos.  
Heavy Photo - the tones in photo areas in the images are  
reproduced smoother.  
Enter the setting on the Numeric Keypad using the numbers listed  
in the following table. The default is 3, Normal.  
Setting  
Description  
1
3
5
Heavy Text  
Normal  
Heavy Photo  
4–19  
USER GUIDE (MACHINE ADMINISTRATOR)  
Photo Image Quality  
You can adjust the image quality when printing photos.  
Enter the setting on the Numeric Keypad using the numbers listed  
in the following table. The default is 1, Sharper, clearer photos.  
Setting  
Description  
0
1
Normal  
Sharper, clearer photos  
Color Copy - Auto  
Exposure  
You can set how the machine detects the density of background  
color and processes to remove the background color.  
Speed Priority - part of the original will be scanned to  
determine the background color level.  
Image Quality Priority - the machine pre-scans the  
document, and samples the entire document to detect the  
background color level.  
Enter the setting on the Numeric Keypad using the numbers listed  
in the following table.  
B/W Copy - Auto Exposure  
Configure how background color is removed when making B/W  
copies.  
Enter the setting on the Numeric Keypad using the numbers listed  
in the following table.  
Setting  
Description  
0
1
Speed Priority  
Image Quality Priority  
Image Enhancement  
Print data is smoothed to reproduce smoother images. This  
feature is enabled on print jobs only.  
Enter the setting on the Numeric Keypad using the numbers listed  
in the following table. The default is 1, Image Enhance On.  
Setting  
Description  
0
1
Image Enhance Off  
Image Enhance On  
4–20  
USER GUIDE (MACHINE ADMINISTRATOR)  
Auto Gradation Adjustment  
Auto Gradation Adjustment is a color calibration for the copier and  
printer. An Auto Gradation Adjustment compensates for  
differences between the actual and the expected toner densities  
for each color. An Auto Gradation Adjustment should be  
performed whenever there is a noticeable change in the  
appearance (quality) of the output, particularly changes in color  
tones or densities. Performing an Auto Gradation Adjustment on a  
regular basis will help to maintain consistent color quality over  
time.  
NOTE: Since an Auto Gradation Adjustment can affect all jobs for  
all users, it is recommended that this procedure be performed only  
by the Machine Administrator.  
Copy Job - Text  
Copy Job - Photo  
Print Job - Text  
Compensates tones when a text original is copied.  
Compensates tones when a photo original is copied.  
Compensates tones when printing text documents.  
Compensates tones when printing photo documents.  
Print Job - Photo  
NOTE: Printing the chart for Auto Gradation does not increase the  
meter count.  
NOTE: When gradation adjustment is executed, the following  
changes will be made to default copy settings set in System  
Settings mode: Copy density = Normal or Auto, Color Shift =  
Normal, Saturation = Normal, Color Balance = 0, Sharpness = 0.  
4–21  
     
USER GUIDE (MACHINE ADMINISTRATOR)  
1
2
3
On the Image Quality Adjustment screen, select Auto Gradation  
Adjustment.  
Load 8.5x11 inch or A4 paper into Tray 5 (Bypass). Move the  
paper guide to gently touch the edge of the paper.  
Select the desired gradation adjustment screen:  
Copy Job - Text  
Copy Job - Photo  
Print Job - Text  
Print Job - Photo  
Press Start. The Adjustment Chart is output.  
4
5
6
Place the Adjustment Chart face down on the Document Glass  
with both Magenta color patches against the left side of the glass.  
Place 5 sheets of white paper on top of the Adjustment Chart and  
close the DADF. Select Start.  
To continue Auto Gradation Adjustment with other screens, repeat  
steps 2 to 5. When you are finished, select Close until the System  
Settings screen is displayed.  
7
Select Exit to exit the System Settings mode.  
4–22  
USER GUIDE (MACHINE ADMINISTRATOR)  
Reports Settings  
Job History Report  
This determines whether the job history report will be printed  
automatically, and whether the reports/lists will be printed on one  
side or two sides.  
The following items can be set in Reports Settings.  
Sets up whether the information regarding already processed jobs  
will be automatically printed.  
Enter the setting on the Numeric Keypad using the numbers listed  
in the following table. The default is 0, Automatic Printing Off.  
Setting  
Description  
0
Automatic printing of  
Job History Reports Off  
1
Automatic printing of  
Job History Reports On  
When the job storage area fills up with 50 jobs that have not been  
printed, the past 50 jobs are automatically printed in chronological  
order. Print jobs that are currently printing or queued are not  
recorded on the Job History Report.  
2 Sided Report  
This determines whether the reports/lists will be printed on one  
side or two sides.  
Enter the setting on the Numeric Keypad using the numbers listed  
in the following table. The default is 0, 2 Sided Printing Off.  
Setting  
Description  
0
1
2 Sided Report Off  
2 Sided Report On  
4–23  
   
USER GUIDE (MACHINE ADMINISTRATOR)  
Other Machine Settings  
The following items can be set in Other Settings.  
Sleep Mode  
This sets up whether to allow machine to switch to the Sleep  
Mode.  
When Sleep Mode is disabled, timers in Auto Power Saver on the  
Machine Clock/Timers Settings screen cannot be set. The default  
is Enabled.  
NOTE: Low Power Mode cannot be disabled.  
Copy Mode Settings  
This section describes how to change the default for different  
copier settings.  
For more information on copying features, refer to the User Guide  
(Copier).  
4–24  
       
USER GUIDE (MACHINE ADMINISTRATOR)  
Basic Copying Presets  
You can increase efficiency for each copy job by setting frequently  
used trays and Reduce/Enlarge settings.  
Paper Tray - 2nd to 4th  
Buttons  
You can select which Paper Trays to display on the Basic Copying  
screen. You can set Trays 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 (Bypass) to appear in 3 of  
the 5 buttons displayed under Paper Supply on the Basic Copying  
screen.  
Enter the setting on the Numeric Keypad using the numbers listed  
in the following table. The default is Tray 1 for the 2nd button from  
the top, Tray 2 for the 3rd button from the top, Tray 3 for the 4th  
button from the top.  
Setting  
Description  
1
2
3
4
5
Tray 1  
Tray 2  
Tray 3  
Tray 4  
Tray 5 (Bypass)  
4–25  
   
USER GUIDE (MACHINE ADMINISTRATOR)  
Reduce/Enlarge - 3rd to 4th  
Buttons  
The 3rd and 4th buttons under Reduce/Enlarge can be changed  
on the Basic Copying screen. Select the ratio from the preset ratio  
buttons.  
Enter the setting on the Numeric Keypad using the numbers listed  
in the following table. The default is 64% for the 3rd button from  
the top, 129% for the 4th button from the top.  
Setting  
Description  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Ratio set to R/E Preset 1  
Ratio set to R/E Preset 2  
Ratio set to R/E Preset 3  
Ratio set to R/E Preset 4  
Ratio set to R/E Preset 5  
Ratio set to R/E Preset 6  
Ratio set to R/E Preset 7  
Copy Defaults  
Set up the defaults for different copy features. The machine  
returns to the defaults when the power is turned on, the machine  
is returned from the Power Saver mode, the Auto Clear timer  
times out, or the Clear All button is pressed.  
The following items can be set in Copy Defaults.  
Set the default for Output Color on the Basic Copying screen.  
Select one of the following options:  
Output Color  
No Default  
Auto  
Full Color  
Black  
Dual Color  
Single Color  
The default is Auto.  
4–26  
   
USER GUIDE (MACHINE ADMINISTRATOR)  
NOTE: If No Default is selected, an Output Color must be selected  
for copy jobs, or the machine will not start copying.  
NOTE: If Black is selected on the Basic Copying screen, the copy  
output will have the same image quality as Halftone, selected in  
Text&Photo.  
NOTE: When Dual Colors or Single Color is selected on the Basic  
Copying screen, the Original Type cannot be set.  
Single Color  
Set the default for Single Color on the Basic Copying screen.  
Enter the setting on the Numeric Keypad using the numbers listed  
in the following table. The default is 1, Red.  
Dual Color - Color Image  
Sets the default for Color Image in Dual Color on the Basic  
Copying screen.  
Enter the setting on the Numeric Keypad using the numbers listed  
in the following table. The default is 1, Red.  
Dual Color - B/W Image  
Set the default for a B/W Image in Dual Color on the Basic  
Copying screen.  
Enter the setting on the Numeric Keypad using the numbers listed  
in the following table. The default is 0, Black.  
Setting  
Description  
0
Black (can be only be set when Dual Color is  
selected)  
1
2
Red  
Green  
3
Blue  
4
Yellow (Y)  
5
Magenta (M)  
6
Cyan (C)  
7
Specified Color set to Custom Color 1  
Specified Color set to Custom Color 2  
Specified Color set to Custom Color 3  
Specified Color set to Custom Color 4  
Specified Color set to Custom Color 5  
Specified Color set to Custom Color 6  
8
9
10  
11  
12  
4–27  
USER GUIDE (MACHINE ADMINISTRATOR)  
Reduce/Enlarge  
Sets the default for Reduce/Enlarge on the Basic Copying screen.  
Select one of nine buttons. Seven buttons are registered as preset  
ratio buttons, 100%, and Auto %.  
Enter the setting on the Numeric Keypad using the numbers listed  
in the following table. The default is 0, 100%.  
Setting  
Description  
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
100%  
Ratio set to R/E Preset 1  
Ratio set to R/E Preset 2  
Ratio set to R/E Preset 3  
Ratio set to R/E Preset 4  
Ratio set to R/E Preset 5  
Ratio set to R/E Preset 6  
Ratio set to R/E Preset 7  
Auto%  
NOTE: If the default for Paper Supply is set to Auto, Auto% cannot  
be selected for Reduce/Enlarge.  
Paper Supply  
This sets the default for Paper Supply on the Basic Copying  
screen.  
Enter the setting on the Numeric Keypad using the numbers listed  
in the following table. The default is 0, Auto.  
If the default for Reduce/Enlarge is set to Auto%, Auto cannot be  
selected.  
Setting  
Description  
0
1
2
3
4
5
Auto  
Tray 1  
Tray 2  
Tray 3  
Tray 4  
Tray 5 (Bypass)  
4–28  
USER GUIDE (MACHINE ADMINISTRATOR)  
2 Sided  
This sets up the default for 2 Sided on the Basic Copying and  
Added Features screens.  
Enter the setting on the Numeric Keypad using the numbers listed  
in the following table. The default is 0, 1 to 1.  
Setting  
Description  
0
1
2
3
1 to 1 Sided  
1 to 2 Sided  
2 to 1 Sided  
2 to 2 Sided  
Output  
This sets up the default for Output on the Added Features screen.  
Enter the setting on the Numeric Keypad using the numbers listed  
in the following table. The default is 0, Auto.  
Setting  
Description  
0
1
2
Auto  
Collated  
Uncollated  
Output Destination  
This sets up the Output Tray for copy and print jobs.  
Enter the setting on the Numeric Keypad using the numbers listed  
in the following table. The default is 0, Center Output Tray.  
Setting  
Description  
0
2
Center Output Tray  
Finisher Tray  
NOTE: The Optional Finisher must be installed to use the Finisher  
Tray.  
4–29  
USER GUIDE (MACHINE ADMINISTRATOR)  
Margin Shift - Side 1  
This sets up the default for Side 1 in Margin Shift on the Added  
Features screen.  
Enter the setting on the Numeric Keypad using the numbers listed  
in the following table. The default is 0, No Shift.  
Setting  
Description  
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
No Shift  
Auto Center  
Corner Shift (Top Right)  
Corner Shift (Bottom Right)  
Corner Shift (Top Left)  
Corner Shift (Bottom Left)  
Corner Shift (Top Center)  
Corner Shift (Bottom Center)  
Corner Shift (Left Center)  
Corner Shift (Right Center)  
4–30  
USER GUIDE (MACHINE ADMINISTRATOR)  
Margin Shift - Side 2  
This sets up the default for Side 2 in Margin Shift on the Added  
Features screen.  
Enter the setting on the Numeric Keypad using the numbers listed  
in the following table. The default is 10, Symmetrical with Side 1.  
Setting  
Description  
0
1
No Shift  
Auto Center  
2
Corner Shift (Top Right)  
Corner Shift (Bottom Right)  
Corner Shift (Top Left)  
Corner Shift (Bottom Left)  
Corner Shift (Top Center)  
Corner Shift (Bottom Center)  
Corner Shift (Left Center)  
Corner Shift (Right Center)  
Symmetrical with Side 1  
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10  
Border Erase - Top &  
Bottom  
This sets up the default for the top and bottom Border Erase.  
Enter the setting on the Numeric Keypad using the numbers listed  
in the following table. The default is 5mm.  
Setting  
0
Description  
None  
1 ~ 50  
Set the border erase  
amount in increments  
of 1mm  
4–31  
USER GUIDE (MACHINE ADMINISTRATOR)  
Border Erase - Left & Right  
This sets up the default for the left and right Border Erase.  
Enter the setting on the Numeric Keypad using the numbers listed  
in the following table. The default is 5mm.  
Setting  
0
Description  
None  
1 ~ 50  
Set the border erase  
amount in increments  
of 1mm  
Center Erase  
This sets up the default for Center Erase. It is distributed along the  
center of the original image.  
Enter the setting on the Numeric Keypad using the numbers listed  
in the following table. The default is 0 mm.  
Setting  
0
Description  
None  
1 ~ 50  
Set the center erase  
amount in increments  
of 1mm  
4–32  
USER GUIDE (MACHINE ADMINISTRATOR)  
Original Type (Auto/Full  
Color)  
This sets up the default for Original Type on the Image Quality  
screen, when Auto or Full Color is selected as the color mode on  
the Basic Copying screen.  
Enter the setting on the Numeric Keypad using the numbers listed  
in the following table. The default is 1, Text & Photo (Halftone).  
Original Type (Black)  
This sets up the default for Original Type on the Image Quality  
screen, when Black is selected as the Output Color on the Basic  
Copying screen.  
Enter the setting on the Numeric Keypad using the numbers listed  
in the following table. The default is 1, Text & Photo (Halftone).  
Setting  
Description  
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Text  
Text & Photo (Halftone)  
Text & Photo (Photograph)  
Text & Photo (Color Copies)  
Photo (Halftone)  
Photo (Photograph)  
Photo (Color Copies)  
Color Originals (Map)  
Color Originals (Highlighted  
Originals)  
9
Color Originals (Inkjet Originals)  
NOTE: When Dual Color or Single Color is selected as the Output  
Color on the Basic Copying screen, the Original Type setting is  
ignored.  
4–33  
USER GUIDE (MACHINE ADMINISTRATOR)  
Auto Exposure  
This sets up the default for Auto Exposure, when Text&Photo,  
Text, or Color Originals is selected in Original Type on the Image  
Quality screen.  
Enter the setting on the Numeric Keypad using the numbers listed  
in the following table. The default is 1, Auto Exposure On.  
Setting  
Description  
0
1
Auto Exposure Off  
Auto Exposure On  
Lighter/Darker  
This sets up the default for Lighter/Darker in Light/Dark/Contrast  
on the Image Quality screen.  
Enter the setting on the Numeric Keypad using the numbers listed  
in the following table. The default is 3, Normal.  
Setting  
Description  
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
Light (+3)  
Light (+2)  
Light (+1)  
Normal  
Darker (-1)  
Darker (-2)  
Darker (-3)  
4–34  
USER GUIDE (MACHINE ADMINISTRATOR)  
Contrast  
This sets up the default for Contrast in Light/Dark/Contrast on the  
Image Quality screen.  
Enter the setting on the Numeric Keypad using the numbers listed  
in the following table. The default is 2, Normal.  
Setting  
Description  
0
1
2
3
4
Higher  
High  
Normal  
Low  
Lower  
Sharpness  
This sets up the default for Sharpness in Sharpness/Saturation on  
the Image Quality screen.  
Enter the setting on the Numeric Keypad using the numbers listed  
in the following table. The default is 2, Normal.  
Setting  
Description  
0
1
2
3
4
Sharper  
Sharp  
Normal  
Soft  
Softer  
4–35  
USER GUIDE (MACHINE ADMINISTRATOR)  
Color Saturation  
This sets up the default for Color Saturation in Sharpness/  
Saturation on the Image Quality screen.  
Enter the setting on the Numeric Keypad using the numbers listed  
in the following table. The default is 2, Normal.  
Setting  
Description  
0
1
2
3
4
Higher  
High  
Normal  
Low  
Lower  
Color Shift  
This sets up the default for Color Shift on the Image Quality  
screen.  
Enter the setting on the Numeric Keypad using the numbers listed  
in the following table. The default is 2, Normal.  
Setting  
Description  
0
1
2
3
4
Coolest  
Cool  
Normal  
Warm  
Warmest  
4–36  
USER GUIDE (MACHINE ADMINISTRATOR)  
Color Balance - Yellow,  
Magenta, Cyan, Black  
This sets up the default for each density level, Low Density,  
Medium Density, and High Density, for Yellow, Magenta, Cyan and  
Black in Color Balance on the Image Quality screen.  
The defaults are all 0.  
NOTE: The values set here will also be applied to Black and  
Single Color modes.  
Original Orientation  
This sets up the default for Original Orientation on the Scan  
Options screen.  
Enter the setting on the Numeric Keypad using the numbers listed  
in the following table. The default is 0, Head to Top.  
Setting  
Description  
0
1
Head to Top  
Head to Left  
Image Rotation  
This sets up the default for Image Rotation on the Scan Options  
screen. On during Auto refers to Auto Paper selection for Paper  
supply or Auto % for Reduce/Enlarge.  
Enter the setting on the Numeric Keypad using the numbers listed  
in the following table. The default is 1, On during Auto.  
Setting  
Description  
0
1
2
Always On  
On during Auto  
Off  
4–37  
USER GUIDE (MACHINE ADMINISTRATOR)  
Rotation Direction  
Set the default for Rotation Direction when Always On or On  
during Auto is selected in Image Rotation on the Scan Options  
screen.  
Enter the setting on the Numeric Keypad using the numbers listed  
in the following table. The default is 1, Portrait Original - Left Edge.  
Setting  
Description  
0
Auto (can be selected only when the  
machine is equipped with Finisher)  
1
2
Portrait Original - Left Edge  
Portrait Original - Right Edge  
NOTE:When the machine is equipped with a Finisher, the default  
will be 0, Auto.  
4–38  
USER GUIDE (MACHINE ADMINISTRATOR)  
Copy Control  
Auto Paper Off  
This is the setting for Copy Control.  
The following items can be set in Copy Control.  
Set which tray will be selected when Auto % or Independent X-Y  
Auto is selected in Reduce/Enlarge when Auto is selected in  
Paper Supply, on the Basic Copying screen.  
Enter the setting on the Numeric Keypad using the numbers listed  
in the following table. The default is 1, Select Tray 1.  
Setting  
Description  
1
2
3
4
Select Tray 1  
Select Tray 2  
Select Tray 3  
Select Tray 4  
Memory Full Procedure  
Set the processing method when the hard disk runs out of memory  
during a job.  
Enter the setting on the Numeric Keypad using the numbers listed  
in the following table. The default is 0, Disable.  
Setting  
Description  
0
Disable (Discard stored  
documents)  
1
Enables stored data  
Maximum Stored Pages  
This determines the maximum number of stored pages when  
copying documents. It can be set from 1 to 999 pages.  
Enter the number of the pages using the numeric keypad on the  
Control Panel. The default is 999.  
4–39  
   
USER GUIDE (MACHINE ADMINISTRATOR)  
Original Size Defaults  
This sets up the original sizes that will be displayed when the  
Original Size is displayed from the Scan Options tab.  
An original size can be assigned to Original Size Buttons 1 ~ 11.  
Setting frequently used non-standard size in advance prevents  
you from having to input the size each time. When you set up non-  
standard sizes, the range for X direction is 15 ~ 432 mm and for Y  
direction is 15 ~ 297 mm.  
Original Size Button 1 ~ 11  
The sizes that can be selected for Original Size Buttons are as  
follows. Select a button and set the size.  
The defaults are as follows. The order is from Original Size Button  
1 (Left Upper): A3, A4 SEF, A4 LEF, A5 SEF, A5 LEF, B4, B5 SEF,  
B5 LEF, 11x17 in., 8.5x11 in. SEF, 8.5x11 in. LEF.  
Setting  
Description  
A/B Series Size  
A3, A4 SEF, A4 LEF, A5 SEF, A5 LEF, A6 SEF, A6  
LEF, B4, B5 SEF, B5 LEF, B6 SEF, B6 LEF  
Inch Size  
11x17 in., 11x15 in., 8.5x14 in., 8.5x13 in., 8.5x11  
in. SEF, 8.5x11 in. LEF, 5.5x8.5 in. SEF, 5.5x8.5  
in. LEF  
Others  
5x7 in., 3.5x5 in., 8K, 16K SEF, 16K LEF  
Variable  
Setting ranges are: 15 ~ 432 mm for X direction,  
15 ~ 297 mm for Y direction in increments of 1 mm  
4–40  
   
USER GUIDE (MACHINE ADMINISTRATOR)  
Setting Reduce/Enlarge Presets  
This sets up the magnifications that will be displayed in Preset%,  
in Reduce/Enlarge on the Basic Copying screen. 18 different  
magnifications can be assigned to R/E Preset 1 ~ 7.  
R/E Preset 1 ~ 7  
Assign magnifications to R/E Preset 1 ~ 7.  
Enter the setting on the Numeric Keypad using the numbers listed  
in the following table. The default for R/E Preset 1 is 25.0%.  
Setting  
Description  
1
25.0%  
35.3%  
50.0%  
57.7%  
61.2%  
64.7%  
70.0%  
81.6%  
86.6%  
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
115.4%  
122.5%  
129.4%  
141.4%  
163.2%  
173.2%  
200.0%  
282.8%  
400.0%  
4–41  
   
USER GUIDE (MACHINE ADMINISTRATOR)  
Setting Custom Colors  
This sets up the user registered colors used in Single Color and  
Dual Colors on the Output Color screen.  
Custom Colors 1 ~ 6  
Assign user registered colors, Yellow (0~100%), Magenta  
(0~100%), Cyan (0~100%), to Custom Color Buttons 1 ~ 6. The  
default is 0.  
NOTE: Adjust the registered color so that the sum of Yellow,  
Magenta and Cyan is 240% or less.  
Network Settings  
Network Settings consists of Port Setting, which determines the  
type of interface of the main unit that is connected to clients, and  
Protocol Setting, which determines the necessary condition for the  
communication.  
For more information on setting the Network Settings, refer to the  
System Administrator’s Guide.  
4–42  
       
USER GUIDE (MACHINE ADMINISTRATOR)  
Print Mode Settings  
Memory volume for each interface, and printer-related settings  
can be set. Print Mode Settings consists of the following  
components.  
Allocate Memory  
Others  
Set the size of the reception buffer, where data sent from the client  
is temporarily stored, for each interface.  
Set printing area, substitute tray, banner sheet, and banner sheet  
tray.  
For more information on printer features, refer to the User Guide  
(Print).  
4–43  
   
USER GUIDE (MACHINE ADMINISTRATOR)  
Allocate Memory  
Allocate Memory determines memory volume for the reception  
buffer, where the data transmitted from clients is stored, for each  
interface.  
For LPD, SMB and IPP you can set whether or not to spool to  
memory, and where to spool. The assigned memory size when  
spooling to memory can also be configured (LPD and SMB only).  
The size of the reception buffer can be changed according to  
machine's conditions and your requirements. If the reception  
buffer is increased, clients using each interface may be released  
quicker. The maximum value you can set changes according to  
the amount of available memory.  
NOTE: When the memory size is changed, the memory will be  
reset, and the data stored in each memory area will be erased.  
NOTE: If the set values exceed the size of the installed memory,  
the system automatically adjusts the memory allocation when the  
power is turned on.  
NOTE: When a port is set to Disabled, corresponding items will  
not be displayed.  
The following items can be configured in Memory Settings.  
Set the memory size for PCLe.  
PCLe Memory  
The memory size can be set between 2.50 ~ 32.00 MB, in  
increments of 0.25 MB.  
PostScript Memory  
Set the amount of memory used by PostScript. This item will be  
displayed only when a PostScript software kit is installed.  
The memory size can be set between 8.00 ~ 32.00 MB, in  
increments of 0.25 MB. The maximum value depends on the  
amount of available memory. The default is 16.00 MB.  
HP-GL/2 Auto Layout  
Memory  
Set the memory size for HP-GL/2.  
This item only appears when the machine is equipped with PS-  
ROM. The size can be set between 64 KB ~ 5120 KB, in  
increments of 32 KB. The maximum value depends on the amount  
of available memory. The default is 64 KB.  
Receiving Buffer-Parallel  
Set the receive buffer on the parallel interface.  
The memory size can be set between 64 ~ 1024 KB, in increments  
of 32 KB. The default is 64 KB.  
4–44  
   
USER GUIDE (MACHINE ADMINISTRATOR)  
Receiving Buffer-LPD  
Spool  
Choose from the following options:  
Off - Spooling is not performed.  
While the machine is processing or printing LPD data from a  
client, it cannot receive other data from other clients through  
the same interface. The LPD reception buffer can be set  
between 64 ~ 1024 KB, in increments of 32 KB. The default is  
256 KB.  
Memory - Spooling is performed.  
Memory is used as the reception buffer for the spooling  
process. The size of the reception buffer for the spooling  
process can be set between 512 KB ~ 32.00 MB, in  
increments of 0.25 MB. The default is 1.00 MB.  
NOTE:Printing data bigger than the memory size set here cannot  
be received. If this happens, select Hard Disk Spooling or  
Spooling Off.  
Hard Disk - Spooling is performed.  
Hard drive is used as the reception buffer for the spooling  
process.  
The default is Off.  
Receiving Buffer-NetWare  
Set the reception buffer for NetWare.  
The memory size can be set between 64 ~ 1024 KB, in increments  
of 32 KB. The default is 256 KB.  
4–45  
USER GUIDE (MACHINE ADMINISTRATOR)  
Receiving Buffer-SMB  
Spool  
Choose from the following options:  
Off - Spooling is not performed.  
While the machine is processing or printing SMB data from a  
client, it cannot receive other data from other clients through  
the same interface. The SMB reception buffer can be set for  
64 ~ 1024 KB, in increments of 32 KB. The default is 256 KB.  
Memory - Spooling is performed.  
Memory is used as the reception buffer for the spooling  
process. The size of the reception buffer can be set between  
512 KB ~ 32.00 MB, in increments of 0.25 MB. The default is  
1.00 MB.  
NOTE:Printing data bigger than the set memory size cannot be  
received. If this happens, select Hard Disk Spooling or Spooling  
Off.  
Hard Disk - Spooling is performed.  
Hard drive is used as the reception buffer for the spooling  
process.  
The default is Off.  
Receiving Buffer-IPP Spool  
Choose from the following options:  
Off - Spooling is not performed.  
While the machine is processing or printing IPP data from a  
client, it cannot receive other data from other clients through  
the same interface. The IPP reception buffer can be set  
between 64 ~ 1024 KB, in increments of 32 KB. The default is  
256 KB.  
Hard Disk - Spooling is performed.  
Hard drive is used as the reception buffer for the spooling  
process.  
The default is Off.  
Receiving Buffer-EtherTalk  
Receiving Buffer - Port9100  
Set the reception buffer for EtherTalk.  
The size can be set between 64 ~ 1024 KB, in increments of 32  
KB. The default is 256 KB.  
Set the reception buffer for Port9100.  
The size can be set between 64 ~ 1024 KB, in increments of 32  
KB. The default is 256 KB.  
4–46  
USER GUIDE (MACHINE ADMINISTRATOR)  
Others (Print Mode Settings)  
In Others, several printer-related settings can be set.  
Print Area  
Set whether or not to extend the printing area. The default is  
Normal.  
Substitute Tray  
Set whether or not to switch to paper in a different tray when the  
tray that was selected in Auto Tray Switching runs out of paper. To  
substitute other paper, the size of the paper must be specified.  
Display Message - Displays the message to add more paper  
without substituting other paper.  
Use Larger Size - Substitutes with paper of the next size of  
paper larger than the currently selected size. The image will be  
printed at 100% magnification.  
Use Nearest Size - Substitutes with paper nearest to the  
currently selected size, and prints on that paper. The image  
will be automatically reduced if it is necessary.  
The default is Display Message.  
NOTE:If the paper size is specified by the client, the client setting  
is given priority.  
Banner Sheet  
Set whether or not to output copies with a banner sheet attached.  
Start Sheet - Banner sheet is printed before the job.  
End Sheet - Banner sheet is printed after the print job.  
Start Sheet + End Sheet - Banner sheets are printed before  
and after the print job.  
The default is Start Sheet.  
NOTE:Banner sheets are not output if stapling is set. Banner  
sheets are added to meters when they are printed.  
Banner Sheet Tray  
Select the tray to be used for the banner sheets. Trays 1 - 5  
(Bypass) can be selected. The default is Tray 1. The banner sheet  
will be printed on whatever paper size is loaded in the selected  
tray.  
4–47  
   
USER GUIDE (MACHINE ADMINISTRATOR)  
Scan Mode Settings  
These settings are enabled for the scan features.  
For more information on scanner features, refer to the User Guide  
(Scan).  
Basic Scanning Presets  
You can change the magnification percentages assigned to the  
buttons displayed in R/E Presets on the Basic Scanning screen.  
Setting frequently used scan ratios prevents you from having to  
change the setting each time you scan.  
The following items can be configured in R/E Presets.  
Reduce/Enlarge Presets  
2nd ~ 4th Buttons  
Set the ratios displayed for the 2nd to 4th buttons from the top  
down, for each of the feature buttons. Select available ratios from  
those currently assigned to R/E Preset buttons.  
Enter the setting on the Numeric Keypad using the numbers listed  
in the following table. The defaults are: 2 for the 2nd button from  
the top, 4 for the 3rd button, and 7 for the 4th button.  
Setting  
Description  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Ratio set to R/E Preset 1  
Ratio set to R/E Preset 2  
Ratio set to R/E Preset 3  
Ratio set to R/E Preset 4  
Ratio set to R/E Preset 5  
Ratio set to R/E Preset 6  
Ratio set to R/E Preset 7  
NOTE: This setting is not used when there is a DADF on the  
machine.  
4–48  
       
USER GUIDE (MACHINE ADMINISTRATOR)  
Setting Scan Defaults  
This sets the defaults for the scan features. The machine returns  
to the defaults set here when the power is turned on, the machine  
returns from the Power Saver mode, or the Clear All button is  
pressed. Setting frequently used features prevents you from  
having to change settings each time you scan. The following items  
can be configured in Scan Defaults.  
Output Color  
Set the default for Output Color on the Basic Scanning screen.  
Select from Auto, Full Color, Grayscale, and Black. The default is  
Auto.  
Scan Resolution  
Set the default for Scan Resolution on the Basic Scanning screen.  
Enter the setting on the Numeric Keypad using the numbers listed  
in the following table. The default is 0, 200 dpi.  
Setting  
Description  
0
1
2
3
200 dpi  
300 dpi  
400 dpi  
600 dpi  
Mixed Size Originals  
Set the default for Mixed Size Originals on the Scan Options  
screen in Scan mode. Set whether or not to use the Mixed Size  
Originals feature when the DADF is used for scanning.  
Enter the setting on the Numeric Keypad using the numbers listed  
in the following table. The default is 0, Off.  
Setting  
Description  
0
1
Off  
On  
4–49  
   
USER GUIDE (MACHINE ADMINISTRATOR)  
Border Erase - Top &  
Bottom  
Set the default for the top and bottom Border Erase amounts.  
Enter the setting on the Numeric Keypad using the numbers listed  
in the following table. The default is 2mm.  
Setting  
0
Description  
None  
1 ~ 50  
Set top & bottom  
Border Erase amount  
in increments of 1mm  
Border Erase - Left & Right  
Set the default for the left and right Border Erase amounts.  
Enter the setting on the Numeric Keypad using the numbers listed  
in the following table. The default is 2mm.  
Setting  
0
Description  
None  
1 ~ 50  
Set Left & Right Border  
Erase amount in  
increments of 1mm  
Center Erase  
Set the default for center erase. The center erase will be  
distributed evenly along the center of the original image.  
Enter the setting on the Numeric Keypad using the numbers listed  
in the following table. The default is 0 mm.  
Setting  
0
Description  
None  
1 ~ 50  
Set Center Erase  
amount in increments  
of 1mm  
4–50  
USER GUIDE (MACHINE ADMINISTRATOR)  
Original Orientation  
Set the orientation of the document when it is scanned.  
Determination of the top, bottom, left and right edges of the  
original changes according to this setting. If it is set to 0, Head to  
Top, the original image will always be saved rotated 90°.  
Enter the setting on the Numeric Keypad using the numbers listed  
in the following table. The default is 0, Head to Top.  
Setting  
Description  
0
1
Head to Top  
Head to Left  
Original Type  
Set the default for Original Type on the Image Quality/File Format  
screen in Scan mode.  
Enter the setting on the Numeric Keypad using the numbers listed  
in the following table. The default is 1, Text & Photo.  
Setting  
Description  
0
1
2
Text  
Text & Photo  
Photo  
Lighter/Darker  
Set the default for Lighter/Darker in Lighter/Darker/Contrast on the  
Image Quality/File Format screen in Scan mode.  
Enter the setting on the Numeric Keypad using the numbers listed  
in the following table. The default is 3, Normal.  
Setting  
Description  
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
Light (+3)  
Light (+2)  
Light (+1)  
Normal  
Darker (-1)  
Darker (-2)  
Darker (-3)  
4–51  
USER GUIDE (MACHINE ADMINISTRATOR)  
Contrast  
This sets up the default for Contrast in Lighter/Darker/Contrast on  
the Image Quality/file format screen in Scan mode. Set the  
contrast for the document to be scanned. The contrast setting is  
enabled if Output Color is not set to Black.  
Enter the setting on the Numeric Keypad using the numbers listed  
in the following table. The default is 2, Normal.  
Setting  
Description  
0
1
2
3
4
Higher  
High  
Normal  
Low  
Lower  
Auto Exposure  
Set the default for Auto Exposure on the Image Quality/File  
Format screen in Scan mode.  
Enter the setting on the Numeric Keypad using the numbers listed  
in the following table. The default is 0, Off.  
Setting  
Description  
0
1
Off  
On  
4–52  
USER GUIDE (MACHINE ADMINISTRATOR)  
Setting the Scan Size Defaults  
Set the sizes displayed on the Scan Size screen under the Scan  
Options tab. Any scan size can be assigned to Scan Size buttons  
1 ~ 11, except for Auto Size Detect.  
Setting frequently used scan sizes will prevent you from having to  
enter scanning size each time you scan. When entering non-  
standard sizes, set the size between 15 ~ 432 mm for the X  
direction, and 15 ~ 297 mm for Y direction, in increments of 1mm.  
Scan Size 1 ~ 11  
The following table shows the sizes that can be set to scan size  
defaults. Select a button, and choose a size.  
Setting  
Description  
A/B Series Size  
A3, A4 SEF, A4 LEF, A5 SEF, A5 LEF, A6 SEF, A6  
LEF, B4, B5 SEF, B5 LEF, B6 SEF, B6 LEF  
Inch Size  
11x17 in., 11x15 in., 8.5x14 in., 8.5x13 in., 8.5x11 in.  
SEF, 8.5x11 in. LEF, 5.5x8.5 in. SEF, 5.5x8.5 in. LEF  
Others  
5x7 in., 3.5x5 in., 8K, 16K SEF, 16K LEF  
Variable  
Setting ranges are: 15 ~ 432 mm for X direction, 15 ~  
297 mm for Y direction in 1mm increments  
The defaults are as follows. 5.5x8.5 in. LEF, 5.5x8.5 in. SEF,  
8.5x11 in. LEF, 8.5x11 in. SEF, 8.5x14 in., 11x17 in., A4 LEF, A4  
SEF, A3, 3.5x5 in., 5x7 in.  
4–53  
   
USER GUIDE (MACHINE ADMINISTRATOR)  
Setting the Output Size Defaults  
Set the sizes displayed for Output Size when selecting Auto % in  
Reduce/Enlarge on the Scan Options screen in Scan mode.  
Any output size can be assigned to Output Size buttons 1 ~ 8.  
Setting frequently used sizes prevents you from having to set  
sizes each time you scan.  
Output Size 1~8  
Enter the setting on the Numeric Keypad using the numbers listed  
in the following table.  
Setting  
Description  
A6 SEF  
Setting  
Description  
5.5x8.5 SEF  
4
9
73  
20  
84  
28  
29  
33  
34  
31  
52  
116  
54  
6
68  
7
A6 LEF  
B6 SEF  
B6 LEF  
A5 SEF  
A5 LEF  
B5 SEF  
B5 LEF  
A4 SEF  
A4 LEF  
B4  
5.5x8.5 LEF  
8.5x11 in. SEF  
8.5x11 in. LEF  
8.5x13 in.  
8.5x14 in.  
11x15 in.  
11x17 in.  
8K  
71  
10  
74  
13  
77  
21  
85  
30  
35  
16K SEF  
16K LEF  
3.5x5 in.  
A3  
5x7 in.  
4–54  
   
USER GUIDE (MACHINE ADMINISTRATOR)  
Setting Reduce/Enlarge Presets  
Set the Preset % ratios displayed in Reduce/Enlarge on the Scan  
Options screen in Scan mode.  
Any ratio can be assigned to R/E Preset 1 ~ 7, except for 100%.  
Setting frequently used magnification ratio saves you from having  
to change the setting each time.  
R/E Preset 1 ~ 7  
Enter the setting on the Numeric Keypad using the numbers listed  
in the following table.  
Setting  
Description  
Setting  
Description  
115.4%  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
25.0%  
35.3%  
50.0%  
57.7%  
61.2%  
64.7%  
70.7%  
81.6%  
86.6%  
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
122.5%  
129.4%  
141.4%  
163.2%  
173.2%  
200.0%  
282.8%  
400.0%  
4–55  
   
USER GUIDE (MACHINE ADMINISTRATOR)  
Other Settings (Scanner)  
This section describes how to set other scanner-related settings.  
The following items can be configured in Other Settings.  
Scan Service  
Set whether or not to enable scan features. The default is  
Enabled.  
Memory Full Procedure  
Set the processing method when the scanner runs out of memory  
during scanning. Set whether or not to enable documents stored  
so far.  
Enter the setting on the Numeric Keypad using the numbers listed  
in the following table. The default is 1, Enabled.  
Setting  
Description  
0
Disabled (Discard  
stored documents)  
1
Enables stored data  
Maximum Stored Pages  
Lighter/Darker Level  
Set the maximum number of stored pages for scanning. Set any  
number between 1 ~ 999.  
Enter the number of the pages using the Numeric Keypad. The  
default is 999.  
Set the default for the density assigned to Lighter ~ Darker in  
Lighter/Darker/Contrast on the Image Quality/File Format screen  
in Scan mode. Set the density between -100 ~ +100 in increments  
of 1.  
Lighter (+3) ~ Lighter (+1) must be set between -100 and -1, and  
Darker (+1) ~ Darker (+3) must be set between +1 ~ +100.  
Normal, 0, cannot be changed. Set so that the values increase  
from Lighter (+3) to Darker (+3).  
Select scanning density using the up and down arrow buttons on  
the left, and set the value using the up and down arrow buttons on  
the right.  
4–56  
   
USER GUIDE (MACHINE ADMINISTRATOR)  
Contrast Level  
Set the default density assigned to Lower ~ Higher for Contrast in  
Lighter/Darker/Contrast on the Image Quality screen. Contrast  
Settings are not enabled when Output Color is set to Black. Set  
the density between -100 ~ +100 in increments of 1.  
Lower ~ Slightly Lower must be set between -100 and -1, and  
Slightly Higher ~ Higher must be set between +1 ~ +100.  
Standard, 0, cannot be changed. Set so that the values increase  
from Lower to Higher.  
Select Contrast using the up and down arrow buttons on the left,  
and set the values using the up and down arrow buttons on the  
right. The defaults from the top are, -50, -25, 0, 25, 50.  
Color Space  
Set the default for Color Space.  
Enter the setting on the Numeric Keypad using the numbers listed  
in the following table. The default is 0, sRGB.  
Setting  
Description  
0
1
sRGB output  
Output by device RGB. This limits the file  
format to TIFF (with ICC profile). Profiles are  
used to enable output at tones close to those  
of the machine.  
NOTE: You can find profile data on the Driver CD.  
4–57  
USER GUIDE (MACHINE ADMINISTRATOR)  
Setting/Deleting Mailboxes  
Documents registered in a mailbox can be retrieved from the client  
into an application using the scanner driver. Up to 200 mailboxes  
can be registered.  
For more information on mailboxes and scanning, refer to the  
User Guide (Scan).  
1
2
From the System Settings Menu screen, select Setup Menu.  
Select Mailbox. Select the desired mailbox using the up and down  
arrow buttons.  
3
To create or delete a mailbox, select Create/Delete. Select any of  
the desired options described below.  
Password  
You can set passwords for mailboxes. Select the desired option.  
On - A password must be entered when selecting a mailbox.  
Off - Mailboxes can be set without a password.  
The default is On.  
Mailbox Name  
Set up names for mailboxes. Set names up to 10 characters long  
using alphanumerics and symbols.  
Check Password  
When a password is set, limits can be set for writing to and  
reading from mailboxes.  
Save (Write) - A password must be entered when a mailbox is  
selected.  
Print/Delete (Read) - A password must be entered when  
printing or deleting a mailbox.  
Always - A password must be entered for both operations  
described above.  
The default is Always.  
Delete/Save Documents  
Set whether or not to delete documents when they are retrieved or  
printed from a mailbox.  
Do Not Delete - Document will be saved.  
Delete - Document will be deleted.  
The default is Delete.  
4–58  
   
USER GUIDE (MACHINE ADMINISTRATOR)  
Auditron  
Auditron is an audit feature. This feature electronically records the  
number of copies or prints made for each user account and  
controls the access and use of the printer/copier.  
To enable Auditron for print you must set up user accounts for  
printing, and turn it on through Internet Services.  
Auditron Administration allows you to:  
Create, change, and delete up to 1000 user accounts.  
Control access to copy features.  
Control access to scan features.  
Limit copying to B/W, Color, or allow both.  
Limit the number of copies made per user account.  
Check the number of copies made per user account.  
Print account information.  
Reset account meters.  
4–59  
   
USER GUIDE (MACHINE ADMINISTRATOR)  
Create/Check Accounts  
To setup Auditron you must create user accounts. Users will then  
be required to enter the password setup with their account to  
perform certain machine functions. You can create up to 1000  
accounts. The following information is contained within each  
account.  
Password  
Set any password between 4 - 12 digits long.  
Account Name  
Set any account name up to 31 characters long, using letters and  
symbols.  
Color Access  
Account Limit  
Set whether or not to restrict color copying or B/W copying.  
Set the maximum number of copies that can be made with this  
account. The account limit can be set between 100 - 1999900, in  
100 page increments.  
1
Select Create/Check Accounts on the Auditron Administration  
screen. The Create/Check Accounts screen is displayed.  
2
3
Select an item that is not in use, and select Create/Delete.  
Enter a 4-digit number as the Password using the Numeric  
Keypad on the Control Panel. The password cannot be set if an  
identical password has already been registered to another  
account. When you have finished entering the Password, select  
Save. The screen for that account number is automatically  
displayed.  
4
5
Enter the desired password for that account.  
Select Account Name. The screen for entering text is displayed.  
4–60  
     
USER GUIDE (MACHINE ADMINISTRATOR)  
6
7
Enter the account name, and select Save. The screen returns to  
the Create/Delete screen.  
Select Color Access. The Color Access screen is displayed.  
Select the desired option, and select Save.  
Free Access - Allows both Color and B/W copies.  
Black Only - Allows only B/W copies.  
8
9
Select Change Account Limit. The Account Limit screen is  
displayed. Enter the maximum number of color copies using  
Numeric Keypad, and select Next. Enter the maximum number of  
B/W copies using Numeric Keypad, and select Save. The screen  
returns to the Create/Delete screen.  
Select Close.  
Deleting/Resetting Data by Account  
Information for individual user accounts can be deleted and reset.  
1
2
3
4
Select Create/Check Accounts on the Auditron Administration  
screen. The Create/Check Accounts screen is displayed.  
Select the account whose data is to be deleted or reset, and select  
Create/Delete. The Create/Delete screen is displayed.  
Select Change Account Limit to change the limits for Color or  
B/W copying.  
Select Reset Total Pages Printed or Reset Account.  
When Reset Total Pages Printed is selected, the number of  
copies made for the selected account is reset and returned to  
0. A reset cannot be undone.  
When Reset Account is selected, account data and the  
settings of registered account data are deleted. When this  
button is selected, a confirmation screen is displayed. If you  
select Yes, the account will be deleted. To cancel, select No.  
4–61  
     
USER GUIDE (MACHINE ADMINISTRATOR)  
Enabling Auditron Mode  
You can enable Auditron Mode for copy, scan, or both. When  
Auditron Mode is enabled, the user must select the Access button  
and enter the appropriate user account password to start using the  
machine.  
1
2
3
Select Auditron Mode on the Auditron Administration screen. The  
Auditron Mode screen is displayed.  
Select On or Off for Copy and Scan, and select Save. The screen  
returns to the Auditron Administration screen.  
Select Close until the System Settings screen is displayed.  
4–62  
   
USER GUIDE (MACHINE ADMINISTRATOR)  
System Administrator Data  
You can check the total number of pages printed for color and  
B/W. You can also reset this data.  
1
Select System Administrator Data on the Auditron  
Administration screen. The System Administrator Data screen is  
displayed.  
2
3
Check the total number of pages printed. To reset this data, select  
Reset.  
Select Close.  
4–63  
     
USER GUIDE (MACHINE ADMINISTRATOR)  
Delete/Reset All Account Data  
Five different types of data can be deleted from all accounts.  
All Accounts  
All Copy Access Settings  
All Account Limits  
Deletes all accounts and all account information associated with  
each account.  
Enables color copying for all accounts by setting the Color Access  
in all accounts to Free Access.  
Sets all Account Limits to the maximum number on the machine,  
1999900.  
All Total Pages Printed  
Print Meter Data  
Resets the Total Pages Printed for Color and B/W for each  
account to 0.  
Resets the meters in System Administrator Data for the total  
number of pages printed.  
1
Select Delete/Reset Account Data on the Auditron  
Administration screen. The Delete/Reset Account Data screen is  
displayed.  
2
3
Select the button for the desired operation, and select Delete/  
Reset. The Confirmation screen is displayed.  
Select Yes in the Confirmation screen. The details you selected  
are cleared. Deleted data cannot be restored.  
4–64  
     
USER GUIDE (MACHINE ADMINISTRATOR)  
Printing Meter Reports  
When a password for entering System Settings mode is set, you  
can print Printer Meter Reports and Auditron Reports.  
Print Meter Report  
Auditron Report  
Check the total number of pages printed on this machine. The  
number of printed pages is counted individually for color and for  
B/W.  
Check the number of pages printed by individual user accounts.  
You can print a report for a certain account, or all the accounts set  
up on the machine.  
1
Press the Access button. Enter the password and select  
Confirm.  
2
3
Select User Mode.  
Press the Machine Status button on the Control Panel. The  
Machine Status screen is displayed.  
4
5
Select the Billing Meter/Print Report tab. The Billing Meter/Print  
Report screen is displayed.  
Select Print Report/List. The Print Report/List screen is  
displayed.  
6
7
Select Auditron Administration.  
Select the desired report:  
Print Meter Report  
Auditron Report  
If you select Auditron Report, select the desired account number  
or All Accounts.  
NOTE: 50 account numbers can be selected at a time or all  
accounts can be selected as the account number.  
8
9
Press Start. The report is printed.  
Select Close.  
4–65  
     
USER GUIDE (MACHINE ADMINISTRATOR)  
Internet Services  
Internet Services are a series of web pages located within the  
machine network communication settings to be conveniently  
configured from a web browser running on a remotely located  
workstation.  
There are six features that are available within Internet Services.  
Each contains specific options, depending on the task you are  
performing. The following list shows the features and their usage:  
Services  
Jobs  
You can process documents using the Services Page.  
Allows you to view the active processed Job list/job history list and  
delete jobs.  
Status  
Allows you to review the status of the Paper Trays and  
Consumables and displays the host device status.  
Properties  
Allows you to configure the machine for job processing and  
network communications, as well as to download scanned  
documents to your desktop.  
Maintenance  
Support  
Displays the machine’s error history.  
Provides an editable, Internet hot link to an external Customer  
Support Site.  
NOTE: The rectangular button, containing a semi-circular arrow, is  
meant to be used to Refresh the current screen.  
For more information on Internet Services, refer to the Internet  
Services Online Help system. This system can be accessed by  
clicking on the help button, located in the bottom right corner of  
the Internet Services web page.  
For more information on how to access and use Internet Services,  
refer to the User Guide (Print) and the User Guide (Scan).  
4–66  
   
USER GUIDE (MACHINE ADMINISTRATOR)  
Fax  
For unique Fax information, refer to the Fax section of the System  
Administrator Guide.  
4–67  
 
USER GUIDE (MACHINE ADMINISTRATOR)  
4–68  
Troubleshooting Guide  
WorkCentre M24  
Printer/Copier  
TABLE OF CONTENTS  
Table of Contents  
Paper Jams at the Top Left Cover 3  
Paper Jams at the Left Center Cover 4  
Paper Jams at the Bottom Left Cover 4  
Paper Jams in Trays 1 to 4 5  
Paper Jams in Tray 5 (Bypass) 5  
Paper Jams in the Duplex Unit 6  
Paper Jams in the Finisher 6  
Paper Jams on the Finisher Top Cover 6  
Paper Jams on the Finisher Interface 7  
Paper Jams on the Center Tray Exit 7  
Document Jams on the Left Cover (Top) 8  
Jams on Original Input Area and Document Glass 9  
Stapler Faults 10  
Toner Cartridge 11  
Resolving Programming Problems 12  
Resolving Processor Problems 13  
Resolving Output Quality Problems Using Basic Copying,  
iii  
TABLE OF CONTENTS  
Added Features, and Image Quality Tabs 16  
Calling for Service 20  
Fault Codes 21  
iv  
5. User Guide (Troubleshooting)  
The Xerox WorkCentre M24, also referred to as the WorkCentre  
24, is designed to help you find and solve problems as they  
happen. The printer/copier can detect problems and display the  
corrective action on the screen.  
This section describes the printer/copier faults and how to perform  
the appropriate recovery procedure.  
Sometimes you may not succeed in your efforts to clear a fault.  
When this happens you should call Xerox. Before calling for  
assistance, perform the steps provided on the following pages.  
5–1  
 
USER GUIDE (TROUBLESHOOTING)  
Paper Jam Clearance  
When paper jams in the machine, the machine stops and a tone  
sounds. A message display in the message area of the Touch  
Screen with the corrective actions to take. Occasionally,  
simultaneous multiple paper jams occur or multiple sheets of  
paper jam during an extended copy job. A paper message  
displays until all paper jams in the printer/copier have been  
cleared. The Touch Screen displays the appropriate message  
screen for the area of the printer/copier, which needs to be  
checked until all jams are cleared.  
WARNING: When clearing the paper path in the Fuser area  
(located in the Paper Path Module), remember that the  
surfaces are hot. To avoid injury, proceed with caution when  
clearing the path.  
Paper may jam in several areas inside the printer/copier.  
Behind the Top Cover  
Behind the Left Center Cover  
Behind the Bottom Left Cover  
In Trays 1 to 4  
At Tray 5 (Bypass)  
In the Duplex Paper Path  
In the DADF  
In the Finisher (Optional Accessory)  
NOTE: Gradually remove the jammed paper so you do not rip it. If  
the jammed paper rips, be sure to remove all of the pieces.  
The action required to clear a paper jam varies with the location of  
the jam. Clearance procedures for each of these areas are  
provided in the actions that follow.  
When the jam is cleared successfully and all doors are closed,  
printing is automatically resumed from the state before the paper  
jam occurred.  
If the jam occurred during copying, press Start. Copying is  
resumed from the state before the jam occurred.  
5–2  
   
USER GUIDE (TROUBLESHOOTING)  
Paper Jams at the Top Left Cover  
This section describes how to clear paper jams that occur at the  
top left cover of the machine.  
1
2
Gently open the top left cover while lifting up the release lever.  
If the edge of the jammed paper can be reached at the output tray,  
pull the jammed paper in the direction of the feed-out tray.  
WARNING: The fuser area is very hot. Be careful when  
clearing a jam in this area.  
3
4
Remove the jammed paper.  
NOTE: If paper is torn, check for any torn pieces of paper inside  
the machine.  
If you cannot remove paper jammed inside the fuser unit, lift up  
the lever and remove the jammed paper.  
NOTE: After you have removed the jammed paper, return the  
lever to its original position.  
5
Press the center section of the top left cover to gently close the  
cover, and lift up Tray 5 (Bypass).  
5–3  
   
USER GUIDE (TROUBLESHOOTING)  
Paper Jams at the Left Center Cover  
This section describes how to clear paper jams that occur at the  
left center cover of the machine.  
1
2
Gently open the left center cover while pulling the release lever.  
Remove the jammed paper.  
NOTE: If paper is torn, check for any torn pieces of paper inside  
the machine.  
3
Gently close the left center cover.  
Paper Jams at the Bottom Left Cover  
This section describes how to clear paper jams that occur at the  
bottom left cover of the machine.  
1
2
Gently open the bottom left cover while pulling the release lever.  
Remove the jammed paper.  
NOTE: If paper is torn, check for any torn pieces of paper inside  
the machine.  
3
Gently close the bottom left cover.  
5–4  
       
USER GUIDE (TROUBLESHOOTING)  
Paper Jams in Trays 1 to 4  
This section describes how to clear paper jams that occur in Trays  
1 to 4.  
1
2
3
Open the tray where the paper jam occurred.  
Remove the jammed paper.  
Push the tray in gently until it comes to a stop.  
Paper Jams in Tray 5 (Bypass)  
This section describes how to clear paper jams that occur in Tray  
5 (Bypass).  
1
Inspect the paper feed entrance of Tray 5 (Bypass), and remove  
any jammed paper.  
NOTE: When two or more sheets of paper are loaded, remove all  
of the sheets from the tray.  
NOTE: If paper is torn, check for any torn pieces of paper inside  
the machine.  
2
3
Fan the paper you removed making sure that all four corners are  
neatly aligned.  
Insert the paper into the Tray with the printed side facing down  
until its lead edge lightly touches the paper feed entrance.  
5–5  
       
USER GUIDE (TROUBLESHOOTING)  
Paper Jams in the Duplex Unit  
This section describes how to clear paper jams that occur on the  
duplex unit.  
1
2
Open the duplex cover above Tray 5 (Bypass).  
Remove the jammed paper.  
NOTE: If paper is torn, check for any torn pieces of paper inside  
the machine.  
3
Close the duplex unit cover, and lift up Tray 5 (Bypass).  
Paper Jams in the Finisher  
This section describes how to clear paper jams that occur inside  
the Finisher when the Finisher (optional accessory) is installed.  
Paper Jams on the Finisher Top Cover  
1
2
Press the button on the Finisher top cover. Open the Finisher top  
cover.  
Remove the jammed paper.  
NOTE: If paper is torn, check for any torn pieces of paper inside  
the machine.  
3
Close the Finisher top cover.  
5–6  
         
USER GUIDE (TROUBLESHOOTING)  
Paper Jams on the Finisher Interface  
1
2
3
Move the Finisher to the right.  
Open the top cover on the Finisher.  
Remove the jammed paper.  
NOTE: If paper is torn, check for any torn pieces of paper inside  
the machine.  
4
5
Close the top cover on the Finisher.  
Slide the Finisher back to the left.  
Paper Jams on the Center Tray Exit  
1
2
Move the Finisher to the right.  
Remove the jammed paper.  
NOTE: If paper is torn, check for any torn pieces of paper inside  
the machine.  
3
4
If the jammed paper is hidden from view, open the exit cover and  
check inside.  
Slide the Finisher back to the left.  
5–7  
       
USER GUIDE (TROUBLESHOOTING)  
Document Jams  
If a document jams on the DADF, the machine stops, and an error  
message appears on the display. Clear the document jam  
according to the instructions displayed, then reload the document.  
Document Jams on the Left Cover (Top)  
This section describes how to clear document jams on the left  
cover (top) of the DADF.  
1
Pull up the handle at the center of the left cover on the DADF, and  
open the cover until it comes to a stop. The inside cover also rises  
up interlocked with the other cover.  
NOTE: Unlatch the document scanner cover completely to  
stabilize it. Gently open the covers.  
2
3
4
Remove the jammed paper.  
Close the left cover of the DADF until you hear it click into place.  
Make sure that the document is not torn, wrinkled, or folded, and  
load the document again following the instructions displayed.  
NOTE: After removing the jammed document, load the entire  
document again including delivered document sheets. Already  
scanned document sheets will automatically be skipped and  
scanning will resume from the previous document sheet.  
NOTE: Torn, wrinkled, or folded documents may cause document  
jams and damage. To scan such documents, directly place the  
document on the document glass to make copies.  
5–8  
       
USER GUIDE (TROUBLESHOOTING)  
Jams on Original Input Area and Document Glass  
A message is displayed if a document jam occurs in the Original  
Input Area of the DADF, or on the Document Glass. Follow the  
instructions displayed to clear the problem.  
1
If there is a document jammed in the Original Input Area, remove it  
gently.  
2
3
4
5
Gently lift up the DADF.  
Remove the jammed paper.  
Gently return the DADF to the original position.  
Make sure that the document is not torn, wrinkled, or folded, and  
load the document again following the instructions displayed.  
NOTE: After removing the jammed document, load the entire  
document again including delivered document sheets. Already  
scanned document sheets will automatically be skipped, and  
scanning will resume from the previous document sheet.  
NOTE: Torn, wrinkled, or folded documents may cause document  
jams and damage. To scan such documents, directly place the  
document on the document glass to make copies.  
5–9  
   
USER GUIDE (TROUBLESHOOTING)  
Stapler Faults  
This section describes how to clear stapler faults. Follow the  
procedures on the following pages when copies are not stapled or  
when staples are bent.  
NOTE: To staple copies, the Finisher (optional accessory) must be  
installed.  
1
2
Make sure that the machine has stopped, then open the front  
cover in the Finisher.  
Hold the staple cartridge by its lever, and pull the staple cartridge  
out to the right toward you.  
3
4
Lift up the staple cartridge to remove it.  
After removing the staple cartridge, check the inside of the  
Finisher for any remaining staples.  
5
6
Pull up the lever on the front of the staple cartridge.  
Remove the jammed staples together with the staple sheet.  
NOTE: When removing jammed staples, also remove the staple  
sheet. Do not remove unused staples from the staple cartridge.  
CAUTION: Be careful when removing jammed staples to avoid  
hurting your fingers.  
7
8
9
Close the lever on the front of the staple cartridge until you hear it  
click into place.  
Return the staple cartridge to its original position until you hear it  
click into place.  
Close the Finisher front cover.  
NOTE: A message will be displayed and the machine will not  
operate if the Finisher front cover is not closed completely.  
5–10  
   
USER GUIDE (TROUBLESHOOTING)  
Resolving Hardware Problems  
Toner Cartridge  
Problem  
Suggested Solutions  
Operator mistakenly  
removed the wrong  
toner cartridge and  
wishes to reinsert it.  
Reinstall the toner cartridge using the following procedure:  
NOTE:The following procedure may result in dry ink spillage on  
the floor. To protect the floor, put a disposable covering or drop  
cloth beneath and in front of the printer/copier.  
Reinstall the used and partially full toner cartridge by  
pushing in the cartridge until it is fully seated against the  
rear stop.  
Operator cannot  
reinstate a partially full  
toner cartridge after it  
has been removed.  
NOTE:Inform the Xerox service representative at the next service  
call about the above action since he or she may need to clean up  
the dry ink on internal printer/copier components.  
5–11  
     
USER GUIDE (TROUBLESHOOTING)  
Resolving Programming Problems  
Problem  
Suggested Solution  
The Control Panel  
Touch Screen does not  
respond to a touch  
command  
Press Clear All on the Control panel  
Touch a selectable button on the Touch Screen with one  
finger. A slight pressure is required to cause the printer/copier  
to react.  
If the problem persists, open the Front Door of the printer/  
copier. Close the Front Door and make a selection on the  
Touch Screen. If the Touch Screen does not respond to any  
touch commands, switch off the power. Wait 15 seconds, then  
switch on the power. Reprogram the printer/copier for the copy  
features that are desired.  
You cannot program a  
job while a screen is  
open  
Jobs cannot be programmed or copies made while some  
screens, such as administration screens, jam clearance  
screens, or consumable status information screens, are open.  
Follow the directions on the information screen. Then program  
the desired job.  
Printer/copier features  
are not selectable  
Certain features cannot be selected because of the previous  
selections. Generally, features or buttons you can select appear  
selectable to indicate you can use them with the previous  
selection.  
You cannot complete  
the programming. The  
Attempt to complete all the programming more quickly. The time-  
out values have been exceeded during the programming. The  
printer/copier times out values can be changed.  
too quickly and resets  
to the default settings.  
For more information about adjusting the machine timeouts, refer  
to the section entitled Setting the Common Settings, in the User  
Guide (Machine Administrator).  
5–12  
   
USER GUIDE (TROUBLESHOOTING)  
Resolving Processor Problems  
Problem  
Suggested Solution  
Transparencies  
Load transparencies by following the instructions in the section  
Loading Stock, in the User Guide (Copier).  
11 x 17 (A3)  
Remove each copy of 11x17 inch (A3) transparencies from the  
Output Tray before subsequent copies exit the printer/copier  
transparencies jam  
when exiting the  
printer/copier to the  
output tray  
Transparencies stick  
together after copying  
Select the Transparency Separators feature to eliminate the problem.  
For more information about this feature refer to the section entitled  
Transparency Separators, in the User Guide (Copier).  
Multiple sheets feed  
from the Trays  
Do not fill the paper trays above the MAX fill line indicator. Trays 1  
and 2 hold approximately 520 sheets each of 24 lb. (90 gsm)  
paper. Tray 3 850 sheets 24 lb. (90 gsm) paper, Tray 4: 1150  
sheets 24 lb. (90 gsm) paper  
Remove the paper from the Tray and fan the sheets to separate  
the joined sheets.  
Predrilled sheets may stick together at the holes. Remove the  
paper from the Tray and fan the sheets to separate the joined  
sheets  
Multiple sheets feed  
from Tray 5 (Bypass)  
Paper and transparencies may stick together if environmental  
conditions are too dry and cause excessive static. Increase the  
humidity level in the printer/copier room to minimize static.  
Do not overload Tray 5 (Bypass).  
Gently fan transparencies to separate the sheets before you load  
them into Tray 5 (Bypass). If multiple sheet feeding continues,  
feed the transparencies one at a time from Tray 5 (Bypass).  
Sheets will not feed  
from the Tray 5  
(Bypass)  
Ensure that the height of the stack does not exceed the MAX fill  
line.  
Check that the paper guide is not too tight. The paper guide  
should be adjusted to be just snug against the paper stack.  
Paper jams when  
exiting the Trays  
Ensure that the edge guides of the paper trays fit snugly against  
the paper stack.  
Do not fill the paper trays above the MAX fill line indicator. Tray 1  
and 2 hold approximately 520 sheets of 24 lb. (90gsm) paper.  
Tray 3 holds approximately 850 sheets of 24 lb. (90gsm) paper  
and tray 4 holds approximately 1150 sheets of 24lb (90 gsm)  
paper. Close the Tray slowly to avoid shifting the paper stack.  
5–13  
   
USER GUIDE (TROUBLESHOOTING)  
Problem  
Suggested Solution  
Output jams when  
exiting the printer/  
copier to the Center  
Output Tray (when the  
Finisher is installed)  
Ensure the paper matches the type defined for the paper tray.  
When the Finisher Transport is present the Center Output Tray  
can hold up to 200 sheets of 24 lb. (90 gsm) paper. Empty the  
Tray when output approaches this limit, to ensure continuous  
production.  
Ensure the first sheet is not blocking the paper exit, particularly  
for 11x17 inch output.  
Output jams when  
exiting the printer/  
copier to the Center  
Output Tray (when the  
Finisher is not  
Ensure the paper matches the type defined for the Tray.  
The Center Output Tray has a capacity of 400 sheets of 24lb  
(90gsm) paper. Remove the output when it approached this limit  
to ensure continuous production. Ensure the first sheet is not  
blocking the paper exit, particularly for 11x17 inch output.  
installed)  
11 x 17 inch output  
blocks exit  
Ensure the first sheet of 11x17 inch output exits completely.  
Copies originating from The paper guide on Tray 5 (Bypass) may not be set correctly or may  
Tray 5 (Bypass) are  
skewed. Jams may be  
occurring  
be too tight against the paper stack. Ensure that the paper guide  
snugly touches the paper stack.  
Printer/copier does not For the Auto Paper selection to function correctly, the size of the  
make copies when original document must be the same size as the paper supply that is  
Auto Paper is selected. loaded in at least one of the trays. If not, select the paper tray size  
that best meets your needs. Or if you wish to continue to use the  
Auto Paper feature, load one of the trays with the same size paper as  
the original document.  
Loss of information or  
image deletions on  
copies made on paper  
that has been folded or  
creased.  
If you must use folded or creased paper, use a lightweight paper,  
24 lb. (90 gsm). Also, avoid imaging the copy paper in the are of  
the fold or the crease.  
Handle the copy paper carefully. Slight folds or creases may  
result in output deletions.  
5–14  
USER GUIDE (TROUBLESHOOTING)  
Problem  
Suggested Solution  
Excessive paper curl  
Paper curl may be a result of:  
The mass of toner coverage on the copy - the greater the  
toner mass, the greater the paper curl.  
The paper weight.  
The humidity conditions at the printer/copier.  
You can sometimes minimize curl problems by flipping the paper  
over in the tray and making the copies again. If excessive curl is  
still present, use a heavier paper.  
Ensure the paper matches the type defined for the Paper Tray.  
Attempt to minimize the amount of toner on the copy paper by  
selecting the Photo feature as the Original Type and /or the  
lighter and/or less contrast image quality options.  
When the Finisher is present the Center Output Tray can hold up  
to 200 sheets of 24 lb. (90 gsm) paper. Empty the output tray  
when output approaches this limit to ensure continuous  
production.  
The Center Output Tray has a capacity of 400 sheets of 24 lb. (90  
gsm) paper. Remove the output when it approaches this limit to  
ensure continuous production.  
Copying high density background areas or documents with  
alternating high and low density areas results in more curl.  
Attempt to reduce the amount of curl by adjusting the copy quality  
controls to reduce the amount of toner on the copies.  
Place the printer/copier and paper in a room with air conditioning  
and low humidity to minimize the moisture in the environment.  
Attempt to copy on thicker paper or on paper stock that is less  
sensitive to moisture.  
5–15  
USER GUIDE (TROUBLESHOOTING)  
Resolving Output Quality Problems Using Basic Copying, Added  
Features, and Image Quality Tabs  
For more information on the features on these tabs, refer to the  
section entitled Copier Features, in the User Guide (Copier).  
Problem  
Suggested Solution  
Moiré patterns on the  
copies  
This problem occurs when original documents have halftone images.  
Perform the suggested solutions in the following order:  
Use the Sharpness feature to select Softer options until the moiré  
patterns are not visible.  
If using Photo mode, switch to Text & Photo mode.  
Select Halftone as the Original Type.  
Rotate the original on the Document Glass by 180 degrees.  
Reduce or enlarge the output by 5%.  
The entire document is  
not being copied  
Enter the Original Size.  
Reduce the image.  
Ensure that the document placement matches the Original  
Orientation setting.  
Scattered, very light  
show-through images  
occur when copying a  
document that is on  
thin paper  
Select Background Suppression in the Preset Color Balance  
feature on the Image Quality tab.  
To eliminate the unwanted show-through images, place the thin  
(translucent) document on the Document Glass. Cover the  
document with a black (or very dark) sheet of paper that is the  
same size as the document you are copying.  
Place the 2-sided original document on the document Glass with  
a blank sheet of paper on top of it.  
A black border appears Select Auto Center in the Margin Shift feature or Border Erase on  
at the edge of the copy the Added Features tab.  
when a reduction  
option is selected  
A black border appears  
on the copy of a small  
document  
Select Auto Center in the Margin Shift feature or Border Erase  
on the Added Features tab.  
Or  
Program the Original Size on the Scan Options tab for the dark  
bordered document that you wish to copy.  
Colors are incorrect or  
Perform an Auto Gradation Adjustment.  
have shifted over time. For more information on Auto Gradation Adjustment, refer to the  
User Guide (Machine Administrator).  
5–16  
   
USER GUIDE (TROUBLESHOOTING)  
Problem  
Suggested Solution  
Deletions on the copy  
edges.  
Edge deletion on all sides of the copy is normal, and is greatest  
on the lead edge of the copy. Set the Border Erase feature,  
Variable Erase option, to 4mm to minimize the deletion. Select  
the size for the original document on the Scan Options tab and an  
appropriate setting from the Reduce/Enlarge option from the  
Basic Copying tab.  
Moisture may be present in the paper. Load a fresh supply of  
paper into the trays.  
Some deletions may be caused by small pieces of paper  
remaining in the printer/copier components after a paper jam has  
been cleared. When clearing a paper jam, be sure to look for and  
remove any paper fragments.  
Copies made from  
photographs show  
Most emulsions used to develop photographs have color. Sometimes  
this color shows on the border of the photograph. To prevent the  
color or background on color from being copied as part of the image or as background, use  
output edges one of the following suggested solutions:  
Select Background Suppression in the Image Quality Presets  
feature on the Image Quality tab.  
Use the Border Erase feature on the Added Features tab to  
deliberately erase the unwanted color or background from the  
edge.  
The copies made using Select the Original Size feature and program the exact size of the  
100% Reduce/Enlarge dark bordered document that you wish to copy.  
feature do not include  
the entire image along  
the edge of the  
document.  
Output is too light  
Use the Lighter/Darker feature to select a darker level. Select the  
Text or Maps option in the Original Type feature.  
Output is too dark  
Use the Lighter/Darker feature to select a lighter level. Select the  
Photo option in the Original Type feature  
Output has too much  
contrast  
Select less Contrast (toward Lower) on the Light/Dark/Contrast  
feature on the Image Quality tab.  
Select less Color Saturation (toward Lower) on the Sharpness/  
Saturation feature on the Image Quality tab.  
Output has low  
contrast  
Select more Contrast (toward Higher) on the Light/Dark/Contrast  
feature on the Image Quality tab.  
Select more Color Saturation (toward Higher) on the Sharpness/  
Saturation feature on the Image Quality tab.  
5–17  
USER GUIDE (TROUBLESHOOTING)  
Problem  
Suggested Solution  
Background on copies  
Examine the input document for the source of the problem.  
Ensure that the document is held flat on the Document Glass and  
that the document cover is closed.  
From the Image Quality tab, adjust the Lighter/Darker control to  
lighter.  
When making Black copies, select Black as the output color.  
Reduce the color Balance-Low Density values so that the  
background does not appear on the copies.  
When copying colors, set the Output Color to Auto Color and  
select Auto Exposure so that the background does not appear  
on the copies.  
Determine the type of document you are copying. From the  
Original Type feature, indicate whether the original is Photo &  
Text, Text, Photo or other color originals (Maps) for best copy  
quality.  
NOTE:You can select the Photo option for documents other than  
photographs if the document contains areas of different density, from  
light to dark, and all levels of density need to be copied.  
The copies are blurred  
when copying thick  
documents, three-  
dimensional objects, or  
books  
Increase the Sharpness.  
Select the Text or Other Color Originals (Maps) option in the  
Original Type feature  
Ensure that the document is held flat on the Document Glass and  
that the Document cover (DADF) is closed as much as possible.  
DO NOT force the cover closed.  
Copies have dark  
bands on the lead edge  
and a corner when  
100% Reduce/Enlarge  
is selected.  
The bands may be caused by curled edges on the document or  
by misregistration of the document on the Document Glass.  
Ensure that the document is registered correctly.  
Ensure that the Border Erase is at No Erase (2mm). Increasing  
the amount of the Border Erase should remove more of the dark  
bands. Increasing the amount of Border Erase, however, may  
eventually cause image loss.  
Copies have dark  
bands on the lead edge  
and a corner when  
100% Reduce/Enlarge  
is selected and the  
DADF is used.  
The bands may be caused by curled edges on the document or  
by misregistration of the document by the Duplex Automatic  
Document Feeder (DADF).  
Ensure that the document is registered correctly.  
Ensure that the Border Erase is at No Erase (2mm). Increasing  
the amount of the Border Erase should remove more of the dark  
bands. Increasing the amount of Border Erase, however, may  
eventually cause image loss.  
5–18  
USER GUIDE (TROUBLESHOOTING)  
Problem  
Suggested Solution  
Corner Shift appears in If the document is positioned on the Document Glass in the short  
the wrong area on the  
copy  
edge direction, and the paper used for copying is in the long edge  
feed direction, the copy will appear to be positioning the corner shift  
selection in the wrong corner. Corner shift selections are referenced  
from the Document Glass location.  
NOTE:Corner Shift is also intended only for documents that are  
smaller than the copy paper selected.  
Copies have black  
borders. Large black  
borders appear on the  
copies with documents  
smaller than the copy  
paper size.  
No shift is selected. Select Auto Center to eliminate the black  
borders.  
Also, select the Auto Center feature to eliminate the black when  
using the Duplex Automatic Document Feeder (DADF).  
Copies made from a  
newspaper, a map, or a  
photograph have  
The DocuColor Series printer/copier detects low densities of color  
and reproduces them. This is especially true with the Maps and  
Photo options. The background can be reproduced or eliminated  
by adjusting the Lighter/Darker feature toward lighter.  
background when  
Original Type is defined  
as Map or Photo.  
Newspaper show-through can be reduced or eliminated by  
backing the document with a black sheet of paper.  
Use the Auto Exposure option in the Image Quality tab.  
The image density of  
This defect is noticeable only when the input document has large  
the copy seems lighter solid areas. To reduce or eliminate this defect, select the Photo  
toward the trail edge option in the Original Type feature of the Image Quality tab.  
5–19  
USER GUIDE (TROUBLESHOOTING)  
Calling for Service  
There is information and support available at www.Xerox.com.  
There you can find answers to many of your questions, solutions  
to problems, order toner and supplies, and request service  
support.  
For information on clearing fault codes, refer to the section entitled  
Fault Codes, in this chapter.  
There may be times when you will not be able to correct a  
problem. When this happens, you should call for service. The  
numbers for calling for service are as follows.  
United States 800-821-2797  
Canada 800-821-2797  
Be prepared to provide a complete description of the problem to  
the service operator. This includes the following information:  
Machine Serial Number -  
Press the Machine Status button, then select Machine  
Information to view the serial number.  
Fault Codes  
The Fault Code will appear on the screen when a fault occurs.  
Defining the problem accurately may help to solve the problem  
over the phone and minimize downtime. If the problem cannot be  
resolved by telephone, a service representative will be dispatched  
to your machine promptly.  
5–20  
   
USER GUIDE (TROUBLESHOOTING)  
Fault Codes  
This section describes fault codes that are displayed on the  
screen. Fault codes, such as those described below, are displayed  
when an error occurs, preventing printing from ending normally, or  
when trouble has occurred on the machine.  
When a fault has occurred, refer to the following table to remedy  
the problem.  
Fault Code  
Cause/Remedy  
003-747  
Cause - An illegal print feature combination was set.  
Remedy - Check the print data.  
003-761  
Cause - The paper size in the Tray selected by Auto Tray  
Switching is different from the paper in the Tray selected in  
Tray Selection.  
Remedy - Change the paper size for the Tray, or change the  
paper type priority setting.  
003-795  
015-790  
Cause - The Reduce/Enlarge ratio exceeds the setting range  
when the scanned document is enlarged/reduced to the  
specified paper size.  
Remedy - Enter the Reduce/Enlarge ratio, or change the  
paper size.  
Cause - The scanned document is a copy-prohibited  
document  
Remedy - See the section entitled Illegal Copies in the front  
section of the User Guide to check the types of documents  
that can be copied.  
016-450  
016-452  
016-453  
Cause - The SMB host name has been set twice.  
Remedy - Change the host name.  
Cause - The IP address has been set twice.  
Remedy - Change the IP address.  
Cause - Failed to acquire the IP address from the DHCP  
server.  
Remedy - Set the IP address manually.  
016-454  
Cause - Could not acquire the IP address from DNS.  
Remedy - Confirm the DNS settings and IP address  
acquisition method setting.  
5–21  
   
USER GUIDE (TROUBLESHOOTING)  
Fault Code  
Cause/Remedy  
016-701  
Cause - PCL print data could not be processed due to  
insufficient memory.  
Remedy - Lower the resolution, or instruct printing again  
without setting 2 Sided printing or N Up.  
016-702  
Cause - PCL print data could not be processed due to  
insufficient space in the print page buffer.  
Remedy - Set Print Mode to Speed Priority, or use Ensure  
Print, or increase the size of the print page buffer, or add  
memory.  
016-735  
016-737  
Cause - An attempt was made to print a job template while it  
was being updated.  
Remedy - Wait a while before instructing printing again.  
Cause - An error occurred during reading of data from the job  
template pool server.  
Remedy - Check the access rights of the directory to which  
the job template is stored.  
016-739  
016-740  
016-741  
016-742  
Cause - Could not find the specified job template pool server.  
Remedy - Check the path name to the job template pool  
server.  
Cause - Could not log into the job template pool server.  
Remedy - Check the login user name, password, and other  
information.  
Cause - Could not connect to the job template pool server.  
Remedy - Ask the network administrator to check the  
network environment or server environment.  
Cause - The job template could not be stored to memory due  
to insufficient hard disk space.  
Remedy - Delete unwanted data from the hard disk to  
increase hard disk space.  
016-743  
016-748  
Cause - The settings on the job template pool server are  
incorrect.  
Remedy - Check the settings of the job template pool server.  
Cause - Printing is not possible due to insufficient hard disk  
space.  
Remedy - Reduce the number of pages of print data, for  
example, by dividing up the print data or printing one copy at  
a time when making multiple copies.  
5–22  
USER GUIDE (TROUBLESHOOTING)  
Fault Code  
Cause/Remedy  
016-749  
Cause - A JCL command syntax error occurred.  
Remedy - Confirm the print settings, or correct the JCL  
command.  
016-757  
016-758  
Cause - The entered password is wrong.  
Remedy - Enter the correct password.  
Cause - The account is not registered as an authorized copy  
user.  
Remedy - Contact the System Administrator.  
016-759  
016-760  
Cause - The maximum number of copies has been reached.  
Remedy - Contact the System Administrator.  
Cause - An error occurred during PostScript processing.  
Remedy - Set Print Mode to Print Priority, or increase the  
size of the print page buffer, or increase PostScript memory.  
016-761  
016-778  
Cause - An error occurred during image processing.  
Remedy - Set Print Mode to Speed Priority and instruct  
printing again. If this does not remedy the problem, print  
using Ensure Print.  
Cause - Conversion of the scanned image was discontinued  
due to insufficient hard disk space.  
Remedy - Delete unwanted data from the hard disk to  
increase hard disk space.  
016-779  
016-780  
Cause - An error occurred during conversion processing of  
the scanned image.  
Remedy - Instruct scanning again.  
Cause - An error occurred on the hard disk during conversion  
processing of the scanned image.  
Remedy - A probable cause is hard disk malfunction. For  
information about replacing hard disks, contact your Xerox  
Customer Support Center.  
016-781  
016-782  
Cause - Could not connect to the server during file  
forwarding by Scan Services.  
Remedy - Ask the network administrator to check the  
network environment or server environment.  
Cause - Could not login to the server during file forwarding by  
Scan Services.  
Remedy - Check the login user name, password, and other  
information.  
5–23  
USER GUIDE (TROUBLESHOOTING)  
Fault Code  
Cause/Remedy  
016-783  
016-784  
016-785  
Cause - Could not find the specified server path during file  
forwarding by Scan Services.  
Remedy - Check the path name of the server currently set to  
the job template.  
Cause - A write to server error occurred during file forwarding  
by Scan Services.  
Remedy - Confirm that there is sufficient space in the  
directory on the server, and that access rights are present.  
Cause - The file could not be sent due to insufficient space  
on the server’s hard disk by Scan Services.  
Remedy - Delete unwanted data from the server’s hard disk  
to increase hard disk space.  
016-787  
016-788  
Cause - The server IP address set to the job template is  
illegal.  
Remedy - Specify the correct job template.  
Cause - Failed to retrieve the file from the Web browser.  
Remedy - Refresh the browser page, or restart the browser,  
or turn the machine off then on again. Try retrieving the file  
again.  
020-530  
Cause - No correct operations were performed in a certain  
period of time.  
Remedy - Perform an operation within a certain period of  
time.  
An error occurred.  
Switch the machine Off  
then back On again.  
(***-***)  
Cause - An error occurred.  
Remedy - Turn the machine Off, wait for the display on the  
control panel to go out, then turn the machine back On again.  
If the same message is displayed, record the message in  
(***-***). Next, turn the machine Off, wait for the display on  
the Control Panel to go out, then contact your Xerox  
Customer Support Center.  
Abnormal End (***-***)  
Cause - An error occurred causing the operation to end  
abnormally.  
Remedy - Program the same operation again.  
5–24  
Booklet Creation 1-88  
Border Erase 1-48, 3-20  
Bound Originals 1-77, 3-17  
Build Job 1-86  
Calling for Service 5-20  
Certifications in Europe viii  
Changing Network Scanner Utility Settings 3-35  
Changing Settings in System Settings Mode 4-6  
Changing Toner Cartridges 1-111  
Checking Consumables 1-108  
Checking Paper Trays 1-107  
Checking Scan Jobs on the Machine 3-29  
Cleaning the DADF and Document Glass 1-110  
Color Balance 1-57  
Color Shift 1-56  
Configuring the Client for Scanning 3-33  
Configuring the PPD 2-63  
Configuring the Print Driver  
Windows 2000/XP 2-45, 2-55  
Windows 95/98/Me 2-8, 2-16  
Windows NT 4.0 2-26, 2-36  
Control Panel 1-4  
Conventions xix  
Symbols xix  
Copier Features 1-25  
Added Features Tab 1-38  
Basic Copying Tab 1-25  
Image Quality Tab 1-50  
Job Assembly Tab 1-83  
Output Format Tab 1-59  
Scan Options Tab 1-73  
Covers 1-66  
Create/Check Accounts 4-60  
DADF 1-8, 1-89  
Component Names and Functions 1-89  
Document Specifications 1-90  
Documents Not Recommended 1-91  
Loading the Documents 1-91  
Printing Delayed Print Jobs 2-107  
ii  
Setting Delayed Print Jobs 2-106  
Delete/Reset All Account Data 4-64  
Deleting Scan Jobs on the Machine 3-30  
Deleting Scanned Documents 3-32  
Deleting/Resetting Data by Account 4-61  
Differences Between Printing and Copying 2-69  
Document Glass 1-8  
Document Jams 5-8  
Left Cover (Top) 5-8  
Original Input Area and Document Glass 5-9  
Electrical Safety iii  
Disconnect Device iv  
Entering the System Settings Mode 4-5  
Environmental Notices for Canada xvii  
Environmental Notices for the USA xvii  
Error History Report 1-108  
Exiting the System Settings Mode 4-6  
Fault Codes 5-21  
Finisher 1-93  
Stapling Options 1-94  
Using the Finisher 1-93  
Getting to Know Your Copier 1-1  
How to Cancel Print Jobs from the Printer 2-74  
How to Cancel Print Jobs from the Workstation 2-74  
How to Cancel Print Jobs Using Internet Services 2-74  
How to Cancel Scanning Jobs from the Workstation 3-28  
How to Pause or Cancel a Scanning Job 3-28  
How to Scan Using the Mailbox 3-3  
Image Compression 3-24  
Image Quality Presets 1-58  
Auto Exposure 1-53  
Color Balance 1-57  
iii  
Color Shift 1-56  
Image Quality Presets 1-58  
Lighter/Darker/Contrast 1-54  
Original Type 1-51  
Sharpness/Saturation 1-55  
Image Quality/File Format Tab 3-22  
Auto Exposure 3-27  
Image Compression 3-24  
Lighter/Darker/Contrast 3-25, 3-26  
Original Type 3-23  
Image Rotation 1-79  
Importing Scanned Data 3-35  
To an Application 3-35  
In Canada vii  
Installing the Network Scanner Utility 3-33  
Required Environment 3-33  
Installing the Print Driver  
Macintosh 2-62  
Windows 2000/XP 2-43  
Windows 95/98/Me 2-6  
Windows NT 4.0 2-23  
Installing the Print Drivers 2-5  
Internet Services 2-110, 4-66  
Accessing Internet Services 2-116  
Configuring the Browser 2-113  
Features 2-117  
Printing Documents 2-118  
Proxy Server and Port Number 2-115  
Screen Structure 2-111  
System Structure 2-112  
Viewing and Deleting Jobs 2-120  
It’s Illegal in Canada xvi  
It’s Illegal in the USA xiv  
Job Assembly Tab 1-83  
Booklet Creation 1-88  
Build Job 1-86  
Stored Jobs 1-84  
Job Status 1-96  
Changing the Print Priority 1-97  
Checking Completed Jobs 1-98  
Delayed Print 1-103  
Deleting Stored Documents 1-105  
iv  
Outputting Sample Prints 1-101  
Outputting/Deleting Secure Prints 1-99  
Job Template 3-2  
Laser Safety iv  
Lighter/Darker/Contrast 1-54, 3-25, 3-26  
Loading Paper 1-17  
12 x 18 inch 1-23  
Tray 5 (Bypass) 1-17, 1-22  
Trays 1, 2, 3, and 4 1-22  
Loading Stock 1-19  
Paper 1-19  
Transparencies 1-21  
Machine Information 1-109  
Machine Specifications 1-114  
Dimensions and Weight 1-115  
Speed by Media 1-114  
Machine Status 1-107  
Billing Meters and Printing Reports 1-108  
Checking Consumables 1-108  
Checking Paper Trays 1-107  
Error History Report 1-108  
Machine Information 1-109  
Mailbox 3-5  
Maintenance 1-110  
Changing Toner Cartridges 1-111  
Cleaning the DADF and Document Glass 1-110  
Maintenance Safety v  
Making Copies from the Document Glass 1-12  
Making Copies Using Features 1-13  
Making Copies Using the DADF 1-11  
Managing Scanned Documents 3-32  
Margin Shift 1-45  
Auto Center 1-46  
Variable Shift 1-47  
Mirror Image/Negative Image 1-72  
Mixed Size Originals 1-76, 3-19  
Multiple Up 1-60  
Notices vii  
v
Certifications in Europe viii  
Environmental Notices for Canada xvii  
Environmental Notices for the USA xvii  
It’s Illegal in Canada xvi  
It’s Illegal in the USA xiv  
Radio Frequency Emissions vii  
Online Help 2-73  
Operational Safety v  
Original Orientation 1-80  
Original Size 1-74  
Original Type 1-51, 3-23  
Output 1-42  
Stapling 1-44  
Output Color 1-26, 3-6  
Output Format Tab 1-59  
Covers 1-66  
Mirror Image/Negative Image 1-72  
Multiple Up 1-60  
Poster 1-70  
Repeat Image 1-68  
Transparency Separators 1-63  
Output Trays 1-9  
Ozone Safety vi  
Paper 1-19  
Paper Jam Clearance 5-2  
Bottom Left Cover 5-4  
Center Tray Exit 5-7  
Duplex Unit 5-6  
Finisher Interface 5-7  
Finisher Top Cover 5-6  
Left Center Cover 5-4  
Top Left Cover 5-3  
Tray 5 (Bypass) 5-5  
Trays 1 to 4 5-5  
Paper Supply 1-35  
Tray 5 (Bypass) 1-36  
Paper Trays 1-9  
Poster 1-70  
Power Switch 1-8  
vi  
Printer Environments 2-2  
Printing Meter Reports 4-65  
Printing Procedure 2-70  
Printing Reports 1-108  
Prior to Printing 2-70  
Product Recycling and Disposal xviii  
Quick Start Guide to Copying 1-11  
Radio Frequency Emissions vii  
FCC in the USA vii  
In Canada vii  
Reduce/Enlarge 1-31, 3-13  
Auto% 3-15  
Independent X-Y% 1-34  
Presets % 1-32, 3-13  
Variable% 1-33, 3-14  
Repeat Image 1-68  
Resolving Hardware Problems 5-11  
Resolving Output Quality Problems 5-16  
Resolving Processor Problems 5-13  
Resolving Programming Problems 5-12  
Retrieving Scanned Documents 3-32  
Safety Extra Low Voltage Approval viii  
Safety Notices iii  
Electrical Safety iii  
Laser Safety iv  
Maintenance Safety v  
Operational Safety v  
Ozone Safety vi  
Sample Print 2-108  
Printing Sample Print Jobs 2-109  
Setting Sample Print Jobs 2-108  
Scan Options Tab 1-73, 3-11  
2 Sided Originals 3-12  
Book Duplex 1-81  
Border Erase 3-20  
Image Rotation 1-79  
Mixed Size Originals 1-76, 3-19  
vii  
Original Orientation 1-80  
Original Size 1-74  
Reduce/Enlarge 3-13  
Scan Size 3-16  
Scan Size 3-16  
Scanning in Batches 3-31  
Scanning Resolution 3-8  
Scanning with Mailbox 3-2  
Scanning, How to 3-3  
Scanning, Retrieving Documents 3-32  
Scanning, Using Templates 3-2  
Secure Print 2-103  
Printing Secure Print Jobs 2-104  
Setting and Changing the Administrator Password 4-3  
Setting and Deleting Mailboxes 4-58  
Setting Copy Mode Settings 4-24  
Basic Copying Presets 4-25  
Copy Control 4-39  
Copy Defaults 4-26  
Custom Colors 4-42  
Original Size Defaults 4-40  
Reduce/Enlarge Presets 4-41  
Setting Network Settings 4-42  
Setting Print Driver Properties on Macintosh 2-64  
Setting Print Mode Settings 4-43  
Allocate Memory 4-44  
Others 4-47  
Setting Printing Features 2-72  
Setting Scan Mode Settings 4-48  
Basic Scanning 4-48  
Other Settings 4-56  
Output Size Defaults 4-54  
Reduce/Enlarge Presets 4-55  
Scan Defaults 4-49  
Scan Size Defaults 4-53  
Setting the Common Settings 4-7  
Audio Tones 4-10  
Auto Gradation Adjustment 4-21  
Image Quality Adjustment 4-18  
Machine Clock/Timers 4-8  
Other Machine Settings 4-24  
Paper Tray Attributes 4-13  
Printing Priority 4-17  
Reports 4-23  
Screen Defaults 4-12  
viii  
Sharpness/Saturation 1-55  
Special Printing 2-77  
Adjusting Color Balance 2-94  
Adjusting Detailed Settings 2-98  
Adjusting Image Settings 2-92  
Adjusting Profile Settings 2-95  
Specifying Output Color for Printing with a PCL Driver 2-77  
Stapler Faults 5-10  
Stored Jobs 1-84  
Deleting a Job 1-85  
Retrieving a Job 1-85  
Switching the Printer Off-line 2-73  
Symbols xix  
System Administrator Data 4-63  
System Settings 4-2  
Touch Screen 1-7  
Transparencies 1-21  
Transparency Separators 1-63  
Blank Separators 1-64  
Separators + N Sets 1-65  
Tray 5 (Bypass) 1-17  
Auto Size Detect for Tray 5 (Bypass) 1-18  
Loading SRA3 Paper 1-24  
Trays 1, 2, 3, and 4 1-17  
Uninstalling the Network Scanner Utility 3-34  
Using the Copier/Printer as a Scanner 3-1  
ix  
August, 2003  
Prepared by:  
Xerox Corporation  
Global Knowledge and Language Services  
780 Salt Road  
Webster, New York 14580  
Translated by:  
The Document Company Xerox  
GKLS European Operations  
Bessemer Road  
Welwyn Garden City  
Hertfordshire AL7 1HE  
UK  

York Air Conditioner 035 09319 User Manual
Sharp Mx Ds11 User Manual
Samsung Aw1003m User Manual
Samsung Avmkh020ca0 1 User Manual
Samsung As24hpax User Manual
LENOVO Z70 80 02 User Manual
DELL C7016H User Manual
CRAFTSMAN 247.796890 User Manual
BROTHER EF4 B571 02 User Manual
BLACK DECKER BDH1850SM User Manual